peoplesoft 8.00.01 quality peoplebook · peoplesoft 8.00.01 quality peoplebook january 2001...

PeopleSoft 8.00.01Quality PeopleBook

PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Quality PeopleBook

SKU MAQSr8SP1B 1200

PeopleBooks Contributors: Teams from PeopleSoft Product Documentation and

Development.

Copyright © 2001 by PeopleSoft, Inc. All rights reserved.

Printed in the United States of America.

All material contained in this documentation is proprietary and confidential to PeopleSoft,

Inc. and is protected by copyright laws. No part of this documentation may be reproduced,

stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, including, but not

limited to, electronic, graphic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise without theprior written permission of PeopleSoft, Inc.

This documentation is subject to change without notice, and PeopleSoft, Inc. does not warrant

that the material contained in this documentation is free of errors. Any errors found in this

document should be reported to PeopleSoft, Inc. in writing.

The copyrighted software that accompanies this documentation is licensed for use only in

strict accordance with the applicable license agreement which should be read carefully as it

governs the terms of use of the software and this documentation, including the disclosure

thereof.

PeopleSoft, the PeopleSoft logo, PeopleTools, PS/nVision, PeopleCode, PeopleBooks, and

Vantive are registered trademarks, and PeopleTalk and "People power the internet." are

trademarks of PeopleSoft, Inc. All other company and product names may be trademarks of

their respective owners.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O N T E N T S i i i

C o n t e n t s

About This PeopleBookBefore You Begin ............................................................................................................xiii

PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals.............................................................................xiii

Related Documentation ................................................................................................... xiv

Documentation on the Internet ................................................................................... xv

Documentation on CD-ROM ..................................................................................... xv

PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions........................................................................ xvii

Typographical Conventions and Visual Cues................................................................xviii

Page and Panel Introductory Table................................................................................... xx

Comments and Suggestions............................................................................................. xxi

Chapter 1

PeopleSoft Quality Overview

Why PeopleSoft Quality? ................................................................................................ 1-1

Reducing the Cost of Quality .................................................................................... 1-1

Meeting Quality System Requirements..................................................................... 1-2

Creating an Environment for Continuous Improvement ........................................... 1-3

Characterize ...................................................................................................... 1-3

Stabilize............................................................................................................. 1-3

Maintain ............................................................................................................ 1-4

Improve ............................................................................................................. 1-4

Simplified and Flexible Data Collection................................................................... 1-4

Online Control, Evaluation, and Feedback ............................................................... 1-4

Identify the Cause and Take Corrective Action ................................................ 1-5

Managing Alarms.............................................................................................. 1-5

Exploratory Analysis and Reporting Environment ................................................... 1-5

Maximum System Flexibility.................................................................................... 1-5

Defining Your Quality Control Requirements .................................................. 1-6

Constructing Your Own Control Charts............................................................ 1-6

Creating Diverse Control Rules ........................................................................ 1-7

Interactive Analysis Tools................................................................................. 1-7

Integrating With Other PeopleSoft Applications........................................................... 1-11

Integrating With Third-Party Systems........................................................................... 1-11

P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 Q U A L I T Y P E O P L E B O O K J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1

C O N T E N T S i v P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Summary of PeopleSoft Quality Architecture ............................................................... 1-12

Chapter 2

Preparing to Implement

Understanding the PeopleSoft Quality Data Flow........................................................... 2-1

Recognizing Your Business Structure ............................................................................. 2-2

Workflow in PeopleSoft Quality............................................................................... 2-3

Setting Up Your Tables ................................................................................................... 2-4

Defining System Defaults and Establishing Business Units ..................................... 2-4

Defining Optional PeopleSoft Inventory Defaults .................................................... 2-5

Defining Optional PeopleSoft Purchasing Defaults.................................................. 2-5

Defining Optional PeopleSoft Manufacturing Defaults ............................................ 2-5

Defining Your PeopleSoft Quality Data ................................................................... 2-5

Chapter 3

Setting Up PeopleSoft Quality

Before You Begin ............................................................................................................ 3-1

Securing Your System ..................................................................................................... 3-2

Defining PeopleSoft General Options ............................................................................. 3-2

Defining PeopleSoft Quality Business Units................................................................... 3-3

Chapter 4

Defining Quality Methods

Overview of PeopleSoft Quality Methods....................................................................... 4-1

Control Charts ........................................................................................................... 4-2

Control Chart ID: 1 ........................................................................................... 4-3

Control Chart ID: 2 ........................................................................................... 4-4

Control Chart ID: 3 ........................................................................................... 4-5

Control Chart ID: 4 ........................................................................................... 4-6

Control Chart ID: 5 ........................................................................................... 4-7

Control Chart ID: 6 ........................................................................................... 4-8

Control Chart ID: 7 ........................................................................................... 4-9

Control Tests ........................................................................................................... 4-10

Control Procedures.................................................................................................. 4-12

Sampling Codes ...................................................................................................... 4-13

Setting Up Control Charts ............................................................................................. 4-14

Setting Up General Control Chart Information....................................................... 4-14

Entering Chart 1 Formulas ...................................................................................... 4-16

Entering Chart 2 Formulas ...................................................................................... 4-17

Copy Configuration Item Page................................................................................ 4-18

J A N U A R Y 2 0 0 1 P E O P L E S O F T 8 . 0 0 . 0 1 Q U A L I T Y P E O P L E B O O K

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O N T E N T S v

Chart Formula Definition Page ............................................................................... 4-19

Maintaining Control Tests ............................................................................................. 4-24

Establishing Control Procedures.................................................................................... 4-25

Defining Sampling Codes.............................................................................................. 4-28

Maintaining Characteristic Class Types.................................................................. 4-28

Maintaining Sampling Frequency Types ................................................................ 4-29

Chapter 5

Defining Graph and Display Preferences

Overview of Graph and Display Preferences .................................................................. 5-1

Graph Preferences ID: 1 - Variable Data Entry Default ................................... 5-2

Graph Preferences ID: 2 - Attribute Data Entry Default................................... 5-3

Graph Preferences ID: 3 - Analysis Default...................................................... 5-5

Graph Preferences ID: 4 - Advanced Analysis Default .................................... 5-6

Maintaining Graph and Display Preferences ................................................................... 5-8

Maintaining General Display Default Settings ......................................................... 5-8

Maintaining Histogram Display Default Settings ................................................... 5-12

Statistic Selections Page.......................................................................................... 5-13

Maintaining Control Chart Display Default Settings .............................................. 5-16

Maintaining Default Settings on the Pareto Chart Display ..................................... 5-17

Maintaining Default Settings on the Bar Graph Display......................................... 5-18

Maintaining Default Settings on the Line Graph Display....................................... 5-21

Maintaining Default Settings on the Box Plots Display.......................................... 5-22

Maintaining Default Settings on the Stats Matrix Display...................................... 5-23

Chapter 6

Defining Quality Functions

Overview of Quality Functions........................................................................................ 6-1

Integration with Other PeopleSoft Applications ............................................... 6-1

Maintaining Quality Functions ........................................................................................ 6-4

Hierarchy Field Selections Page ............................................................................... 6-7

Trace Field Selections Page ...................................................................................... 6-8

Chapter 7

Maintaining Measurement Plans

Defining Measurement Plans........................................................................................... 7-1

Maintaining Characteristics....................................................................................... 7-1

Formula Definition Page ................................................................................... 7-6

Defining Operator Instructions................................................................................ 7-10

Viewing Measurement Plan Configuration Information ............................................... 7-11


C O N T E N T S v i P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Reviewing Measurement Plans ............................................................................... 7-11

Displaying Characteristic Specifications ................................................................ 7-13

Chapter 8

Establishing Control Plans

Overview of PeopleSoft Quality Control Plan Configuration ......................................... 8-1

Before You Begin ............................................................................................................ 8-4

Defining Attribute Groups............................................................................................... 8-5

Understanding Attribute Groups ............................................................................... 8-5

Defining Attribute Labels.......................................................................................... 8-6

Maintaining Attribute Codes..................................................................................... 8-7

Defining Traceability Sets ............................................................................................. 8-10

Maintaining Stations...................................................................................................... 8-13

Defining Control Plans .................................................................................................. 8-14

Loading Control Plans............................................................................................. 8-14

Maintaining Control Plans ...................................................................................... 8-15

Creating Multiple Control Plans at Once ................................................................ 8-19

Maintaining Process Streams .................................................................................. 8-20

Viewing Control Plan Configuration Information......................................................... 8-25

Displaying Characteristics/Where Applied ............................................................. 8-25

Displaying Stream Specifications ........................................................................... 8-27

Displaying Control Limits....................................................................................... 8-30

Chapter 9

Collecting Quality Data

Overview of the Quality Data Collection Business Process ............................................ 9-1

Modes of Accessing Data Entry Pages...................................................................... 9-1

Entering Quality Data ............................................................................................... 9-2

Recalling a Pending Session ..................................................................................... 9-5

Editing a Completed Session..................................................................................... 9-8

Defining Data Entry Access Lists.................................................................................... 9-9

Maintaining Access Lists ........................................................................................ 9-10

Assigning Control Plans to the Access List ............................................................ 9-11

Entering, Maintaining, and Editing Quality Data .......................................................... 9-12

Modes for Control Plan Selection When Entering Data ......................................... 9-13

Selecting a Control Plan from an Access List................................................. 9-13

Selecting a Control Plan Using Hierarchy Fields............................................ 9-15

Modes for Accessing Quality Sessions When Maintaining or Editing Data........... 9-16

Selecting a Session from an Access List ......................................................... 9-16

Selecting a Session Using Hierarchy Fields.................................................... 9-17


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O N T E N T S v i i

Session List Page............................................................................................. 9-19

Methods of Entering, Maintaining, and Editing Quality Data ................................ 9-20

Subgroup Method............................................................................................ 9-21

Sample Method ............................................................................................... 9-25

Defects Page............................................................................................................ 9-30

Viewing Control Plan Instructions.......................................................................... 9-31

Reviewing Current Session Results ........................................................................ 9-32

Graph Display Page................................................................................................. 9-35

Probable Causes Page.............................................................................................. 9-36

Corrective Actions Page.......................................................................................... 9-37

Maintaining the Work Area ........................................................................................... 9-39

Performing the Purge Process ................................................................................. 9-39

Chapter 10

Reviewing Process Performance Information

Overview of the Alarm Review Business Processes ..................................................... 10-1

Operators Viewing Alarms...................................................................................... 10-1

Additional Quality Personnel Viewing Alarms....................................................... 10-2

Quality Analyst Reviewing Alarms ........................................................................ 10-2

Viewing Alarms............................................................................................................. 10-3

Defining Alarm Access Profiles.............................................................................. 10-3

Viewing Alarms Using an Access Profile............................................................... 10-5

Alarm Detail Page ........................................................................................... 10-8

Instructions Page ........................................................................................... 10-10

Sample Detail Page ....................................................................................... 10-11

Viewing Alarms Using Workflow............................................................................... 10-12

Performing the Alarm Workflow Process ............................................................. 10-12

Viewing Alarms from the Worklist....................................................................... 10-13

Reviewing Control Plan Performance ......................................................................... 10-14

Selecting Control Plans ......................................................................................... 10-14

Reviewing Process Streams .................................................................................. 10-16

Subgroup List Page ....................................................................................... 10-17

Reviewing Basic Statistics .................................................................................... 10-18

Reviewing Capability Indices ............................................................................... 10-19

Reviewing Attribute Statistics............................................................................... 10-21

Chapter 11

Using the Quality Server

Understanding the Quality Server.................................................................................. 11-1

Launching the Quality Server ........................................................................................ 11-1


C O N T E N T S v i i i P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Understanding the Quality Server Toolbar .................................................................... 11-3

Introducing the Quality Server Buttons .................................................................. 11-4

Loading Datasets Into the Quality Server...................................................................... 11-5

Understanding Datasets........................................................................................... 11-6

Defining Data Extractions....................................................................................... 11-8

Defining General Extract Information ............................................................ 11-9

Defining Extract Criteria............................................................................... 11-10

Executing the Data Extraction............................................................................... 11-13

Using the Selector Panel .............................................................................................. 11-14

Understanding the Selector Panel ......................................................................... 11-14

Creating a New Dataset or Modifying an Existing Dataset .................................. 11-16

Using the Selector Panel ............................................................................... 11-16

Using the Spreadsheet ................................................................................... 11-23

Creating Quality Server Templates.............................................................................. 11-25

Understanding Quality Server Layouts ................................................................. 11-25

Creating Quality Server Layouts........................................................................... 11-25

Applying Quality Server Layouts ......................................................................... 11-27

Saving Current Configuration Settings........................................................................ 11-29

Browser Options .......................................................................................................... 11-29

Chapter 12

Using the Quality Server Displays

Summarizing the Quality Server Charts ........................................................................ 12-1

Using the Quality Server Charts .................................................................................... 12-4

Using the Control Chart Display............................................................................. 12-4

Understanding the Control Chart Layout ........................................................ 12-4

Managing Subset Data for the Control Chart.................................................. 12-8

Interacting With the Control Chart Display .................................................... 12-8

Modifying Control Chart Graph Options ........................................................ 12-9

Executing Tests From the Control Chart Menu Bar ..................................... 12-10

Using the Histogram Display ................................................................................ 12-12

Understanding the Histogram Layout ........................................................... 12-12

Managing Subset Data for the Histogram..................................................... 12-15

Interacting With the Histogram Display ....................................................... 12-15

Modifying Histogram Graph Options ........................................................... 12-16

Executing Tests From the Histogram Menu Bar........................................... 12-17

Using the Bar Graph Display ................................................................................ 12-20

Understanding the Bar Graph Layout ........................................................... 12-21

Interacting With the Bar Graph Display ....................................................... 12-22

Modifying Bar Graph Options ...................................................................... 12-22


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O N T E N T S i x

Using the Line Graph Display............................................................................... 12-25

Understanding the Line Graph Layout.......................................................... 12-25

Managing Subset Data for the Line Graph.................................................... 12-27

Interacting With the Line Graph Display...................................................... 12-27

Modifying Line Graph Options..................................................................... 12-28

Using the Pareto Chart .......................................................................................... 12-28

Understanding the Pareto Chart Layout ........................................................ 12-29

Managing Subset Data for the Pareto Chart.................................................. 12-30

Interacting With the Pareto Chart Display .................................................... 12-31

Modifying Pareto Chart Options................................................................... 12-31

Using the Box Plots Display ................................................................................. 12-33

Understanding the Box Plots Layout ............................................................ 12-34

Managing Subset Data for the Box Plots ...................................................... 12-37

Interacting With the Box Plots Display......................................................... 12-37

Modifying Box Plots Graph Options ............................................................ 12-38

Using the Spreadsheet Display.............................................................................. 12-39

Understanding the Spreadsheet Layout......................................................... 12-40

Interacting With the Spreadsheet Display..................................................... 12-40

Using the Statistical Matrix Display ..................................................................... 12-41

Understanding the Statistical Matrix Layout ................................................ 12-41

Interacting With the Statistical Matrix Display............................................. 12-42

Saving and Printing the Quality Server Charts ............................................................ 12-42

Saving Quality Server Datasets and Displays ....................................................... 12-42

Saving a Dataset............................................................................................ 12-42

Saving the Display in HTML Format ........................................................... 12-42

Printing Quality Server Displays........................................................................... 12-43

Chapter 13

Integrating With Other PeopleSoft Applications

Before You Begin .......................................................................................................... 13-1

Integrating With PeopleSoft Purchasing........................................................................ 13-2

Reviewing Predefined Quality Function ................................................................. 13-3

RECV_INSPECT Quality Function................................................................ 13-3

Before You Begin ................................................................................................... 13-4

Quality Business Unit ..................................................................................... 13-4

Traceability Set ............................................................................................... 13-5

Attribute Groups ............................................................................................. 13-6

Measurement Plan........................................................................................... 13-6

Control Plan .................................................................................................... 13-6

Overview of PeopleSoft Purchasing Integration With PeopleSoft Quality............. 13-7


C O N T E N T S x P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Integrating With PeopleSoft Inventory........................................................................ 13-10

Reviewing the Predefined Quality Function ......................................................... 13-10

RMA Quality Function ................................................................................. 13-10

Before You Begin ................................................................................................. 13-11

Quality Business Unit ................................................................................... 13-11

Traceability Set ............................................................................................. 13-12

Attribute Groups ........................................................................................... 13-13

Measurement Plan......................................................................................... 13-13

Control Plan .................................................................................................. 13-14

Overview of PeopleSoft Inventory Integration With PeopleSoft Quality............. 13-14

Integrating With PeopleSoft Production Management ................................................ 13-16

Reviewing Predefined Quality Functions ............................................................. 13-16

When to Use the Different Production Management Quality Functions ...... 13-17

COMPLETIONS Quality Function............................................................... 13-18

COMPL NO MC Quality Function............................................................... 13-18

COMPL NO OP Quality Function................................................................ 13-19

Before You Begin ................................................................................................. 13-20

Quality Business Unit ................................................................................... 13-20

Traceability Set ............................................................................................. 13-20

Attribute Groups ........................................................................................... 13-21

Measurement Plan......................................................................................... 13-22

Control Plan .................................................................................................. 13-22

Overview of PeopleSoft Production Management Integration With PeopleSoft Quality

............................................................................................................................... 13-23

Passing Information to PeopleSoft Quality Using a Production ID.............. 13-23

Passing Information to PeopleSoft Quality Using Production Schedules..... 13-25

Chapter 14

Integrating With Third-Party Applications

Before You Begin .......................................................................................................... 14-1

Verifying Installation of PeopleSoft Quality........................................................... 14-1

Defining PeopleSoft Quality Configuration Information........................................ 14-2

Quality Function ............................................................................................. 14-2

Traceability Set ............................................................................................... 14-3

Attribute Groups ............................................................................................. 14-3

Measurement Plan........................................................................................... 14-3

Control Plan .................................................................................................... 14-3

Overview of PeopleSoft Quality Integration with Third-Party Applications ................ 14-4

System View of PeopleSoft Quality Integration with Third-Party Systems ........... 14-4

Understanding PeopleSoft Quality EIPs ................................................................. 14-5


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O N T E N T S x i

Understanding Quality EIP Message Data Rules.................................................... 14-6

Every Sample Requires Its Own Traceability Entry ....................................... 14-6

Variable and Defects Data Types Have a Maximum Sample Size ................. 14-7

Subgroup Completion Only Applies to Variables Data Type......................... 14-7

Order and Entry of Subgroup Values is Important ......................................... 14-8

PeopleSoft Quality EIP Working Data Scenarios ................................................. 14-10

Troubleshooting .................................................................................................... 14-19

Useful SQL ................................................................................................... 14-19

Application Engine Program......................................................................... 14-26

Chapter 15

Statistical Equations and Methods Used for Quality

Statistical Matrix............................................................................................................ 15-1

Basic Statistics ........................................................................................................ 15-2

Quartiles .................................................................................................................. 15-3

Skewness & Kurtosis .............................................................................................. 15-4

Process Capability ................................................................................................... 15-5

Normality Test ........................................................................................................ 15-6

Pearson Best-Fit ...................................................................................................... 15-7

Attribute Statistics ................................................................................................... 15-7

Distribution Analysis ..................................................................................................... 15-8

Histogram Statistics ................................................................................................ 15-8

Test Statistics .......................................................................................................... 15-9

Control Charts................................................................................................................ 15-9

Variable Control Charts ........................................................................................ 15-10

Attribute Control Charts........................................................................................ 15-11

Pareto Charts................................................................................................................ 15-12

Bar Graphs ................................................................................................................... 15-13

Box Plots......................................................................................................................15-13

Line Graphs ................................................................................................................. 15-13

References.................................................................................................................... 15-14

Index

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x i i i

A B O U T T H I S P E O P L E B O O K

The book provides you with the information you will need for implementing and using

PeopleSoft Quality. You can order the online version by requesting SKU FSCMB8SP1R0, or the

hard-copy version by requesting SKU MAQSr8SP1B 1200.

This section describes information you should know before you begin working with PeopleSoft

products and documentation, including PeopleSoft-specific documentation conventions,

information specific to the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management product line, how to order

additional copies of our documentation, and so on.

Before You Begin

To benefit fully from the information covered in this book, you need to have a basic

understanding of how to use PeopleSoft applications. We recommend that you complete at leastone PeopleSoft introductory training course.

You should be familiar with navigating around the system and adding, updating, and deleting

information using PeopleSoft windows, menus, and pages. You should also be comfortable using

the World Wide Web and the Microsoft® Windows or Windows NT graphical user interface.

Because we assume you already know how to navigate around the PeopleSoft system, much of

the information in this book is not procedural. That is, it does not typically provide step-by-step

instructions on using tables, pages, and menus. Instead, we provide you with all the information

you need to use the system most effectively and to implement your PeopleSoft application

according to your organizational or departmental needs. This book expands on the material

covered in PeopleSoft training classes.

PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals

The PeopleSoft Quality PeopleBook provides you with implementation and processing

information for your PeopleSoft Quality system. However, there is additional, essential

information describing the setup and design of your system that is contained in a companion

volume of documentation called PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals.

PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals consists of important topics that apply to many or all

PeopleSoft applications across the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management product line. Whether

you are implementing only PeopleSoft Quality, some combination of products within the product

line (for example, PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, and Manufacturing), or the entire

PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management system, you should be familiar with the contents of this

central PeopleBook. It is the starting point for fundamentals such as setting up control tables and

administering security.

In the PeopleSoft Applications Fundamentals PeopleBook, we've included common information

pertinent to all applications in the PeopleSoft Supply Chain Management product line, such as


P R E F A C E x i v P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

defining general options. If you're upgrading from a previous PeopleSoft release, you may notice

that we've removed some topics or topic headings from the individual application PeopleBooks

and consolidated them in this single reference book. You’ll now find only application-specific

information in your individual application PeopleBooks. This makes the documentation as a

whole less redundant. Throughout each PeopleBook, we provide cross-references to PeopleSoftApplication Fundamentals and other PeopleBooks.

Below you’ll find a list of those PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals sections that apply

specifically to PeopleSoft Quality.

Defining Financial and Supply Chain Management General Options describes how to set up

your basic structure and processing rules for PeopleSoft Financials and Supply ChainManagement applications using pages in the Define General Options menu.

Securing Your System explains how to set up application security for your system. The chapter

provides you with an overview of the PeopleSoft approach to application security and explains

the choices you must make in deciding what level of security to put in place throughout yoursystem, what key fields to secure, and whether it will be done by user IDs or user classes.

Maintaining Vendor Information explains how vendor information is positioned in the control

hierarchy, and guides you through the process of setting up vendors in the system. It also

discusses how to search for, inquire on, approve, inactivate, delete and report on vendors.

Structuring Procurement Options explains how to and where to enter basic system and default

information that doesn’t change or is used repeatedly throughout the systems for many aspects of

your payables and purchasing systems.

Working With Items discusses how to search for and work with items in the PeopleSoft

components. The topics covered include setting up and using substitute items, managing item

status, and defining quantity precision rules for item transactions.

Defining Item Control Values discusses how to set up item attributes using the Define Item

Controls menu. These attributes become the defaults or selection options for new items.

Defining Items discusses how to define items for PeopleSoft setID and business unit levels.

Items must be defined before you can use them in any PeopleSoft application.

Finding Item Information discusses the Inquiry and Report pages under the Define Items and

Define Item Control Data menus.

Managing Returned Material explains how to process returns in PeopleSoft Order Management

and PeopleSoft Inventory.

Managing Supply Chain Management Integration Points provides an overview of how

Supply Chain Management integrates with third party applications.

Related Documentation

To add to your knowledge of PeopleSoft applications and tools, you may want to refer to the

documentation of other PeopleSoft applications. You can access additional documentation for

this release from PeopleSoft Customer Connection (www.peoplesoft.com). We post updates and

other items on Customer Connection, as well.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x v

Important! Before upgrading, it is imperative that you check PeopleSoft Customer

Connection for updates to the upgrade instructions. We continually post updates as we

refine the upgrade process.

Documentation on the Internet

You can order additional copies of the PeopleBooks CDs through the Documentation section of

the PeopleSoft Customer Connection Web site: http://www.peoplesoft.com/

You’ll also find updates to the documentation for this and previous releases on Customer

Connection. Through the Documentation section of Customer Connection, you can download

files to add to your PeopleBook library. You'll find a variety of useful and timely materials,

including updates to the full PeopleSoft documentation delivered on your PeopleBooks CD.

Documentation on CD-ROM

Complete documentation for this release is provided on the CD-ROM PeopleSoft 8.00.01Financials/Supply Chain Management PeopleBooks, SKU CD-FSCMB8SP1R0.

Your access to PeopleSoft PeopleBooks depends on which PeopleSoft applications you've

licensed. You may not have access to some of the PeopleBooks listed here.

The CD includes the following PeopleBooks (presented in HTML format) that you can print in

whole or in part:

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Advanced Planning Client

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Application Fundamentals for Financials and Supply Chain Management

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Asset Management

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Billing

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Bills and Routings

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Budgets

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Contracts

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Cost Management

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Deduction Management

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Demand Planning


P R E F A C E x v i P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eBill Payment

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Engineering

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Enterprise Planning

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eProcurement

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eProduct Management

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eStore

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 eSupplier Collaboration

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Flow Production

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 General Ledger

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Inventory

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Inventory Planning

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Mobil Time and Expense

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Order Management

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Order Promising

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Payables

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Product Configurator

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production Management

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production Planning

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Projects

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Purchasing

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Quality

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Receivables

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Remote Order Entry

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Resource Management

• PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Treasury

• PeopleTools

• Setting Up Your Manufacturing System

• Using PeopleSoft Applications


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x v i i

• Using PeopleBooks

PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions

Throughout our product documentation, you will encounter fields or page elements that are used

on many application pages or panels. This section lists the most common page elements and

provides standard definitions.

Field or Page Element Definition

As of Date The last date for which a report or process includes data.

Description Freeflow text up to 30 characters.

Effective Date Date on which a table row becomes effective; the date that

an action begins. For example, if you want to close out a

ledger on June 30, the effective date for the ledger closing

would be July 1. This date also determines when you can

view and change the information. Pages or panels and

batch processes that use the information use the current

row.

For more information about effective dates, see PeopleSoft

8.00.01 Using PeopleSoft Applications PeopleBook,

“Working With Browser-Based Applications”.

EmplID (employee ID) Unique identification code for an individual associated

with your organization.

Language or Language

Code

The language in which you want the field labels and report

headings of your reports to print. The field values appear

as you enter them.

Language also refers to the language spoken by an

employee, applicant, or non-employee.

Process Frequency group

box

Designates the appropriate frequency in the Process

Frequency group box:

Once executes the request the next time the batch process

runs. After the batch process runs, the process frequency

is automatically set to Don't Run.

Always executes the request every time the batch process

runs.

Don't Run ignores the request when the batch process

runs.

Report ID The report identifier.


P R E F A C E x v i i i P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Report Manager This button takes you to the Report List page, where you

can view report content, check the status of a report, and

see content detail messages (which show you a description

of the report and the distribution list).

Process Monitor This button takes you to the Process List page, where you

can view the status of submitted process requests.

Run This button takes you to the Process Scheduler request

page, where you can specify the location where a process

or job runs and the process output format.

For more information about the Report List page, the

Process List page, and the Process Scheduler, see People

Tools 8.12 Process Scheduler PeopleBook, “Process

Scheduler Basics”.

Run Control ID A request identification that represents a set of selection

criteria for a report or process.

User ID The system identifier for the individual who generates a

transaction.

SetID An identification code that represents a set of control table

information or TableSets. A TableSet is a group of tables

(records) necessary to define your company’s structure

and processing options.

Short Description Freeflow text up to 15 characters.

Standard Unit of Measure

(UOM)

A type of unit used for quantifying in PeopleSoft systems,

and usually associated with items. Depending on the

application, units of measure might describe dimensions,

weights, volumes, or amounts of locations, containers, or

business activities. Examples include inches, pounds,

workhours, and standard cost dollars.

Unit (Business Unit) An identification code that represents a high-level

organization of business information. You can use a

business unit to define regional or departmental units

within a larger organization.

Typographical Conventions and Visual Cues

To help you locate and interpret information, we use a number of standard conventions in ouronline documentation.

Please take a moment to review the following typographical cues:


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x i x

monospace font Indicates PeopleCode.

Bold Indicates field names and other page elements, such as

buttons and group box labels, when these elements are

documented below the page on which they appear. When

we refer to these elements elsewhere in the

documentation, we set them in Normal style (not in bold).

We also use boldface when we refer to navigational paths,

menu names, or process actions (such as Save and Run).

Italics Indicates a PeopleSoft or other book-length publication.

We also use italics for emphasis and to indicate specific

field values. When we cite a field value under the page on

which it appears, we use this style: field value.

We also use italics when we refer to words as words or

letters as letters, as in the following: Enter the number 0,

not the letter O.

KEY+KEY Indicates a key combination action. For example, a plus

sign (+) between keys means that you must hold down the

first key while you press the second key. For ALT+W,

hold down the ALT key while you press W.

Cross-references The phrase "For more information" indicates where you

can find additional documentation on the topic at hand.

• Capitalized titles in italics indicate the title of another

PeopleBook. For example: For more information about

billing, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Billing PeopleBook.

• Capitalized titles in italics followed by chapter title in

quotes refer to a chapter in another PeopleBook. For

example: For more information about establishing rate

templates, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Projects PeopleBook,

“Integrating With PeopleSoft Billing and PeopleSoft

Contracts”

• Capitalized titles in quotes refer to another chapter of

this PeopleBook. For example: For more information

about contract status security, see “Securing Your

PeopleSoft Contracts System”.

• Capitalized titles refer to sections within this chapter of

this PeopleBook. For example: For more information

about Defining Contract Statuses, see Defining Your

Own Contract Statuses


P R E F A C E x x P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Text in this bar indicates information that you should pay particular attention to as you work

with your PeopleSoft system. If the note is preceded by Important!, the note is crucial and

includes information that concerns what you need to do for the system to function properly.

Text in this bar indicates cross-references to related or additional information.

Text within this bar indicates a crucial configuration consideration. Pay very close attention

to these warning messages.

Page and Panel Introductory Table

In the documentation, each page or panel description in the application will include an

introductory table with pertinent information about the page. Not all of the information will beavailable for all pages or panels.

Usage Describes how you would use the page or process.

Object Name Gives the system name of the panel or process as specified in the

PeopleTools Application Designer. For example, the Object Name of

the Detail Calendar panel is DETAIL_CALENDAR1.

Navigation Provides the path for accessing the page or process.

Prerequisites Specifies which objects must have been defined before you use the page

or process.

Access

Requirements

Specifies the keys and other information necessary to access the page.

For example, SetID and Calendar ID are required to open the Detail

Calendar page.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E F A C E x x i

Comments and Suggestions

Your comments are important to us. We encourage you to tell us what you like, or what you

would like changed about our documentation, PeopleBooks, and other PeopleSoft reference and

training materials. Please send your suggestions to:

PeopleSoft Manufacturing Product Documentation Manager

PeopleSoft, Inc.

4460 Hacienda Drive

Pleasanton, CA 94588

Or send comments by email to the authors of the PeopleSoft documentation at:

[email protected]

While we cannot guarantee to answer every email message, we will pay careful attention to your

comments and suggestions. We are always improving our product communications for you.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P E O P L E S O F T Q U A L I T Y O V E R V I E W 1 - 1

C H A P T E R 1

PeopleSoft Quality Overview

Today, quality professionals deal with competitive pressures to reduce costs, implement

international standards, continuously improve processes, and satisfy the customer. To address

these issues, PeopleSoft has developed a Supply Chain Quality Management solution that not

only includes PeopleSoft Quality but also Cost Management, Production Management,

Engineering, Inventory, Purchasing, and more. Through the implementation of PeopleSoft

Quality, you can move one step closer to achieving world-class quality throughout your supplychain enterprise.

Why PeopleSoft Quality?

Today’s manufacturing and distribution companies are faced with competitive pressures that have

never been faced before. Shorter product life cycles, continuous cost reductions, international

standards, and near-zero defects are just a few of the things that customers are demanding. As

competition intensifies, there is a greater need for information to help improve quality,

productivity, and (ultimately) competitive position.

One of the ways a company can improve its competitive position is by effectively managing

quality information. Quality information is an extremely valuable asset if you can obtain and use

it properly. But without the means to capture, retain, and share that information, costly levels of

scrap, rework, and repairs can spiral out of control. You need a solution that provides the right

information at the right time for the right personnel.

Now, with PeopleSoft Quality, you can regain control of your processes, automate labor-intensive

tasks, improve communication within your supply chain, accelerate your ISO 9000 certification,

and, as a result, strengthen your competitive edge. PeopleSoft Quality combines online Statistical

Process Control (SPC) data collection with the power of a relational database for unparalleled

quality analysis. Easy-to-use Statistical Quality Control (SQC) tools enable you to quickly access

and analyze critical quality characteristics. Interactive tools provide an intuitive environment for

you to create what-if scenarios, without altering your original data. You don’t have to be a

statistician or a programmer to use these powerful analysis tools. PeopleSoft created them

specifically to meet the demands of quality, engineering, and manufacturing professionals.

Reducing the Cost of Quality

Reducing the cost of doing business is a key factor to an organization’s success. In

manufacturing, the cost of quality is recognized as one of the most significant factors in

producing world-class products. It is estimated that billions of dollars a year are wasted due to


1 - 2 P E O P L E S O F T Q U A L I T Y O V E R V I E W P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

poor quality. In less demanding organizations, the cost can be 5 percent of sales, while others

incur up to 40 percent of sales.

Most costs can be attributed to excess variation in processes and products. But there is also a cost

associated with reducing variation. These costs can be distributed among four major categories:

detection costs, internal failure costs, external failure costs, and prevention costs. In general,

these are the costs associated with producing, identifying, avoiding, or repairing products that

don’t meet requirements.

While PeopleSoft Cost Management can help you capture and analyze the cost of Quality,

PeopleSoft Quality can help you avoid these costs. PeopleSoft Quality enables you to reduce

process and product variation with advanced control charting methods, Pareto analysis,

distribution assessment, and process capability evaluations. These tools help you dramatically

improve your supply chain quality, thus reducing your overall cost of doing business.

Meeting Quality System Requirements

Today, one of the most challenging global standards, ISO 9000, has created an enormous need to

organize, structure, control, and communicate all facets of your quality system.

PeopleSoft Quality combined with PeopleSoft Manufacturing, Inventory, and Purchasing,

facilitates the organization and maintenance of the quality information system (its structure,

control plans, and key documentation) throughout your enterprise. Online access and review of

these details improves communication, reduces procedural errors, and contributes to a successful

audit of your overall quality effort.

When integrating inspection procedures, operation instructions, and other controlled documents,

PeopleSoft Quality provides an environment for manufacturing consistency and continuous

improvement through the entire supply chain. Documenting statistically significant changes in

the manufacturing process is also critical. Control violations are automatically assessed with

immediate notification to the operator. These events can also be electronically distributed

internally or to the extended enterprise (suppliers or customers) using intelligent PeoplesoftWorkflow agents.

Once an out-of-control condition is determined, PeopleSoft Quality provides you with tools to

view the condition, indicate probable cause, and take corrective actions. This information is then

tied to the event and, specifically, to the point on the control chart. Additionally, each point

(subgroup) on the control chart contains a complete history of traceability data such as User ID,

Vendor ID, Serial ID, and Lot ID.

Plus, when you are receiving items on a purchase order or an RMA (Return Material

Authorization), monitoring and inspecting the quality of the item being received or returned is

essential. PeopleSoft Quality provides integration with PeopleSoft Purchasing and Inventory to

assist with these requirements.

Throughout the PeopleSoft environment, advanced security and audit tools provide you with the

ability to restrict operator access and maintain database integrity. In addition to your network,

database, and PeopleTools Online Security, PeopleSoft Quality provides audit trail information

on all critical areas of the Quality Management process, including, control plan modifications,

data entry events, control test violations, specification limit changes, and control limit changes.



Creating an Environment for Continuous Improvement

The functions and features within PeopleSoft Quality are designed to meet a broad range of

statistical quality control requirements in the supply chain. These tools enable you to meet therequirements of each activity within a continuous improvement model.

Continuous improvement model

This model incorporates four main continuous activities. Each activity validates the previous

activity. PeopleSoft Quality supports this model.

Characterize

This is the starting point. In this phase of the model, PeopleSoft Quality provides the tools you

need to review an initial set of data to determine what the process or product looks like;

statistically and graphically. At this stage, you determine what characteristics are important, the

distribution shape, the measurement system capability, the initial process capability indices, the

starting process yield, and Pareto of defects. In addition, you can design the control chart to

determine the correct subgrouping, sample frequency, control test sensitivity, and chart type.

Ultimately, you’ll use PeopleSoft Quality to establish a baseline and optimum method of control.

Stabilize

Once the baseline is established, you’ll use PeopleSoft Quality to help stabilize the process. A

process is any set of conditions, or system of causes, that work together to produce a given result,

such as a manufactured product. The set of conditions vary from time to time. Poor quality is the

result of excessive variation of these conditions, typically a variation from a specification or a

targeted output. You must control these conditions in order to minimize the variation within a

process. With PeopleSoft Quality, you can monitor this variation by using control charts,analyzing the data for significant changes, and taking immediate corrective action.

When a process is first analyzed, it usually exhibits excess variation; in other words, it’s out of

control. Starting SPC on an operation may initially halt production or cause overreaction in the

supply chain; therefore, PeopleSoft Quality enables you to initially monitor and control the

process offline, while reducing any negative impact to the operation. Once stability has been

realized, you’ll use online activities to identify and contain less frequent out-of-controloccurrences.



Maintain

Now that your process has been stabilized, PeopleSoft Quality provides all the tools you need to

maintain it. This is the point in the model where special causes creep into the process and must

be detected before they cause nonconforming products. Through automatic control limit

assessment, control testing, and alarm notification, PeopleSoft Quality helps you detect special

causes and keep your process in check. Once you’re in maintenance mode, you and your

customer can be very confident of the output produced by your process. Controlling your process

using PeopleSoft Quality helps you reduce rework, repairs, and scrap, thereby minimizingcustomer complaints and product liability.

Improve

When you need to improve your process, PeopleSoft Quality can help. A process in statistical

control doesn’t guarantee quality output, only predictable output. Your stable process may still

not be capable of producing products that conform to specification.

PeopleSoft Quality has a comprehensive analytical toolbox to enable you to explore your process

data, discover new ways to improve your quality, and verify your improvements.

As you introduce new people, machinery, equipment, and methods into your process, the control

charts are the first indicators of success. In addition, PeopleSoft Quality will help you

recharacterize and restabilize your process at the new levels of performance. Hence, the

continuous improvement cycle.

Simplified and Flexible Data Collection

The operator interface is one of the most sensitive parts of the data collection process. With

PeopleSoft Quality, your operators can use point-and-click pick lists for traceability items, to

provide an environment that is easy to use and navigate. You can view the appropriate chart or

graph at any time during the data collection process.

This one environment enables you to gather any combination of variable and attribute data.

Characteristics can have different subgroup sizes, control charts, and control rules, all within the

same data collection session. During data entry, characteristics can also be derived. For

example, an operator can enter measurements for two characteristics (width and length) while a

third measurement (area) is automatically calculated, using a predefined formula; for example,

width * length.

In addition to manual data collection, PeopleSoft Quality offers an XML-based publish and

subscribe architecture that enables you to automatically collect data from any measurement

device or electronic data collection system.

Online Control, Evaluation, and Feedback

As soon as data is entered, PeopleSoft Quality immediately evaluates it for specification and

control chart violations. Your operators can instantly view the control charts or graphics anytime

during the data collection process. Any control violations are also immediately routed to your



offline personnel, who can review the data and chart information and determine whether any

support action is necessary.

Identify the Cause and Take Corrective Action

Directly from the data collection page, your operators can provide information on what may have

caused an out-of-control problem and what corrective action they took. This information is also

routed to your offline support personnel, who can add causes, actions, and comments. All of this

information is associated with the control chart point and stored in the database for further

analysis and review.

Managing Alarms

PeopleSoft has developed tools to easily manage alarm notification.

Each time a process violates a statistical test or an individual measurement is out of specification,

an alarm occurs. Each alarm is properly identified with the associated control chart. You can

also send the alarms to a Worklist or through electronic mail, using PeopleSoft Workflow, to yoursupport personnel.

The Alarm Review pages within PeopleSoft Quality enable you to view details for an alarm, add

corrective action and comments, display representative graphics, and close out the alarm.

Exploratory Analysis and Reporting Environment

PeopleSoft Quality offers one of the most interactive and intuitive quality data analysis systems in

the industry. The open environment enables you to quickly view control charts, histograms, box

plots, and more. In addition, you can assemble a collage of graphics, charts, and statistical tablesto provide your company with meaningful reports and documents.

PeopleSoft Quality includes a powerful extraction process so you can easily build reusable

queries. These intelligent queries format the data into a spreadsheet and automatically fill the

environment with the appropriate control limits, specifications, and other relevant information

found in the database. Along with the sorting and filtering capabilities provided when defining an

extraction, you can also use mechanisms built directly into the analysis tools to explore the data

set.

With PeopleSoft Quality, you can create your own spreadsheets and export data and analysis

results directly into other spreadsheets. This enables you to easily input and analyze data for

process characterizations.

Maximum System Flexibility

PeopleSoft Quality enables you to easily configure your quality control environment. Each step

in your quality data collection process is identified in PeopleSoft Quality. The information

includes what you want to control and how you want to control your process.



Defining Your Quality Control Requirements

Defining your quality control requirements is simple using PeopleSoft Quality. The system was

designed to give you the utmost in flexibility when it comes to defining your processes and

products you want to collect quality control data against. All you need to do is define the three

pieces that make up the configuration in Quality. The pieces of configuration are the Quality

Function, Measurement Plan, and Control Plan.

Quality Function

The Quality Function determines which fields are displayed and available for data entry or query

on subsequent Quality pages and provides parenting for related process hierarchies and their

associated streams. When defining the Quality Function, you determine the trace and hierarchy

fields that are common to that quality application or functional area; that is, what information is

pertinent for collecting, storing, and reporting quality data. When recording inspection data

against a sampling, hierarchy fields determine what data you are entering sampling results

against, and trace fields are used to enter traceability information such as the Lot Numberassociated with that sampling.

Measurement Plans

Measurement Plans are groups of one or more characteristics combined together to form

measurement criteria for inspection and control. When creating characteristics for a

Measurement Plan, you determine the properties of the characteristic being measured, the

subgroup size, how to display the data on charts, and what quality control rules should be appliedfor each characteristic.

Control Plans

The Control Plan brings together application, measurement, and control and response criteria for

a specific product and process. Up until this point, all elements of configuration that you have

established haven’t been applied to a specific process. The Control Plan provides the remaining

element of configuration, defining your process and applying methods of inspection and controlto that process.

When defining a Control Plan, you reference a Quality Function that tells the system which fields

to display as hierarchy fields on the Control Plan. Then, for each individual hierarchy field

combination, you define the Measurement Plan that will apply. Each characteristic associatedwith the Measurement Plan becomes a stream with its associated details.

Constructing Your Own Control Charts

PeopleSoft Quality includes standard control charts commonly used throughout the industry.

This unique capability enables you to define specialized charts with your own formulas, labels,

and test zones. Each component of the chart can contain your special requirements.

For example, the point on the chart can be subtracted from the nominal specification value before

being plotted, or control limit formulas may contain a special constant to achieve 2.5 sigma

limits. With PeopleSoft Quality, you decide how you want to control your process.



Creating Diverse Control Rules

If your company has established specific tests to evaluate whether a new point plotted on the

chart is in or out of control, you can set the same tests and control limits in PeopleSoft Quality.

PeopleSoft Quality gives you the ability to automatically establish control limits and standard sets

of control tests to make implementation a breeze. You define your own subgroup levels. For

example, you can use the three-level phase approach for establishing control limits by setting

them to automatically calculate at 10, 20, and 30 subgroups. This gives your operation a

moderate level of control at 10 to 29 subgroups and fixed control at 30. You also have the option

of continued automatic recalculation at a point interval that meets your needs.

You can create control tests from the various Shewhart prototypes. You can selectively apply

these tests to mean or variance charts. They are evaluated when performing data entry functions.

You can control the sensitivity of each test by specifying the number of points to be evaluated

and the number of points in the pattern required to trigger a violation.

Interactive Analysis Tools

With PeopleSoft Quality analysis tools, you can explore, transform, and test data using easy-to-

view formats.

You can perform offline interactive analysis in the Quality Server. The Quality Server is an

analytical software service module that enables you to display, manage, and analyze Quality data.

You can use a dataset created by extracting data from your database, and you can add more data,

modify existing data, or delete data in a what-if scenario. For example, if you want to see the

results of a new process, you can change information in a control chart and examine your results.

If you like the result, you can then put the new process into active production online. If you don’t

like the result, you can delete the results and not affect your main database. The results are never

written to your database, but you can save the results to a file.

The following formats are instantly available using buttons on the Quality Server toolbar:

• Control Chart

• Histogram

• Pareto Chart

• Bar Graph

• Box Plots

• Line Graph

• Statistical Matrix



Control Chart

PeopleSoft Quality provides a standard set of control charts for variable and attribute data,

including XB/R, XB/s, X/MR, p, u, c, and np. You can build additional control charts such as

pre-control or hybrid. Functions and display settings include:

• Select and exclude points.

• Sweep points for details: subgroup data, test violations, traceability, and cause/actions.

• Redraw graph.

• Restore data.

• Variable size window.

• Fit points to window.

• Scroll summary window.

• Display point detail list.

• Display alarms.

• Display test zones.

• Display historical control limits in a step-wise fashion.

• Modify subgroup size.

• Modify or calculate control limits.

• Change control tests and reevaluate.

Histogram

You can view the distribution of your data, test for normality, and apply Pearson criteria for non-

normal distributions. You can display user-defined statistics. You have the ability to modify this

display to meet your company’s requirements. Options include:

• Select and exclude cells.

• Sweep cells for detail: boundaries, count, and percent.

• Redraw graph.

• Restore data.

• Variable size window.

• Scroll summary window.

• Display statistical summary.



• Display box plot.

• Display curve fit.

• Overlay specifications.

• Change specifications.

• Modify number of cells.

• Execute Mean Test and Standard Deviation Test.

Pareto Chart

Using a Pareto chart, you can view your top defects, probable causes, corrective actions, or

control test violations. PeopleSoft Quality has powerful filtering techniques to display these

attributes. PeopleSoft Quality will immediately redraw to display a full interactive analysis.

Filtering and redraw options include:

• Select and exclude cells.

• Redraw graph.

• Restore data.

• Display cumulative percentage; Lorenz curve.

• Display cell totals.

• Display top n cells.

• Group and filter.

• Display order of cells in ascending or descending order.

Bar Graph

With the Bar Graph tool, you can compare statistical values among multiple characteristics. You

can group the characteristics by machines, work centers, stations, or other components, for unique

within-process comparisons. Settings enable you to view the horizontal bar layout in ascending

or descending order and mark the minimum and maximum bars. Additional settings include:

• Choose comparison statistic.

• Display by selection: ascending or descending.

• Mark minimum and maximum bars.

• Fit bars in window.

• Display top n bars.

• Set scales.


1 - 1 0 P E O P L E S O F T Q U A L I T Y O V E R V I E W P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Box Plots

You can use the Box Plot feature to compare several distributions simultaneously. Using this

versatile tool, you can view your data by Box & Whisker plots, boxed capability graphs, or

simple min/max plots. Various settings enable you to display statistical summaries, overlay sixsigma regions, and modify graphic scales. Other options include:

• Choose a graph style such as Box and Whisker, capability graph, and min/max plots.

• Display summary statistics.

• Sweep plot for detail.

• Overlay 6 sigma region.

• Fit plots in window.

• Set scales.

Line Graph

With the Line Graph tool, you can overlay up to six lines of data in one display. Interaction with

the graph includes point selection and multipoint trend analysis that includes line fit statistics.Other options include:

• Plot up to six lines.

• Display symbols.

• Connect lines.

• Test for trends.

• Display point listing.

• Fit points to window.

• Sweep points for details.

• Restore data.

• Set scales.

Statistical Matrix

The Statistical Matrix tool displays information about your dataset. With the statistical matrix

format, you can view tabular formatted statistics related to one or more subsets of your dataset.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P E O P L E S O F T Q U A L I T Y O V E R V I E W 1 - 1 1

Integrating With Other PeopleSoft Applications

PeopleSoft Quality can be directly called from other selected PeopleSoft applications,

Purchasing, Inventory, and Production Management. With PeopleSoft Purchasing and

Production Management, a direct page-to-page interface enables you to begin a business activity

using one application and, at an appropriate point, to initiate a transfer to PeopleSoft Quality

sample data entry, automatically passing common information such as item, lot number, and

vendor information. Once the PeopleSoft Quality page is displayed, you can enter all inspection

observations required by the measurement plan and view the results and the alarm information

from the data entered online. Control is then returned to the originating application, upon

completion of the quality analysis.

With PeopleSoft Inventory, a business activity initiates a Quality sample data entry session

passing the relevant information. Then the operator can navigate to PeopleSoft Quality and

display the session that was originally created and enter all the inspection observations required

by the measurement plan and view the results and the alarm information from the data entered

online.

You can call PeopleSoft Quality from the following applications:

• PeopleSoft Purchasing for receiving inspection.

• PeopleSoft Production Management for completions and scrap of items on Production IDs and

Schedules.

• PeopleSoft Inventory for inspecting returned material on an RMA (Return Material

Authorization).

Plus, you can always invoke sample data entry directly from PeopleSoft Quality.

For more information about the details of the integration with other applications, see

“Integrating With Other PeopleSoft Applications”.

Integrating With Third-Party Systems

Many companies that are implementing manufacturing systems are using automated collection

devices or systems to assist in quality inspection and control. Through the use of the PeopleSoft

Application Messaging technology, you can easily pass the quality information collected from

these devices to PeopleSoft Quality.

The third-party system will pass collected quality control information to PeopleSoft Quality

through the use of an application message. The messages are posted to a queue. The PeopleSoft

Quality Analyzer will retrieve the message from the queue, analyze the data in the message, and

generate a second message with the results.

The transaction messages coming from the third-party system can be marked as move-only. In

this mode, the Analyzer doesn’t process the messages, but the data associated with the message is


1 - 1 2 P E O P L E S O F T Q U A L I T Y O V E R V I E W P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

moved immediately into the PeopleSoft database. This feature provides the ability to create data

entry sessions that can then be called up by operators for review and/or completion at a later time.

For more information about integrating with third-party systems, see “Integrating With

Third-Party Applications”.

Summary of PeopleSoft Quality Architecture

PeopleSoft Quality is composed of a set of services or modules: Web Services, EIP (Enterprise

Integration Point) Services, and the Quality Server. Each module provides support for a different

set of functions and tasks. The Web Services module provides the analysis and graphics to the

PeopleSoft Internet Architecture. The EIP Services module provides the PeopleSoft Quality EIP

with high performance statistical analysis. The Quality Server provides a Windows workstationwith highly interactive statistical analysis and graphics.

PeopleSoft Quality Services enable you to display, manage, and analyze quality data both on and

off the web. The Quality Server also provides a variety of ways to generate interactive charts,

graphs, spreadsheets, and statistics.

PeopleSoft Quality Web

Services Architecture

Internet Web Server

PeopleSoft

Application

Server

PeopleSoft

Quality Web

Services

Database

Server

Browser

PeopleSoft

Quality

Server

Optional Client Install

PeopleSoft Quality web services architecture

In this diagram you can see that the Web Services module provides all the analytical and graphics

capabilities for web enabled quality activities. The optionally installed Quality Server provides

additional functionality by utilizing Windows to create a highly interactive analysis environment.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L P R E P A R I N G T O I M P L E M E N T 2 - 1

C H A P T E R 2

Preparing to Implement

Implementing PeopleSoft Quality for your organization involves designing the system’s business

structure, then putting that structure in place. Take a close look at how your business operates.

Before you can make the most of our extraordinarily flexible design, you must determine the best

way to map your new system to your business structures, practices, and procedures.

You must map your needs out thoroughly before you actually begin entering data and

transactions. In this section, you will look at some of the planning you need to do as part of your

implementation process. You will also see the order in which you should populate your tables

once you choose your structure.

You must have a firm understanding of each of the concepts discussed in this section before

you implement any of them. If you carefully map out your ideas before implementation, you

will save a lot of time, effort, and money.

Understanding the PeopleSoft Quality Data Flow

PeopleSoft Quality combines online SPC (statistical process control) data collection with the

power of a relational database for unparalleled quality analysis. PeopleSoft Quality contains allyour quality control information for your environment.


2 - 2 P R E P A R I N G T O I M P L E M E N T P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

How PeopleSoft Quality works with other PeopleSoft applications

PeopleSoft Quality can be used in conjunction with PeopleSoft Purchasing or PeopleSoft

Inventory or PeopleSoft Manufacturing. For effective use of PeopleSoft Quality you need at least

one of the other PeopleSoft applications.

In addition, if you are currently using data collection devices to collect quality control

information, that information can be passed to the PeopleSoft Quality application through the

Quality Enterprise Integration Points.

For more information about the Quality Enterprise Integration Points see, “Integrating With

Third-Party Applications”.

How you choose to use PeopleSoft Quality all depends on your business needs. PeopleSoft is

flexible enough to be able to handle all of your business requirements.

Recognizing Your Business Structure

Your first goal with your newly installed PeopleSoft Quality application is to design your system.

What this means is that you’ll define your quality structure and define any inventory, purchasing,

and manufacturing attributes as if you were developing your own in-house system from scratch,

but without writing all the code. We’ve already anticipated the features and functionality you’ll

need through our application tables. So all you do is fill in the blanks, or rather, fill in the tables,as you add business units.

Before you set up your tables, you’ll need to make some key decisions regarding how you want to

define your system. As you begin making implementation decisions, you should consider how

you want to structure your Quality environment, such as the following:



• Which processes do you want to collect quality control information against in your

environment?

• Are you required to provide your customers with quality compliance information?

• What type of characteristics do you want to measure for these processes?

• Are you going to pass data from other PeopleSoft applications or other automated collection

devices to PeopleSoft Quality?

Plus, you’ll also want to carefully consider how you want to implement certain functionality

within other PeopleSoft applications, such as location accounting, storage areas, or whether to

track items using lots or serial numbers.

At a minimum, you must set up data in PeopleSoft Quality. In addition, depending on which

other PeopleSoft applications (Purchasing, Inventory, or Manufacturing) you are using you will

need to set up data for those particular applications. Because Quality can share common data

with other PeopleSoft applications, your data tables should already be set up as part of your

PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, or Manufacturing system.

To see the table loading sequence for For more information, see

PeopleSoft Inventory Table Loading Sequence for PeopleSoft

Inventory.

PeopleSoft Purchasing Table Loading Sequence for PeopleSoft

Purchasing.

PeopleSoft Manufacturing Preparing to Implement.

Workflow in PeopleSoft Quality

When an operator performs quality control measurements and enters inspection data that violates

one or more control tests, the system will generate an “alarm” condition. The system will create a

worklist notification for the individuals who need to take corrective action on the alarms. It will

create an email notification for those users who only need to be aware that an alarm was

generated. You have the option of choosing the worklist notification or email notification that

best suits the individual's responsibility or role in the process.

The worklist notification contains all the details of the alarm condition and by using the worklist,

the user can go the page to log corrective action(s). At this time, you can also review the working

control chart or graph for the alarm selected. The alarms will no longer appear on the worklist

after they receive a “worked” status. You set a switch on the process definition for the worklist to

determine when the worklist entries will change to the “worked” status. The options you have

are:

User Specified The status is unchanged, unless you manually reset it.

Saved The status will change to “worked” when you perform the

save action on the Workflow Session Review panel.

Selected The status will change to “worked” when you select it.



The email notification contains all the alarm text as well as the data entry session and the process

stream associated with the alarm. PeopleSoft assumes these individuals won’t need to perform

corrective action or review the displays online.

For more information about workflow, see PeopleTools 8.12 PeopleSoft WorkflowPeopleBook, “Understanding Workflow”.

Setting Up Your Tables

Because of PeopleSoft Quality’s relational design, the order in which you make decisions about

how you’ll use PeopleSoft Quality isn’t necessarily the order in which you enter information into

the system. Although certain pages can be considered as a group when making important

processing or implementation decisions, you must work with some pages before others when youset up your system for the first time.

In the following section, we outline the steps you need to take to:

• Define system defaults and establish business units.

• Optional PeopleSoft Inventory defaults.

• Optional PeopleSoft Purchasing defaults.

• Optional PeopleSoft Manufacturing defaults.

• Your PeopleSoft Quality data.

For each of these areas, we outline the tasks you need to complete, including the pages and

components you need. In addition, we provide chapter and documentation references to assist

you in completing each task.

Defining System Defaults and Establishing Business Units

After you’ve defined how you’ll use your system, you need to establish system defaults. The

following tasks outline what pages you need to set up system defaults and business units. You

will find all of these pages under Define Business Rules.

Task Page Path For more information, see:

Define Installation Options Define Business Rules,

Define General Options, Use

E-P, Installation Options,

Products link

Setting Up PeopleSoft

Quality.



Set Up Operator Defaults Define Business Rules,

Define General Options, Use

R-Z, User Preferences,

Overall Preferences link


Quality.

Create Quality Business

Units

Define Business Rules,

Establish Business Units,

Use N-Z, Quality Definition


Quality.

Defining Optional PeopleSoft Inventory Defaults

Once you set your system defaults and create Quality Business units, if you are using PeopleSoft

Inventory you’ll need to set up an inventory structure and enter item data. If you are using

PeopleSoft Inventory, you need to define this data before you set up the Quality configuration.

For more information about the table loading sequence for PeopleSoft Inventory, see

PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Inventory PeopleBook, “Preparing to Implement PeopleSoft Inventory”.

Defining Optional PeopleSoft Purchasing Defaults

If you’re using PeopleSoft Purchasing, there are additional system defaults and other information

(vendors, Purchasing business units) you need to define before you set up the PeopleSoft Quality

configuration.

For more information about the table loading sequence for PeopleSoft Purchasing, see

PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Purchasing PeopleBook, “Part: Implementing PeopleSoft Purchasing”.

Defining Optional PeopleSoft Manufacturing Defaults

Once you set your system defaults and create Quality Business Units, if you are using PeopleSoft

Manufacturing you’ll need to set up the manufacturing structure. Before you can set up the

manufacturing structure you must first define your inventory structure. If you are using

PeopleSoft Manufacturing, you need to define the data in PeopleSoft Inventory and

Manufacturing before you set up the PeopleSoft Quality configuration.

For more information about the table loading sequence for PeopleSoft Manufacturing, see

PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Setting Up Your Manufacturing System PeopleBook, “Preparing to

Implement”.

Defining Your PeopleSoft Quality Data

The last step in the table loading sequence is to set up your PeopleSoft Quality data.

The following tasks outline what data you need to load to fully utilize your PeopleSoft Qualityapplication:



Task Page Path For more information, see:

Maintain Control Charts

(optional)

Manage Quality, Define

Quality Methods, Use,

Control Charts

Setting Up Control Charts.

Maintain Control Tests

(optional)



Control Tests

Maintaining Control Tests.

Maintain Control Procedures

(optional)



Control Procedures

Establishing Control

Procedures.

Maintain Graph and Display

Preferences (optional)



Graph and Display

Preferences

Defining Graph and Display

Preferences.

Maintain Sampling Codes.

Both Characteristic Class

Types and Sampling

Frequency Types



Sampling Codes

Defining Sampling Codes.

Define Quality Functions Manage Quality, Maintain

Quality Plans, Use, Quality

Functions

Defining Quality Functions.

Define Traceability Sets Manage Quality, Maintain

Quality Plans, Use,

Traceability Sets

Defining Traceability Sets.

Define Attribute Groups Manage Quality, Maintain

Quality Plans, Use,

Attribute Groups

Defining Attribute Groups.

Define Stations Manage Quality, Maintain

Quality Plans, Use, Stations

Maintaining Stations.

Define Measurement Plans Manage Quality, Maintain

Quality Plans, Use,

Measurement Plans

Maintaining Measurement

Plans.

Define Control Plans Manage Quality, Maintain

Quality Plans, Use, Control

Plans

Defining Control Plans.

Maintain Control Limits

(optional)



Control Procedures

Establishing Control

Procedures.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P E O P L E S O F T Q U A L I T Y 3 - 1

C H A P T E R 3

Setting Up PeopleSoft Quality

Before you use PeopleSoft Quality, you must enter information in other PeopleSoft applications

and you must install the Quality Server. This section details the key setup pages and how they

affect PeopleSoft Quality.

Before You Begin

Before you can use PeopleSoft Quality for the first time, make sure the:

• Quality Server is installed and accessible from the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (NT only)

and (optionally) the Quality Server is installed locally on the client.

• Application security has been defined in your environment.

• PeopleSoft Quality application is installed in your environment.

• PeopleSoft General Options (user preferences) have been defined in your environment.

• Inventory environment is defined (items, locations, and inventory business units) if you are

using PeopleSoft Inventory.

• Purchasing environment is defined (items, vendors, purchasing business units) if your are using

PeopleSoft Purchasing.

• Manufacturing environment is defined (items, work centers, and machines) if you are using

PeopleSoft Manufacturing.

• PeopleSoft Quality Business Unit is defined.

For more information about installing the Quality Server, see PeopleSoft Installation andAdministration PeopleBooks.

For more information about defining the inventory environment, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Inventory PeopleBook, “Preparing to Implement PeopleSoft Inventory”.


3 - 2 S E T T I N G U P P E O P L E S O F T Q U A L I T Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

For more information about defining the purchasing environment, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Purchasing PeopleBook, “Part: Implementing PeopleSoft Purchasing”.

For more information about defining the manufacturing environment, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Setting Up Your Manufacturing System PeopleBook, “Preparing to Implement”.

Securing Your System

If you’ve ever been concerned about data integrity, confidentiality, or user productivity, you

understand the value of a well-designed security system. PeopleSoft applications use the

capabilities and flexibility of multilevel security to provide an efficient, effective solution to your

security issues.

For more information about establishing application security for PeopleSoft Quality, see

PeopleTools 8.12 Security PeopleBook, “Understanding PeopleSoft Security”.

Defining PeopleSoft General Options

PeopleSoft applications rely on tables to store not only your business transactions, but also the

structure and processing rules that drive your system. So before you can begin, you’ll need to set

up your basic framework (products installed for your system, individual user preferences, and

many other options) using pages in the Define General Options menu.

The content of this section is only part of what you need to know to define general options.

Other relevant information, because it is common to many applications, is located in your

PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals PeopleBook.

For more information about setting up General Options, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 ApplicationFundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Financials and Supply Chain Management

General Options”.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S E T T I N G U P P E O P L E S O F T Q U A L I T Y 3 - 3

Defining PeopleSoft Quality Business Units

Usage Prior to using PeopleSoft Quality, you need to define Quality Business

Units. Use the Quality Bus Unit (quality business unit) page to define

the Quality Business Unit. Quality Business Units are derived from

PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, or Manufacturing business units.

You can’t create an independent Quality Business Unit.

Object Name BUS_UNIT_QS

Navigation Define Business Rules, Establish Business Units, Use N-Z, Quality

Definition

Access

Requirements

Select an existing PeopleSoft Inventory, Purchasing, or Manufacturing

business unit.

Quality Definition - Quality Bus Unit page

The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of this

PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Business Unit, Description, and Short

Desc.

The system displays the Description and Short Desc (short description) from the existing

PeopleSoft Manufacturing, Purchasing, or Inventory business unit you selected. To change the

description, enter the Description and the Short Desc (short description) for the Quality Business

Unit.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L D E F I N I N G Q U A L I T Y M E T H O D S 4 - 1

C H A P T E R 4

Defining Quality Methods

PeopleSoft Quality provides a robust environment for implementing online Statistical Process

Control (SPC). PeopleSoft Quality utilizes SPC methodology to monitor a process for variations

that could cause it to become unstable or drift out of control. The purpose of monitoring the

process is to predict and prevent instability, rather than to rely on end-of-line run, after a

potentially defective product has been made.

PeopleSoft Quality provides you with many industry-accepted methods used for applying control

charts and testing for process control. You can use PeopleSoft Quality immediately because the

system is delivered with standard definitions for control charts, control tests, and control

procedures. If you decide to use the PeopleSoft Quality system’s standard definitions, you don’t

have to use this section to get started with PeopleSoft Quality. You can start by defining your

measurement and control plans. However, you can easily modify our standards or create new

quality methods to meet your specific requirements.

In this chapter, we discuss maintaining the quality methods that the PeopleSoft Quality system

will use throughout its processing, in both the online analysis and the offline analysis operationsand when using the Quality Server in standalone mode.

For more information about maintaining your measurement and control plans, see

“Maintaining Measurement Plans” and “Establishing Control Plans”.

Overview of PeopleSoft Quality Methods

PeopleSoft Quality provides a comprehensive list of standard methods you can use to begin

monitoring your processes for variation and analysis of process control.

PeopleSoft Quality utilizes the following methods to perform analysis of process control:

• Control charts

• Control tests

• Control procedures

• Sampling codes

Together, these quality methods help to identify out-of-control conditions as data is collected. As

a result, alarms may be generated and dispatched online to the appropriate recipients using

electronic mail or worklists using PeopleSoft Workflow.


4 - 2 D E F I N I N G Q U A L I T Y M E T H O D S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

For more information about the Quality workflow, see “Preparing to Implement”.

Control Charts

The most common SPC tool used to monitor a process is the control chart. Control charts are

graphical representations of data associated with a process plotted over time. Control charts are

used to monitor the process, determine the process stability, and determine when to leave the

process alone and when to make adjustments, and to investigate causes of unacceptable ormarginal quality.

PeopleSoft Quality provides you with seven industry-standard control charts. These charts are

time-series charts for monitoring and controlling processes or equipment in your environment.

A unique ChartID represents each control chart in PeopleSoft Quality. Each one represents a

different display format. The maintenance of control charts is often given to quality control

facilitators and analysts.

ChartIDs 1 through 7 are supplied as industry-standard system defaults. You can’t change

the formula fields for these charts.

Chart ID Description Data Type

1 X and Moving Range Variables

2 Xbar and Range Variables

3 Xbar and Sigma Variables

4 c Chart Defects

5 u Chart Defects

6 p Chart Defectives

7 np Chart Defectives

These tables illustrate the structure of each control chart.

Some control charts are made up of two individual sub-charts that are used to plot both

means and variances together. These sub-charts are labeled as chart 1 or chart 2 in the tables

and in subsequent discussions.



Control Chart ID: 1

Control Chart ID: 1



Control Chart ID: 2

Control Chart ID: 2



Control Chart ID: 3

Control Chart ID: 3



Control Chart ID: 4

Control Chart ID: 4



Control Chart ID: 5

Control Chart ID: 5



Control Chart ID: 6

Control Chart ID: 6



Control Chart ID: 7

Control Chart ID: 7

For more information about the industry formulas Peoplesoft Quality uses, see “Statistical

Equations and Methods Used for Quality”.

If you don’t want to use the standard charts, you can create charts specific to your process or

industry. Using the Control Chart component, you can define special charts with your own

formulas and labels. You can set each component of the chart to reflect your special

requirements. Each chart is applicable to a specific data type and can include either one or two

sub-charts; usually for plotting estimates of the mean and variance separately. You can specify

formulas for point plotting, variance estimating, and control limit calculations from calculator-

like pages.

For more information about control charts, see Setting Up Control Charts.


4 - 1 0 D E F I N I N G Q U A L I T Y M E T H O D S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Control Tests

To assess on-going control and stability, incoming sample data are tested against various

statistical conditions. Each condition is represented by a control test, which is applied, to

subgroups plotted on a control chart. PeopleSoft Quality includes a set of 17 default control tests.

Each test is based on a standard Shewhart pattern, but it can be adjusted for sensitivity to meet

special needs.

With PeopleSoft Quality, you can use these defaults or create your own control tests from the

industry-standard default Shewhart prototypes. You can selectively apply these tests to mean or

variance charts. These tests execute online against subgroup values collected when you perform

data entry. You can control the sensitivity of each test by specifying the number of points to

evaluate and the number of points in the pattern required for triggering a violation. When a data

point (subgroup) violates a control test, the system generates an alarm. You can identify the

control tests by the Test ID number. The Test ID has a specific test description, a prototype

number, and a chart number. You will see these items in the PeopleSoft Quality display pages

wherever defaults display.

Control Tests 1 through 17 are supplied as industry-standard system defaults. You can’t

change the prototype fields for these control tests.

Test ID # Description Prototype Chart k of K

1 Specification Limit Violation 1 1 1 of 1

2 Control Limit Violation

(mean)

2 1 1 of 1

3 Control Limit Violation

(variance)

2 2 1 of 1

4 Trend - 7 pts (mean) 4 1 7 of 7

5 Shift - 2 of 3 pts (mean) 6 1 2 of 3



8 Mixture - 8 pts (mean) 9 1 8 of 8

9 Systematic Variable - 14 pts

(mean)

5 1 14 of 14

10 Stratification - 15 pts (mean) 8 1 15 of 15

11 Trend - 7 pts (variance) 4 2 7 of 7

12 Shift - 2 of 3 pts (variance) 6 2 2 of 3



15 Mixture - 8 pts (variance) 9 2 8 of 8


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L D E F I N I N G Q U A L I T Y M E T H O D S 4 - 1 1

16 Systematic Variable - 14 pts

(variance)

5 2 14 of 14

17 Stratification - 15 pts

(variance)

8 2 15 of 15

The standard Control Test Prototypes are the defaults included with the PeopleSoft Quality

system. The prototypes are listed to illustrate the basic pattern evaluated. Each control test youcreate is a variation based upon a specific prototype.

Illustration Description

Value < LSL or > USL.

Current point beyond Zone A.

K consecutive points in Zone C or beyond.

K consecutive points steadily increasing or

decreasing.

K consecutive points alternating up and

down.

k of K consecutive points in Zone A or

beyond.



Illustration Description

k of K consecutive points in Zone B or

beyond.

K consecutive points in Zone C above &

below the centerline.

K consecutive points beyond Zone C.

To suit differing requirements, you can create your own tests, based on the existing prototypes.

For more information about creating control tests, see Maintaining Control Tests.

Control Procedures

With PeopleSoft Quality, you can define groups of control test and control limit milestones to

apply when performing online data collection and analysis. These groups of tests and limit

milestones are called control procedures. You can set up the control procedure and define the

order in which the control tests execute. PeopleSoft Quality performs the tests in the order you

specify.

PeopleSoft Quality delivers four control procedures predefined for your use. You can use these

four predefined control procedures as they exist, you can modify them to suit your needs, or youcan create your own set of control procedures.

Each of the four control procedures has tests associated with the Control Procedure ID number.

Within these standards, a higher-numbered procedure includes a new set of tests in addition to all

the tests included in the lower-numbered procedures.

PeopleSoft Quality provides the following predefined control procedures:

Control Procedure ID # Description Control Tests

1 Level I Specification Limit Violation

Control Limit Violation (variance)

Control Limit Violation (mean)

2 Level II Level I +



Control Procedure ID # Description Control Tests

Trend - 7 pts (mean)

Shift - 2 of 3 pts (mean)



3 Level III Level II +

Trend - 7 pts (variance)

Shift - 2 of 3 pts (variance)



4 Level IV Level III +

Mixture - 8 pts (mean)

Systematic Variable - 14 pts

(mean)

Stratification - 15 pts (mean)

Mixture - 8 pts (variance)

Systematic Variable - 14 pts

(variance)

Stratification - 15 pts (variance)

For more information about maintaining control procedures, see Establishing Control

Procedures.

Sampling Codes

Sampling codes are used to indicate inspection priorities among characteristics within a

Measurement Plan and to define the frequency of inspection sampling. PeopleSoft Qualityprovides you with the ability to maintain two types of sampling codes. These include:

• Characteristic class types

• Frequency class types

These sampling codes are used to enhance or prioritize inspection instructions. In addition, using

sampling codes can assist you in meeting customer or regulatory organization auditing, reporting,

and certification requirements.

For more information about sampling codes, see Defining Sampling Codes.



Setting Up Control Charts

Use the Control Charts component to define the control charts for process control and analysispurposes.

Later you can use the same charts when you analyze your data samplings with the Quality Server

in offline mode. You will be able to manipulate the data to see how some changes or adjustments

might improve your process. This is referred to as performing a what-if scenario.

For more information about the Quality Server and what-if scenarios, see “Using the Quality

Server”.

Setting Up General Control Chart Information

Usage When you create a new control chart, you will define the general

information that you want to associate with the control chart. Use the

General page to define the overall scope of your control chart such as

data type and testing zones.

Object Name QS_CL_CHART0

Navigation Manage Quality, Define Quality Methods, Use, Control Charts,

General

Access

Requirements

Enter the Control Chart ID. The Control Chart ID number is a

sequential number automatically assigned by the system. PeopleSoft

Quality starts the numbering at 101.

Control Charts - General page

Enter the Control Chart Name for your new Control Chart ID.

When you click the Copy From button, the Copy Configuration Item page displays.

Click the Copy From button if you want to create your new Control Chart by copying

information from an existing Control Chart. The Copy From button is only available

when you are adding a new Control Chart.



For more information about copying control charts, see Copy Configuration Item Page.

When you are saving a new or modified Control Chart, the system populates the Date Modified

field with the current date and time and the Modified By field with the user ID in use duringsave.

Select the Chart Prototype option you want to use when building control charts. If you select 1,

you will be able to define only one sub-chart, using the Chart 1 Formula page. If you select 2,

you’ll be able to define two sub-charts, using the Chart 1 Formula and the Chart 2 Formula pages.

Your selection will determine whether you need one or two sub-charts. The system default for

this field is 2.

Select the desired number of Zones. Zone numbers represent the number of divisions (measured

between the upper control limit (UCL) and the mean (CL) limit lines) used for control test

evaluations, typically measured in standard deviations. For example, if you select two zones,

there will be two divisions between UCL and CL and two divisions between CL and LCL.

Select the Data Type you want to associate with your new Control Chart. Types include:

Variables Data collecting option for measurable characteristics, such

as length, mass, or time, and for characteristics that are

derived from measurable characteristics, such as volume,

density, or area.

Defects Data collecting option for characteristics that represent

defect counts: counts of the number of defects observed

per unit, such as scratches, blemished, or missing sub-

components.

Defectives Data collection option for characteristics that represent

counts of defective units; counts of how many units are

defective using a pass/fail criteria.

Select Constant Subgroup Size if this chart won’t be applied to subgroups of varying sample

sizes. The constant subgroup size restricts selection of these charts, based upon the data type and

subgroup size defined, when you are defining characteristics within a Measurement Plan.

For more information about subgroup size, see “Maintaining Measurement Plans”.

When you click the Observ button, the Chart Formula Definition page will display. This page

enables you to create your own formulas for transforming observation input values. In this field,

you define how to calculate individual observations to serve as the basis for generating controlchart points.

For more information about defining formulas, see Chart Formula Definition Page.



Entering Chart 1 Formulas

Usage Use the Chart 1 Formulas page to define formulas for the first sub-chart.

These formulas define the test to determine the plotted points, variances,

and the upper, mean, and lower control limits for your control charts.



Chart 1 Formulas

Prerequisites This page is the second page in the Control Charts component. You

should enter data on the General page before coming to this page.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Control Chart ID and Control Chart Name.

Control Charts - Chart 1 Formulas page

Enter the Label you want to associate with your new sub-chart for the Control Chart ID.

Enter the formula for defining the plotted point in the Plot X field. You can enter the formula

directly in the field or you can click the Plot X (Plot Point Calculation Formula) link, and that

will take you to the Chart Formula Definition page.

Enter the formula for estimating the variance from the plotted points in the Vars V field. You

can enter the formula directly in the field, or you can click the Vars V (Variance Calculation

Formula) link, and that will take you to the Chart Formula Definition page.

Enter the upper control limit formula and calculation order number in the UCL (upper control

limit) field. The order number enables sequencing of the calculations to suit the natural

derivation. Enter the order number directly on the page. The value for order number can only be

1, 2, or 3. You can enter the formula directly in the field, or you can click the UCL (UCL

Calculation Formula) link and that will take you to the Chart Formula Definition page.

Enter the mean limit formula and calculation order number in the CL (control limit) field. This

represents the median line on your chart. Enter the order number directly on the page. The value



for order number can only be 1, 2, or 3. You can enter the formula directly in the field, or you

can click the CL (CL Calculation Formula) link, and that will take you to the Chart Formula

Definition page.

Enter the lower control limit formula and calculation order number in the LCL (lower control

limit) field. Enter the order number directly on the page. The value for order number can only be

1, 2, or 3. You can enter the formula directly in the field, or you can click the LCL (LCL

Calculation Formula) link, and that will take you to the Chart Formula Definition page.


Entering Chart 2 Formulas

Usage Use the Chart 2 Formulas page to define formulas for the second sub-

chart. The Chart 2 formulas define the test to determine the plotted

points, variances, and the upper, mean, and lower control limits for your

control charts.



Chart 2 Formulas

Prerequisites This page is the third page in the Control Charts component. You

should enter data on the General and Chart 1 Formulas pages before

coming to this page.

Access

Requirements

Enter Control Chart ID and Control Chart Name.

Control Charts - Chart 2 Formulas page

Enter the Label you want to associate with your new sub-chart for the Control Chart ID.



Enter the formula for defining the plotted point in the Plot X field. You can enter the formula

directly in the field, or you can click the Plot X (Plot Point Calculation Formula) link, and that

will take you to the Chart Formula Definition page.

Enter the formula for estimating the variance from the plotted points in the Vars V field. You

can enter the formula directly in the field, or you can click the Vars V (Variance Calculation

Formula) link, and that will take you to the Chart Formula Definition page.

Enter the upper control limit formula and calculation order number in the UCL (upper control

limit) field. The order number enables sequencing of the calculations to suit the natural

derivation. Enter the order number directly on the page. The value for order number can only be

1, 2, or 3. You can enter the formula directly in the field, or you can click the UCL (UCLCalculation Formula) link, and that will take you to the Chart Formula Definition page.

Enter the mean limit formula and calculation order number in the CL (control limit) field. This

represents the median line on your chart. Enter the order number directly on the page. The value

for order number can only be 1, 2, or 3. You can enter the formula directly in the field, or you

can click the CL (CL Calculation Formula) link, and that will take you to the Chart Formula

Definition page.

Enter the lower control limit formula and calculation order number in the LCL (lower control

limit) field. Enter the order number directly on the page. The value for order number can only be

1, 2, or 3. You can enter the formula directly in the field, or you can click the LCL (LCL

Calculation Formula) link, and that will take you to the Chart Formula Definition page.


Copy Configuration Item Page

Usage Use the Copy Configuration Item page to enter the Control Chart,

Control Test, Control Procedure, Quality Function, Graph and Display

Preference, Attribute Group, Measurement Plan, Data Entry Access ID,

Alarm Access ID, Extraction Name, or SetID that you want to copy

information from. This option is available only in add mode.

Object Name QS_COPY0_PNL

Navigation To access the page, click the Copy From button found on multiple

pages in Define Quality Methods, Maintain Quality Plans, Collect

Quality Data, and Analyze Quality Data.



Copy Configuration Item page

Select an existing Control Chart, Control Procedure, Control Test, Quality Function, Graph and

Display Preference, Attribute Group, Measurement Plan, Data Entry Access ID, Alarm Access

ID, Extraction Name, or SetID that you want to copy information from in the Copy From field.

Click the OK button to have the system accept the data you entered and save the data to the

database. In this case, the system dismisses the page after the data is saved. The system will takeyou back to the page where you started.

Click the Cancel button when you don’t want to save the information you entered on the page,and you want to exit the page. The system will take you back to the page where you started.

Chart Formula Definition Page

Usage Use the Chart Formula Definition page to assist you when entering

formulas on the General, Chart 1 Formulas, or Chart 2 Formulas page.

The Chart Formula Definition page is a calculator-like page that enables

you to enter formulas with ease.

Object Name QS_CHART_CALC_PNL

Navigation To access this page, click the Observ (Observation Formula) link on the

General page or any of the formula links on the Chart 1 Formulas or

Chart 2 Formulas page.



Chart Formula Definition page

You can enter formulas using the calculator number pad, or you can select a preset formula item

represented by each of the function buttons.

When defining algebraic calculations, always enclose your formula in parentheses. For

example, SMEANX +3*(SQRT(SMEANX)).

Functions starting with G refer to subgroup statistics. Functions starting with S refer to summary

statistics over the entire window of subgroups used to calculate the limits. Except for Log

Functions, those starting with L represent standard factors. The entire fifth column of buttons

represents standard factors.

You can set up data types for your charts, such as a constant subgroup size. GVAL holds data for

many different sizes of subgroups.

You can change the Observ parameter on the General page from its initial value by transferring

to the Chart Formula Definition page. The GVAL subgroup is specific to this software. For

example, you can take GVAL and subtract it from the nominal specification limit value. This is a

unique and powerful feature because this type of formula is usually hard-coded andunchangeable.

Traditionally, nothing is changed once the setup is completed. However, with PeopleSoft

Quality, you can change parameters after the initial setup. The key quality engineers are usually

the ones who use these change features.



Click the Cancel button when you don’t want to save the information you entered on the page,

and you want to exit the page. The system will take you back to the page where you started.



Equation Construction Functions

The equation construction functions are accessible through the Chart Formula Definition page.

The table lists the function, its description, and an example of how it will be used for

computations in your charts.

For more information about the statistics that PeopleSoft Quality uses on the standard

Control Charts, see “Statistical Equations and Methods Used for Quality”.

When defining algebraic calculations, always enclose your formula in parentheses. For

example, SMEANX +3*(SQRT(SMEANX)).

Function Description Example

ABS( ) Absolute value of the

number specified within

parentheses.

ABS(GVAL)

Computes absolute value

of the reading entered.

INT( ) Integer portion of the

value specified within

parentheses.

INT(GVAL)

Computes integer portion

of the reading entered.

NINT( ) Nearest integer to the


parentheses.

NINT(GVAL)

Computes nearest integer

to the reading entered.

SQRT( ) Square root of the value

specified within

parentheses.

SQRT(GVAL)

Computes square root of

the reading entered.

LOG( ) Natural Log function.

Returns the natural log of

the specified value.

LOG(GVAL)

LOG10( ) Log based 10 function. LOG10(GVAL)

EXP( ) Exponential function.

Returns e raised to the

power of the specified

value.

EXP(2)

PI π (3.14159) GVAL ∗ PI

Multiplies the reading

entered for by 3.14159.

SSIZE Subgroup size of the

current characteristic.

SSIZE




FACT1 Factor 1 from the

specifications page.

FACT[1]


specifications page.

FACT[2]

NOMSL The center point between

the nominal spec lower

limit and the nominal

spec upper limit. SWLR,

SUPR.

NOMSL

LSL Lower spec limit of the


LSL

USL Upper spec limit of the


USL

GVAL Individual data value. Notation: xi

GSUM Sum of subgroup values. Notation: xii=�

1

GSUM2 Sum of subgroup values,

squared

Notation: xii=��

��

1

GMEAN Mean of subgroup

values.

Notation: χ

GRANGE Range of subgroup

values.

Notation: R

GSDEV Standard deviation of

subgroup values.

Notation: s

GMIN Minimum value in

subgroup.

GMAX Maximum value in

subgroup.

GSIZE Subgroup size. Notation: n

PREVX Previous plotted point

value.

SSUMX Sum of plotted points on

top chart (within sample

window).

Notation: ι

i

ix

=�

1

SSUMV Sum of plotted points on

bottom chart (within

sample window).

Notation: ι

i

iR

=�

1

SSUMZ Sum of sample sizes for

points on top chart

(within sample window).

Notation: ι

i

in

=�

1




SMEANX Mean of plotted points

on top chart (within

sample window).

Notation : χ

SMEANV Mean of plotted points

on bottom chart (within

sample window).

Notation: R

SMEANZ Mean of sample sizes for

points on top chart

(within sample window).

Notation:n

SSOBSV Sum of all observed

values (as specified in

the Control Chart main

window).

Notation:� x

CL1 Upper control limit. Notation: UCL

CL2 Center line on control

chart.

Notation: CL

CL3 Lower control limit. Notation: LCL

C2 c2 lookup table value. Notation: c2

C4 c4 lookup table value. Notation: c4

D2 d2 lookup table value. Notation: d2

D3 d3 lookup table value. Notation: d3

LA2 A2 lookup table value. Notation: A2

LA3 A3 lookup table value. Notation: A3

LB3 B3 lookup table value. Notation: B3

LB4 B4 lookup table value. Notation: B4

LD3 D3 lookup table value. Notation: D3

LD4 D4 lookup table value Notation: D4

Example

This example illustrates the formulas required for a Short Run Xbar and Range SPC Chart, where

Charts=2 and Data Type=Variables. The chart requires that factors be set in the configuration of

the characteristics in the Measurement Plan.

Chart 1

Label = SR Xbar

Plot X = ((GMEAN-FACT1)/FACT2)

Vars V =



UCL [2]= LA2

CL [1] = 0.0

LCL [3]= (-1 * LA2)

Chart 2

Label = SR Range

Plot X = (GRANGE/FACT2)

Vars V =

UCL [2]= LD4

CL [1] = 1.0

LCL [3] = LD3

Maintaining Control Tests

Usage Use the Control Tests page to define tests for control-based system

prototypes. These tests execute online and you can use them to assess

process control stability. The resultant test violations are reported and

annotated as alarms on control charts.

Object Name QS_CL_TEST

Navigation Manage Quality, Define Quality Methods, Use, Control Tests

Access

Requirements

Enter the Control Test ID. The Control Test ID number is a sequential

number automatically assigned by the system. PeopleSoft Quality starts

the numbering at 101.

Control Tests - Control Tests page



Enter the name (or Test Descr (test description)) of the test. As tests are violated, the description

becomes the alarm name.


Click the Copy From button if you want to create your new Control Test by copying

information from an existing Control Test. The Copy From button is only available

when you are adding a new Control Test.

For more information about copying control tests, see Copy Configuration Item Page.

When saving a new or modified Control Test, the system populates the Date Modified field withthe current date and time and the Modified By field with the User ID in use during save.

Test Prototype

Select the Prototype based on what kind of pattern you want to identify and test when plotted on

the Control Chart. The Prototype is the Western Electric rule type, as defined in the Control Test

Prototypes table. Each Control Test must be based on a single predefined prototype. After you

select a prototype, the Pattern Example will display.

The prototype illustration is standardized and won’t be adjusted based upon the number of

tested or trigger points entered for a specific control test.

For more information about the different prototypes, see Control Tests.

Apply To

Select which sub-chart (Chart 1 or Chart 2) within a control chart the test will be applied. This

provides naming and alarming distinction between means and variance tests.

Sensitivity

Enter the number of plotted points to be tested in the Tested Points (K) field. Enter the number

of points in violation necessary to trigger the alarm in the Trigger Points (k) field. For example,

you can enter 3 in the Trigger Points (k) field and 6 in the Tested Points (K) field. This would

indicate 6 plotted points to be tested; of those 6, you will need to have 3 points in violation of thepattern.

Establishing Control Procedures

Usage Use the Control Procedures page to define groups of control tests and

control limit promotion milestones to be applied for online analysis.

The Control Procedure page also lists the order in which the tests will be

applied.



Object Name QS_CL_PROC

Navigation Manage Quality, Define Quality Methods, Use, Control Procedures

Prerequisites You must first define your Control Tests on the Control Tests page.

Access

Requirements

Enter Control Procedure ID. The Control Procedure ID number is a

sequential number automatically assigned for you by the system.

PeopleSoft Quality starts numbering at 101.

Control Procedures - Control Procedures page

Enter a name that you want to assign to this set of test procedures in Control Procedure Descr

(control procedure description).


Click the Copy From button if you want to create your new Control Procedure by

copying information from an existing Control Procedure. The Copy From button is only

available when you are adding a new Control Procedure.

For more information about copying control procedures, see Copy Configuration Item Page.

When saving a new or modified Control Procedure, the system populates the Date Modified fieldwith the current date and time and the Modified By field with the user ID in use during save.

Limit Promotion Milestones

Limit promotion milestones indicate the number of subgroups required to achieve each control

limit level: Preliminary, Monitoring, and OnGoing. The logic is that as data is collected over

time (and corrective action is taken) the process becomes more stable. With each recalculation of

control limits, the limits should become tighter, reflecting the natural reduction in process

variation.

Enter the number of subgroups you require to achieve each control limit level in Preliminary,

Monitoring, and OnGoing. These settings are optional. Leave all three fields blank if automatic

control limit promotion is not desired. For characteristics referencing a control procedure that has



the control limit promotions turned off, you can assign operating control limits directly in the

Control Plans component.

Enter the number of subgroups at which limits will be recalculated (Recalculate) on a recurring

basis once you achieve the OnGoing status. This setting is optional and only applies to control

limits that were calculated using the promotion milestones.

For more information about limit promotion milestones, see “Establishing Control Plans”.

History Requirements

Enter the number of subgroups to recall from history to create a control limit calculation window

(Limits Calculate Window) and enter the number of subgroups you want to display (Graph

Window) when producing a graphic display during online data entry and analysis.

The history settings represent the number of subgroups you choose to have the system recall for

the purpose of calculating control limits. This number includes the currently entered subgroup.

For example, you can set the system to go back 20 points, after it arrives at the thirtieth point, to

recalculate the control limits. The Limits Calculate Window values are 2 through 250. The

Graph Window values are 1 through 99.

Control Test Evaluation Order

Select the Control Test you want to associate with this procedure. Pre-configured control tests

include:

• Control Limit Violation (mean)

• Control Limit Violation (variance)

• Mixture - 8 pts (mean)

• Mixture - 8 pts (variance)

• Shift - 2 of 3 pts (mean)

• Shift - 2 of 3 pts (variance)





• Specification Limit Violation

• Stratification - 15 pts (mean)

• Stratification - 15 pts (variance)

• Systematic Variable - 14 pts (mean)



• Systematic Variable - 14 pts (vars)

• Trend - 7 pts (mean)

• Trend - 7 pts (variance)

As you insert a Control Test(s) the system populates the Seq (sequence) field for you. This is the

order the procedure will execute the tests.

You can resequence the tests, using the Move Down and Move Up buttons.

Click the Move Down button to move a test down in the sequence order.

Click the Move Up button to move a test up in the sequence order.

For more information about control tests and test IDs, see Maintaining Control Tests.

The system detects and reports up to three alarms per the subgroup that you entered one for each

of the sub-charts and a specification violation that applies to both sub-charts.

For more information about the use of control procedures, see “Using the Quality Server

Displays”.

Defining Sampling Codes

PeopleSoft Quality provides you with the ability to define a catalog of sampling codes:

Characteristic Class Types and Frequency Class Types.

Use the Sampling Codes component to define characteristic class types and frequency class types.

You will use characteristic class types when defining measurement plans and frequency class

types when defining control plans.

Maintaining Characteristic Class Types

Usage Use the Characteristic Class Types page to maintain characteristic class

types. To qualify characteristics, you will use characteristic class types.

Object Name QS_CLASS_TYPE

Navigation Manage Quality, Define Quality Methods, Use, Sampling Codes,

Characteristic Class Types

Prerequisites You must already have a SetID.

Access

Requirements

Enter a SetID.



Sampling Codes - Characteristic Class Types page

The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in the

preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: SetID, and Description.


Click the Copy From button if you want to create your new characteristic class types by

copying the characteristic class types associated with an existing SetID.

For more information about copying characteristic class types, see Copy Configuration Item

Page.

When saving a new or modified characteristic class type, the system populates the Date Modified

field with the current date and time and the Modified By field with the user ID in use during

save.

Enter a Class Type and the Description for the class type. Characteristic class types will help

you qualify your quality control characteristics. You will use characteristic class types when

defining your characteristics on the Measurement Plan. These codes are specific to every

process. For example, many manufacturers use this technique to comply with ISO

Documentation requirements.

Characteristic class types are for reference and documentation only. They don’t control or

dictate actual inspection methods.

For more information about measurement plans, see “Maintaining Measurement Plans”.

Maintaining Sampling Frequency Types

Usage Use the Sampling Frequency Types page to maintain sampling

frequency types. To set the frequency for taking inspection samplings,

you would use sampling frequency types.

Object Name QS_FRQ_TYPE



Navigation Manage Quality, Define Quality Methods, Use, Sampling Codes,

Sampling Frequency Types

Prerequisites You must already have a SetID.

Access

Requirements

Enter a SetID.

Sampling Codes - Sampling Frequency Types page

The following elements are common to multiple pages in this application and are defined in thepreface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: SetID, and Description.


Click the Copy From button if you want to create your new sampling frequency types by

copying sampling frequency types associated with an existing SetID.

For more information about copying sampling frequency types, see Copy Configuration Item

Page.

When saving a new or modified sampling frequency type, the system populates the Date

Modified field with the current date and time and the Modified By field with the user ID in use

during save.

Enter the Frequency Code and the Description for the frequency code. Use frequency codes to

define the frequency of inspection samplings when defining control plans.

Sampling frequency types are for reference and documentation only. They don’t control or

dictate actual inspection frequency.

For more information about control plans, see “Establishing Control Plans”.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L D E F I N I N G G R A P H A N D D I S P L A Y P R E F E R E N C E S 5 - 1

C H A P T E R 5

Defining Graph and Display Preferences

Process visualization is an important technique for improving product quality. Effective use of

charting and graphing tools can enable you to identify process trends, assess process capability,

and determine the effectiveness of corrective actions. PeopleSoft Quality provides several

powerful yet simple-to-understand graphing tools that enable you to view and analyze quality

information in a variety of ways. The graphs and displays PeopleSoft Quality provides include:

• Histogram

• Control Chart

• Pareto Chart

• Bar Graph

• Line Graph

• Box Plots

• Statistical Matrix

In addition, you can modify the look and content of each graph to accommodate your own special

requirements. By adjusting certain settings, you can, for example, overlay related informationsuch as specification limits, summary statistics, or distribution curves.

Overview of Graph and Display Preferences

Graph and Display Preferences are used to define the presentation and statistical content of the

Quality Server graphs. Many of these settings are defaults, and you can change them

interactively from the Modify Graph Settings dialog boxes available for each graph type in the

Quality Server. By predefining the preferences for the individual graphs, you can minimize

operator interaction, when viewing the graphs for data analysis.

PeopleSoft Quality provides you with four predefined Graph Preference IDs. Each contains

standard default options and settings for each of eight standard graph types. If you don’t want to

use the default settings for the graphs, you can change the options and settings in the Graph and

Display Preferences component.

The following tables illustrate the predefined graph and display preferences that PeopleSoft

Quality provides.


5 - 2 D E F I N I N G G R A P H A N D D I S P L A Y P R E F E R E N C E S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Graph Preferences ID: 1 - Variable Data Entry Default

Page Option Setting

Graph and

Display

Preference

Data Transformation None

Data Distribution Normality Assumed

Minimum Observations 30

Calculate Sgrp Statistics

(calculate subgroup statistics)

No

Default Graph Type Control Chart

Enable Graph Selections Yes

Interactive Graphics Yes

Enable Modify Graph Dialogs No

Histogram Overlay Specs (overlay

specifications)

Yes

Overlay Distribution Curve Yes

Overlay Box & Whisker Plot No

Enable Summary Statistics Yes

Stats List (statistics list) OBSRV.MEAN.MINIMUM.MAXIM

UM.STDDEV.CP.CPK.CPL.CPU.PC

SPEC.PCLOWER.PCUPPER.PCTOT

AL.LSL.

Control Chart Fit Points to Window Yes

Display Ctl Limit Labels

(display control limit labels)

Yes

Indicate Point Alarms Yes

Enable Point Detail List Yes

Display TestZones Yes

Display Varying Limits Yes

Pareto Chart Fit Cells to Window Yes

Overlay Cumulative Lines Yes

Default Pareto Item Control Test Violations

Graph Order (Cells) Descending Values

Top N Cells 10

Bar Graph Fit Bars to Window Yes



Page Option Setting

Indicate Min/Max Bars No

Display Bar Values Yes

Default Graph Item mean

Graph Order Bars by Selection

Bar Display Limit (# Bars) 10

Line Graph Fit Points to Window Yes

Draw Connecting Lines Yes

Draw Points Yes


Box Plots Fit Plots to Window Yes

Overlay + / - 3 Sigma Region No

Graph Style Box and Whisker

Stats List OBSRV.MEAN.MINIMUM.MAXIM

UM.RANGE.

Stat Matrix

(statistical

matrix)

Matrix Orientation Subset versus Statistics

Subset Label Statistic




AL.LSL.USL

Graph Preferences ID: 2 - Attribute Data Entry Default

Page Option Setting

Graph and

Display

Preferences




Calculate Sgrp Statistics No

Default Graph Type Control Chart



Enable Modify Graph No



Page Option Setting

Dialogs

Histogram Overlay Specs No

Overlay Distribution Curve No




UM.SUMDEF.DEFPH.DEFPT.DEFP

M.DEFPU


Display Ctl Limit Labels Yes







Default Pareto Item Defects


Top N Cells 10




Default Graph Item Mean

Graph Order Bars By Selection




Draw Points Yes





Stats List OBSRV.MINIMUM.MAXIMUM.RA



Page Option Setting

NGE.

Stat Matrix Matrix Orientation Subset versus Statistics



UM.SUMDEF.DEFPH.DEFPT.DEFP

M.DEFPU

Graph Preferences ID: 3 - Analysis Default

Page Option Setting

Graph and

Display

Preferences




Calculate Sgrp Statistics No

Default Graph Type Histogram



Enable Modify Graph

Dialogs

Yes

Histogram Overlay Specs Yes







AL.LSL.USL










Page Option Setting




Top N Cells 25









Draw Points Yes






UM.RANGE.






AL.LSL.USL

Graph Preferences ID: 4 - Advanced Analysis Default

Page Option Setting

Graph and

Display

Preferences


Data Distribution Test for Normality


Calculate Sgrp Statistics Yes



Page Option Setting

Default Graph Type Histogram



Enable Modify Graph

Dialogs

Yes

Histogram Overlay Specs Yes


Overlay Box & Whisker Plot Yes



UM.STDDEV.RANGE.VARIANCE.S

TDERR.COEFVAR.SKEWNESS.KU

RTOSIS.ZLOWER.ZUPPER.LOWER

3S.UPPER3S.DISTYPE.Q1.MEDIAN

.Q3.AVEMEANS.AVEVARS.CP.CP

K.CPL.CPU.PCSPEC.PCLOWER.PC

UPPER.PCTOTAL.LSL.USL











Top N Cells 25









Page Option Setting



Draw Points Yes






UM.RANGE.




UM.STDDEV.RANGE.VARIANCE.S

TDERR.COEFVAR.SKEWNESS.KU

RTOSIS.ZLOWER.ZUPPER.LOWER

3S.UPPER3S.DISTYPE.Q1.MEDIAN

.Q3.AVEMEANS.AVEVARS.CP.CP

K.CPL.CPU.PCSPEC.PCLOWER.PC

UPPER.PCTOTAL.LSL.USL

Maintaining Graph and Display Preferences

Use the Graph and Display Preferences component to define new graph and display preferences

or to modify the settings on the predefined graph preferences PeopleSoft Quality provides.

The initial Quality Server display and graph content is dependent upon how you define these

preferences. If you are interacting with the Quality Server online (during data entry and alarm

review) you can’t change the individual graph settings using the modify menu option in the

Quality Server. The graphic that will display when you access the Quality Server online will be

the default for that graph preference you associate with the Measurement Plan.

If you are using the Quality Server offline against a defined data set, then you can choose to use

any graph you want. Plus, you can change the settings ad hoc for the graphs, using the modify

menu option in the Quality Server.

Maintaining General Display Default Settings

Usage Use the Graph and Display Preferences page to define the general

settings for calculations and the defaults for the graphic displays.

Object Name QS_GREF



Navigation Manage Quality, Define Quality Methods, Use, Graph and Display

Preferences

Access

Requirements

Enter a Graph Pref ID (graph preference ID).

Graph and Display Preferences - Graph and Display Preferences page

Enter the Graph Pref Name (graph preference name) for the Graph Pref ID.


Click the Copy From button if you want to create your new Graph Preference by

copying information from an existing Graph Preference. The Copy From button is only

available when you are adding a new Graph Preference.

For more information about copying a graph preference, see “Defining Quality Methods”.

When saving a new or modified Graph Preference, the system populates the Date Modified field

with the current date and time and the Modified By field with the user ID in use during save.

Calculations

Select a standard Data Transformation to apply to individual data set values. Transformations

can be used to enable normal calculations against data that have been determined to be of a non-

normal distribution. Data transformation options are:

None Apply no transformation to the data values.

X=1/X Use this to replace the measured values with their inverse

values.

X=Ln(X) Use this to replace the measured value with the natural log

of the values.


5 - 1 0 D E F I N I N G G R A P H A N D D I S P L A Y P R E F E R E N C E S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

X=Log10(X) Use this to replace the measured value with the log10

values.

X=Sqrt(X) Use this to replace the measured values with their square

roots.

X=X^2 Use this to replace the measured values with their squares

(x2).

Select the Data Distribution field that specifies the methodology to use in applying calculations

based on the distribution type. Options include:

Normality Assumed Applies the formulas for normally distributed data sets,

regardless of the actual distribution type.

Pearson Best Fit Determines the actual best-fit distribution type and applies

the associated calculations.

Test for Normality Performs a simple test for normality and, if the test fails,

determines the actual best-fit distribution type and applies

the associated calculations.

Enter the minimum number of observations required for non-normal distribution calculation in

the Minimum Observations field. The default is 30; the minimum is 25.

Select the Calculate Sgrp Statistics (calculate subgroup statistics) check box if you want the

Quality Server to calculate subgroup statistics for tools such as the histogram and statistical

matrix.

The subgroup calculations are performed based on the control chart assigned to the target

characteristic or subset.

Select the Default Graph Type that the Quality Server will use as the default display when

performing online operations such as data entry and alarm review. Options include:

Bar Graph Line Graph

Box Plots Pareto Chart

Control Chart

Histogram

For more information about the Quality Server, see “Using the Quality Server”. For more

information about the different graphics, see “Using the Quality Server Displays”.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L D E F I N I N G G R A P H A N D D I S P L A Y P R E F E R E N C E S 5 - 1 1

When you click the Histogram link the Histogram Display Options page displays.

For more information about histogram display options, see Maintaining Histogram Display

Default Settings.

When you click the Control Chart link the Control Chart Display Options page displays.

For more information about control chart display options, see Maintaining Control Chart

Display Default Settings.

When you click the Pareto Chart link the Pareto Chart Display Options page displays.

For more information about Pareto chart display options, see Maintaining Default Settings

on the Pareto Chart Display.

When you click the Bar Graph link the Bar Graph Display Options page displays.

For more information about bar graph display options, see Maintaining Default Settings on

the Bar Graph Display.

When you click the Line Graph link the Line Graph Display Options page displays.

For more information about line graph display options, see Maintaining Default Settings on

the Line Graph Display.

When you click the Box Plots link the Box Plots Display Options page displays.

For more information about box plots display options, see Maintaining Default Settings on

the Box Plots Display.

When you click the Stats Matrix link the Stats Matrix Display Options page displays.

For more information about stats matrix display options, see Maintaining Default Settings on

the Stats Matrix Display.



Maintaining Histogram Display Default Settings

Usage Use the Histogram Display Options page to define the default Histogram

settings.

Object Name QS_GREF2_PNL


Preferences, Histogram

Prerequisites This page is the second page in the Graph and Display Preferences

component. You should enter data on the Graph and Display

Preferences page before coming to this page.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Graph Pref ID (graph preference ID) and Graph Pref Name

(graph preference name).

Graph and Display Preferences - Graph and Display Preferences: Histogram Display Options page

Display Options

Select Overlay Specs (overlay specifications) if you want the characteristic specification limits to

display on the graph. If you don’t want horizontal specification lines to display on the histogram,don’t select this check box.

Select Overlay Distribution Curve to indicate whether a distribution curve (the best-fit or

normal) should overlay onto the histogram cells. This curve is based upon the active cells and

data distribution option specified in the Graph and Display Preferences page. If you don’t select

this check box, the distribution curve won’t overlay onto the histogram.

Select Overlay Box and Whisker Plot to enable a single box and whisker plot (indicatingminimum/maximum and quartile points) to be drawn beneath the histogram display.



Stats List (Summary

Statistics List)

Click to access the Statistic Selections page, where you

can select the statistics you want to associate with the

histogram and the order in which they display.

For more information about selecting statistics, Statistic

Selections Page.


database. In this case, the system dismisses the page after the data is saved. The system will take

you back to the page where you started.

Click the Cancel button when you don’t want to save the information you enter on the page, andyou want to exit the page. The system will take you back to the page where you started.

Statistic Selections Page

Usage Use the Statistic Selections page to associate statistics with the

Histogram, Box Plots, or Stats Matrix.

Object Name QS_STATSELECT_PNL

Navigation To access the page, click the Stats List = (Summary Statistics List) link

on the Graph and Display Preferences - Graph and Display Preferences:

Histogram, Box Plots, or Stats Matrix pages.

Statistic Selections page



Click the Clear List button to clear the display at the top of the Summary Statistics List

page.

Use the scroll functionality to display all of the statistics with their associated Statistic Descr

(statistic description) in the Statistics Catalog.

Click the different Statistic links to place them in your statistical list for the graphic or display.

There are 44 Statistics available in the Statistic Selections page. They are as follows:

Statistic Statistic Description Data Type Qualifier

MEAN Mean Any

OBSRV Observations Any

MINIMUM Minimum Any

MAXIMUM Maximum Any

STDDEV Std Dev (standard

deviation)

Any

RANGE Range Any

VARIANCE Variance Any

STDERR Std Error (standard error) Any

COEFVAR Coef Vars (coefficient

variables)

Any

SKEWNESS Skewness Any

KURTOSIS Kurtosis Any

ZLOWER Lwr Z Score (lower Z

score)

Any

ZUPPER Upr Z Score (upper Z

score)

Any

LOWER3S Lwr 3 Sigma Any

UPPER3S Upr 3 Sigma Any

DISTYPE Dist Type (distribution

type)

Any

SUMX Sum Any

SUMX2 Sum of Squares Any

SUMZ Sum Sgrp Sizes (sum of

subgroup sizes)

Any

SIZEN Subgroup Size Any

Q1 Quartile 25% Any

MEDIAN Median Any



Statistic Statistic Description Data Type Qualifier

Q3 Quartile 75% Any

AVEMEANS X Dbl Bar (X double bar) Any

AVEVARS R Bar Variables

CP Cp Variables

CPK Cpk Variables

CPL Cpl Variables

CPU Cpu Variables

CPK90 Cpk @ 90% Variables

PCSPEC Cr Variables

PCLOWER % Below Spec (percent

below specification)

Variables

PCUPPER % Above Spec Variables

PCTOTAL % Total Variables

SUMDEF Sum Defects Defects

DEFPH Defects/100 Defects

DEFPT Defects/1000 Defects

DEFPM Defects/Mil Defects

DEFPU Defects/Unit Defects

LSL LSL Any

USL USL Any

FACT1 Factor 1 Any

FACT2 Factor 2 Any

TRANS Transform Any




Click the Cancel button when you don’t want to save the information you enter on the page, and

you want to exit the page. The system will take you back to the page where you started.

For more information about the Histogram display, see “Using the Quality Server Displays”.



Maintaining Control Chart Display Default Settings

Usage Use the Control Chart Display Options page to define the default

Control Chart settings.



Preferences, Control Chart

Prerequisites This page is the third page in the Graph and Display Preferences



Access

Requirements



Graph and Display Preferences - Graph and Display Preferences: Control Chart Display Optionspage

Display Options

Select Fit Points to Window if you want the system to display the control chart with all points

compressed into a window with no horizontal scroll bar spaced according to the current window

size.

Select Display Ctl Limit Labels (display control limit labels) if you want the Control Chart

display to suppress the control limit labeling to conserve window space.

Select Display Alarm Indicators to have the system activate the alarm point enunciation for the

display, red triangles. The control chart will display the out-of-limit alarm points in triangles on

the graph so they are easily distinguishable from the circles or other shapes that represent the

graph points that are within limits. The defaults are set so you can distinguish the limit points as

triangles or circles, even if you don’t have a color display or color printer. Blue squares on the

control chart are used to indicate data points that have been edited, using the Edit Data

component. The blue square overrides the alarm indicator (red triangle) on the graph.

Select Display Test Zones if you want the + Sigma and – Sigma lines to display within the main

body of the Control Chart.



Select Display Varying Limits to display historical control limits associated with a dataset in a

step-wise fashion on the Control Chart. The system will draw the chart based on the most current

control limits, and they will appear as straight lines. If the time period depicted by the chart

includes prior limit calculations, then if you select this option, the system will display the limitsas expanding or contracting segments against a fixed scale.


database. In this case the system dismisses the page after the data is saved. The system will take




For more information about the Control Chart display, see “Using the Quality Server

Displays”.

Maintaining Default Settings on the Pareto Chart Display

Usage Use the Pareto Chart Display Options page to define the default Pareto

Chart settings.



Preferences, Pareto Chart

Prerequisites This page is the fourth page in the Graph and Display Preferences



Access

Requirements



Graph and Display Preferences - Graph and Display Preferences: Pareto Chart Display Optionspage



Display Options

Select Fit Cells to Window if you want the system to display the Pareto Chart with all cells

compressed into a window with no vertical scroll bar spaced according to the current window

size.

Select Overlay Cumulative (%) Lines if you want the Lorenz Curve and percentage indicators

to display on the chart.

Select the attribute type to plot from Default Pareto Item. Causes or actions to plot include:

• Control Test Violations

• Corrective Actions

• Defects

• Probable Causes

The Graphing Order [Cells] field specifies the order in which the cells will display on the chart.Options include:

• Ascending Values

• Descending Values

In the Top N Cells field, you can limit the number of cells to display based upon cell count and

the graphing order you selected. This sets the maximum number of bars you want to see in the

graph. The box will accept 0 through 99. If you enter 0, no limit will be imposed on the number

of bars displayed in your chart.





For more information about the Pareto Chart display, see “Using the Quality Server

Displays”.

Maintaining Default Settings on the Bar Graph Display

Usage Use the Bar Graph Display Options page to define the default Bar Graph

settings.



Preferences, Bar Graph



Prerequisites This page is the fifth page in the Graph and Display Preferences



Access

Requirements



Graph and Display Preferences - Graph and Display Preferences: Bar Graph Display Options page

Display Options

Select Fit Bars to Window if you want all bars on your Bar Graph to be compressed into a

window with no vertical scroll bar spaced according to the current window size.

Select Indicate Min/Max [<>] Bars (indicate minimum/maximum bars) so you can visually tag

the bars representing the minimum and maximum statistical values. You will be able to see theupper and lower limits of the bars on the chart.

Select Display Bar Values to see the actual statistical values displayed to the right of thecorresponding bar.

Select the Default Statistic you want to be plotted. Default statistics include:

AVEMEANS AVEVARS

COEFVAR CP

CPK CPK90

CPL CPU

DEFPH DEFPM

DEFPT DEFPU

DISTYPE FACT1

FACT2 KURTOSIS



LOWER3S LSL

MAXIMUM MEAN

MEDIAN MINIMUM

OBSRV PCLOWER

PCSPEC PCTOTAL

PCUPPER Q1

Q3 RANGE

SIZEN SKEWNESS

STDDEV STDERR

SUMDEF SUMX

SUMX2 SUMZ

TRANS UPPER3S

USL VARIANCE

ZLOWER ZUPPER

Specify the graphing order of the bars on the chart in the Graphing Order [Bars] field. The

graphing order can be descending or ascending which are based on the statistic value, or by

subset selection. Options include:

• Ascending Values

• By Selection

• Descending Values

The Bar Display Limit (# bars) limits the number of bars displayed based upon the statistics

value and the graphing order you selected. Enter a number from 0 through 99. If you enter 0,

there will be no limit imposed on the number of bars that can display on the graph.






For more information about the Bar Graph display, see “Using the Quality Server Displays”.



Maintaining Default Settings on the Line Graph Display

Usage Use the Line Graph Display Options page to define the default Line

Graph settings.



Preferences, Line Graph

Prerequisites This page is the sixth page in the Graph and Display Preferences



Access

Requirements



Graph and Display Preferences - Graph and Display Preferences: Line Graph Display Optionspage

Display Options

Select Fit Points to Window if you want the points on your line graph to be compressed into a

window with no horizontal scroll bar spaced according to the current window size.

Select Draw Connecting Lines if you want the system to draw connecting lines from point topoint.

Select Draw Points if you want the points to display in sequence.








For more information about the Line Graph display, see “Using the Quality Server

Displays”.

Maintaining Default Settings on the Box Plots Display

Usage Use the Box Plots Display Options page to define the default Box Plots

settings.



Preferences, Box Plots

Prerequisites This page is the seventh page in the Graph and Display Preferences



Access

Requirements



Graph and Display Preferences - Graph and Display Preferences: Box Plots page

Display Options

Select Fit Plots to Window if you want the Box Plot display to compress all boxes into awindow with no vertical scroll bar spaced according to the current window size.

Select Overlay +/- 3 Sigma Region so you can determine if a distribution curve (best-fit or

normal) should overlay onto the box plots. This option applies only to the Capability graph style

that you can select in the Graph Style field.

Select the Graph Style display you want. Display styles include:



Box and Whisker Use this to plot minimum/maximum and quartile regions.

Capability Graph Use this to plot +/- 3sigma estimates versus process

specifications.

Min and Max Plot (minimum

and maximum plot)

Use this to plot minimum, maximum, and mean values.

Stats List (Summary

Statistics List)


can select the statistics you want to associate with the Box

Plot and the order in which they display.

For more information about selecting statistics, see

Statistic Selections Page.






For more information about the Box Plot display, see “Using the Quality Server Displays”.

Maintaining Default Settings on the Stats Matrix Display

Usage Use the Stats Matrix (statistical matrix) Display Options page to define

the default Stats Matrix settings.



Preferences, Stats Matrix

Prerequisites This page is the eighth page in the Graph and Display Preferences



Access

Requirements





Graph and Display Preferences - Graph and Display Preferences: Stats Matrix Display Optionspage

Select the Matrix Orientation or layout of the spreadsheet in the Quality Server. Orientation

options include:

Subset vs Statistic (subset

versus statistic)

Displays a row for each subset of data and a column for

each statistic.

Statistic vs Subset Displays a row for each statistic and a column for each

subset of data.

Define your own Subset Label for the subset column.

Stats List (Summary

Statistics List)


can select the statistics you want to associate with the Box

Plot and the order in which they display.

For more information about selecting statistics, see

Statistic Selections Page.



Click the Cancel button when you don’t want to save the information you enter on the page, andyou want to exit the page. The system will take you back to the page where you started.

For more information about the Stats Matrix display, see “Using the Quality Server

Displays”.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L D E F I N I N G Q U A L I T Y F U N C T I O N S 6 - 1

C H A P T E R 6

Defining Quality Functions

Properly identifying key process information is an essential part of implementing your quality

control plans. Since data tracking (field requirements) can vary by area or by individual process,

it is necessary to configure your data collection environment, to ensure you collect and track

information that meets your objectives and requirements for your individual processes or areas.

PeopleSoft Quality can accommodate individual data collection requirements simultaneously, by

not imposing a fixed-field hierarchy or traceability structure. You will define a new

configuration level (Quality Function) that gives you the ability to define the fields and attendant

information that will provide a base level for inspection plan creation and integration. Simply

stated, the Quality Function gives you the capability to map process-specific field information

into PeopleSoft Quality for identification, tracking, and analysis.

Overview of Quality Functions

Typically, a production environment will be comprised of several processing or data collection

areas. Each area can perform a certain function and potentially has unique information and

tracking requirements. You will configure PeopleSoft Quality to emulate these various data

collection requirements by creating Quality Functions.

Quality Functions are used to specify hierarchy and trace field requirements inherent in a given

process or family of processes. This feature enables operators to interact with PeopleSoft Quality

using native terms and eliminates the need for special placeholder fields.

Quality Functions are defined at the system level, to ensure continuity of access and analysis

across multiple business units. Therefore, you don’t define Quality Functions by SetID or

Business Unit.

In addition, PeopleSoft Quality uses the Quality Function to determine which fields display on

pages, when fields are available for data entry or data query on subsequent PeopleSoft Quality

pages.

Integration with Other PeopleSoft Applications

When you create control plans and sample data, they will be parented by a Quality Function.

Quality Functions are the first point of integration between PeopleSoft Quality and other

PeopleSoft applications. The Quality Function provides awareness of the different fields

common to an integrating application. Plus, they are created to synchronize fields with other

PeopleSoft applications and eliminate the need to enter placeholders in unused fields.


6 - 2 D E F I N I N G Q U A L I T Y F U N C T I O N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Once you define a Quality Function, you then define the characteristics you want to measure on a

Measurement Plan. After that, you bring together the Quality Function and Measurement Plan

together and create the individual Control Plans for which you perform data collection against.

Currently, PeopleSoft Quality integrates with PeopleSoft Purchasing, Inventory, and Production

Management. As a result, several predefined Quality Functions are delivered with the system to

accommodate the integration between the different applications.

PeopleSoft Quality provides the following predefined Quality Functions:

PeopleSoftApplication

QualityFunction

FunctionDescription

Hierarchy Fields Trace Fields

Purchasing RECV_INSPE

CT

Receiving

Inspection

INV_ITEM_ID

VENDOR_ID

DISTRIB_LINE_N

UM

DISTRIB_SEQ_NU

M

LOT_ID

OPRID

RECEIVER_ID

RECV_LN_NBR

SERIAL_ID

TAG_NUMBER

VENDOR_LOT_ID

Inventory RMA Inspect items

on an RMA

(Returned

Material

Authorization)

INV_ITEM_ID CONFIG_CODE

CONTAINER_ID

INV_LOT_ID

QTY_INV_RECV

RECEIPT_DTTM

RECEIVER_ID

RETURN_FROM_

BU

RETURN_FR_CUS

T_ID

RMA_ID

RMA_LN_NBR

SERIAL_ID

STORAGE_AREA




QualityFunction

FunctionDescription


Production

Management

COMPLETIO

NS

Record

completions

against a

Production ID

or Schedule

COMPL_OP_SE

Q

INV_ITEM_ID

MACHINE_COD

E

PRDN_AREA_C

ODE

PRODUCTION_T

YPE

WORK_CENTER

_CODE

BOM_CODE

DT_TIMESTAMP

INV_LOT_ID

OPRID

PRODUCTION_ID

RTG_CODE

Production

Management

COMPL_NO_

MC

Same as

COMPLETIO

NS except no

machine code

field.

COMPL_OP_SE

Q

INV_ITEM_ID

PRDN_AREA_C

ODE

PRODUCTION_T

YPE

WORK_CENTER

_CODE

BOM_CODE

DT_TIMESTAMP

INV_LOT_ID

OPRID

PRODUCTION_ID

RTG_CODE

Production

Management

COMPL_NO_

OP

Same as

COMPLETIO

NS except no

machine code,

work center

code or compl

op seq fields.

INV_ITEM_ID

PRDN_AREA_C

ODE

PRODUCTION_T

YPE

BOM_CODE

DT_TIMESTAMP

INV_LOT_ID

OPRID

PRODUCTION_ID

RTG_CODE




QualityFunction

FunctionDescription


Quality QUALITY Emulates the

Release 7.5

field structure

used in

PeopleSoft

Quality. You

will use this

by default if

you upgrade

from

PeopleSoft 7.5

to 8.

INV_ITEM_ID

MACHINE_COD

E

QC_STEP_ID

STATION_CODE

WORK_CENTER

_CODE

CREW_CODE

DT_TIMESTAMP

LOT_ID

OPRID

OP_SEQUENCE

PRDN_AREA_CO

DE

PRDN_DUE_SHIF

T

PRODUCTION_ID

SERIAL_ID

TASK_CODE

TOOL_CODE

For more information about how the Quality Functions assists with the Control Plan

Configuration, see “Establishing Control Plans”. For more information about collecting

sampling data, see “Collecting Quality Data”. For more information about how PeopleSoft

Quality integrates with the other PeopleSoft applications, see “Integrating With Other

PeopleSoft Applications”.

Maintaining Quality Functions

Usage Use the Quality Functions page to maintain Quality Functions. The

Quality Function controls data entry and analysis field input

requirements by maintaining a list of application fields categorized by

use: hierarchy or traceability.

Object Name QS_APP_DEF

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Quality Functions

Access

Requirements

Enter a Quality Function.



Quality Functions - Quality Functions page

Enter a name you want to assign to this Quality Function in Description.


Click the Copy From button if you want to create your new Quality Function by copying

information from an existing Quality Function. The Copy From button is only available

when you are adding a new Quality Function.

For more information about copying quality functions, see “Defining Quality Methods”.

When saving a new or modified Quality Function, the system populates the Date Modified field


Data Persistence

Specify the number of days to retain incomplete data entry sessions for completion in the Session

Data Life (days). This number of days applies to all process streams created under the Quality

Function. Valid range for this field is 1 to 120 days.

Specify the number of days that historical data will be available for edits or correction in the Edit

Data Limit (days). This number of days applies to all process streams created under the QualityFunction. Valid range for this field is from 1 to 365 days.

Session Data Life (days) and Edit Data Limit (days) are used when performing data

collection in PeopleSoft Quality. These fields will determine what session’s display on the

Session List page.

For more information about the Session List page, see “Collecting Quality Data”.



Application Fields

Select how you will use this field when entering quality data against Control Plans in Field Use.

Field Use options include:

Stream Hierarchy This field will become a stream component and the system

will use it to maintain control limits.

Traceability This field is for identifying trace information when

entering sampling data. It can be used to select and group

data during analysis.

For a Quality Function, all fields are unique and are either Stream Hierarchy fields or

Traceability fields. Stream Hierarchy fields can be used as Traceability fields in other

Quality Functions. Also note, the list of available fields may vary depending upon which

PeopleSoft applications have been installed.

If you selected Stream Hierarchy as Field Use, when you click the Display Selection

List button, the Hierarchy Field Selections page displays. Select the Hierarchy field you

want to associate with the Quality Function.

If you selected Traceability as Field Use, when you click the Display Selection List

button, the Trace Field Selections page displays. Select the Trace field you want to

associate with the Quality Function.

For more information about selecting hierarchy fields or trace fields, see Hierarchy Field

Selections Page or Trace Field Selections Page.

After selecting the field you want on the Trace Field Selections page or the Hierarchy Field

Selections page, the system will populate the Field Name (actual database object name) and will

display the Prompt Table or View (used to populate drop down lists) if one exists for the field.

You can override the Prompt Table or View on this page.

For one Quality Function, you can specify up to 12 trace fields and 12 hierarchy fields. Plus,

every hierarchy field will need a prompt table or view.

Once a Control Plan is associated with a Quality Function, you can no longer modify the

Quality Function.



For more information about control plans, see “Establishing Control Plans”.

Hierarchy Field Selections Page

Usage Use the Hierarchy Field Selections page to select a hierarchy field you

want to associate with your Quality Function.

Object Name QS_CATSEL_PNL

Navigation Click the Display Selection List button from the Quality Functions

page after selecting a Field Use of Stream Hierarchy.

Hierarchy Field Selections page

This page displays all the stream hierarchy fields available to PeopleSoft Quality. The system

displays the actual database object name under Field Name and the name of the field in

Description.

The Stream Hierarchy field defaults that PeopleSoft Quality provides are:

Field Name Description

INV_ITEM_ID Item ID

WORK_CENTER_CODE WC Code

TASK_CODE Task Code

TOOL_CODE Tool Code

CREW_CODE Crew Code

MACHINE_CODE Machine

STATION_CODE Station




PRDN_AREA_CODE Production Area

CUST_ID Customer ID

VENDOR_ID Vendor ID

COMPL_OP_SEQ Operation Sequence

PRODUCTION_TYPE Production Type

Click the Field Name (Display Detail) link to add this field to the Quality Function. The fieldyou select on this page will display on the Quality Functions page.

Click the Return button to redisplay the Quality Functions page.

Trace Field Selections Page

Usage Use the Trace Field Selections page to select a trace field you want to

associate with your Quality Function.

Object Name QS_CATSEL_PNL

Navigation Click the Display Selection List button on the Quality Functions

page after selecting a Field Use of Traceability.

Trace Field Selections page

This page displays all the trace fields available to PeopleSoft Quality. The system displays the

actual database object name under Field Name and the name of the field in Description.

The Trace field defaults that PeopleSoft Quality provides are:




INV_ITEM_ID Item ID

WORK_CENTER_CODE WC Code

PRODUCTION_ID Production ID

OP_SEQUENCE Op Sequence

TASK_CODE Task Code

SERIAL_ID Serial ID

LOT_ID Lot ID

TOOL_CODE Tool Code

CREW_CODE Crew Code

MACHINE_CODE Machine

STATION_CODE Station

PRDN_AREA_CODE Production Area

PRDN_DUE_SHIFT Production Due Shift

OPERATOR Operator ID

STAMP_DTTM Date-Time Trace

CUST_ID Customer ID

VENDOR_ID Vendor ID

COMPL_OP_SEQ Operation Sequence

PRODUCTION_TYPE Production Type

INV_LOT_ID Inventory Lot ID

OPRID Operator ID

DT_TIMESTAMP Date Timestamp

BOM_CODE BOM Code

RTG_CODE Routing Code

VENDOR_LOT_ID Vendor Lot

RECEIVER_ID Receipt ID

RECV_LN_NBR Receipt Line

DISTRIB_LINE_NUM Receipt Distribution

DISTRIB_SEQ_NUM Receipt Distribution Sequence

TAG_NUMBER Tag Number

RMA_ID RMA Number

RMA_LINE RMA Line


6 - 1 0 D E F I N I N G Q U A L I T Y F U N C T I O N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L


RECEIPT_QTY Receipt Qty

RECEIPT_UM Receipt UOM

RECEIPT_DTTM Receipt Date/Time

CONTAINER_ID Container ID

CONFIG_CODE Configuration Code

STORAGE_AREA Storage Area

Click the Field Name (Display Detail) link to add this field to the Quality Function. The field

you select on this page will display on the Quality Functions page.

Click the Return button to redisplay the Quality Functions page.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A I N T A I N I N G M E A S U R E M E N T P L A N S 7 - 1

C H A P T E R 7

Maintaining Measurement Plans

Before you begin to collect data in your SPC (Statistical Process Control) environment, you needto identify the characteristics you plan to inspect and monitor.

To improve quality, you must first identify the characteristics you want to monitor for an item.

These characteristics may be quantitative (directly measurable, such as dimensions or finish) or

perhaps something very qualitative, such as product desirability. Selecting a characteristicinvolves a clarification of purpose and identification, as either variables or attribute data.

Selecting the right characteristics is evident when you begin to collect process control data. To

be worthwhile, data collection must serve your objectives for improving quality or continued

process improvement. You want to define characteristics that will provide evidence and serve as

a basis for action.

Defining Measurement Plans

Use Measurement Plans to group together one or more characteristics, to form a measurement set

for inspection. When creating characteristics in a Measurement Plan, you determine the

properties of the characteristics being measured, target specifications, sampling requirements and

methods used to determine control. In the plan, you can also assign operator instructions that

display during quality data collection and alarm review.

To define Measurement Plans use the Measurement Plans component.

Maintaining Characteristics

Usage Use the Characteristics page to define a group of characteristics against

which quality data will be collected and analyzed. Characteristics are

points of inspection that occur as a product passes through various

stages of processing.

Object Name QS_MFDS_PLAN

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Measurement Plans,

Characteristics

Prerequisites A Quality Business Unit and Quality Function need to have been

defined.


7 - 2 M A I N T A I N I N G M E A S U R E M E N T P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Access

Requirements

Enter a Quality Business Unit and a Quality Function.

Measurement Plans - Characteristics: General page


PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and Description.

Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We

document fields common to all views first.

Common Page Information

Enter the name for the Measurement Plan.


Click the Copy From button if you want to create your new Measurement Plan by

copying information from an existing Measurement Plan. The Copy From button is only

available when you are adding a new Measurement Plan.

For more information about copying a measurement plan, see “Defining Quality Methods”.

Enter a Description for the Measurement Plan.

When saving a new or modified Measurement Plan, the system populates the Date Modified

field with the current date and time and the Modified By field with the user ID in use during the

save processing.

Enter a characteristic name in Characteristic. This is the characteristic name that the system will

display when you collect quality data.



It is best to refrain from using any special characters (dashes, underscores, and apostrophes)

in Characteristic names.

General Tab

Select the Class Type from one of the previously defined Characteristic Class Types.

For more information about characteristic class types, see “Defining Quality Methods”.

Specify the Data Type you’ll collect for the characteristic. Data Types include:

Variables Select the Variables data collecting option for measurable

characteristics, such as length, mass, or time, and for

characteristics that are derived from measurable

characteristics, such as volume, density, or area.

Defects Select the Defects data collecting option for characteristics

that represent defect counts; counts of the number of

defects observed per unit, such as scratches, blemishes, or

missing subcomponents.

Defectives Select the Defectives data collecting option for

characteristics that represent counts of defective units;

counts of how many units are defective, using a pass/fail

criteria.

Enter the Sgrp Size (subgroup size) for a characteristic. The range of valid sample sizes for a

characteristic depends on its data type.

A subgroup size of 0 indicates the subgroup size will vary. Characteristics with variable

subgroup sizes defined will be prompted for the actual subgroup size to be entered, when

performing data entry.

Data Type Valid Subgroup Size

Variables 1-20

Defects 0-20

Defectives 0-500,000

The Incomplete Sgrp (incomplete subgroup) field specifies what the operator should do in

situations where insufficient data exists to satisfy the subgroup size defined. This field isapplicable to variables data types only. Options include:



Average Select this option to complete incomplete subgroups using

the average of those sample values that have been

collected so far, for the characteristic.

Don’t Accept Select this option if you don’t want to accept incomplete

subgroups of data for the characteristic.

Select the Active check box to activate data collection for the characteristic. If the field isn’t

marked, PeopleSoft Quality considers the characteristic inactive. You won’t be able to enter datafor an inactive characteristic.

Select the characteristic you want the PeopleSoft Quality application to use when providing

return values to the integrating applications by selecting the Return Results (Integration) check

box. The integrating applications that use the PeopleSoft Quality data entry pages sometimes

must capture information from the quality session and store it in their own pages. Usually the

integrating applications only want the pass/fail count returned after inspection.

PeopleSoft Quality will return result data associated with only one characteristic. If you

have a Measurement Plan that has more than one characteristic, you’ll need to indicate

which one to provide the results for. PeopleSoft Quality can provide results only for

attribute (Defects and Defectives) characteristics; therefore, if you only have Variables

characteristics in your Measurement Plan, no return values will be supplied to the integrating

application.

Controls Tab

Measurement Plans - Characteristics: Controls page

Select the Control Chart from one of the previously defined Control Charts. Control Chartsinclude the following:

C Chart np Chart

P Chart u Chart



X and Moving Range Xbar and Range

Xbar and Sigma

These charts are the system-supplied defaults. You can create additional charts.

For more information about control charts, see “Defining Quality Methods”.

Select the Graphic Preferences to associate with the characteristic. You defined the graph

preferences using the Graph and Display Preferences component. The Graph Preference controls

the graphing and analysis defaults the Quality Server uses when reviewing the characteristic

during data entry or alarm review.

For more information about graphic preferences, see “Defining Graph and Display

Preferences”.

Select the Control Procedure from one of the previously defined control procedures.

For more information about control procedures, see “Defining Quality Methods”.

Specification Limits Tab

Measurement Plans - Characteristics: Specification Limits page

Select the UOM (unit of measure) to associate with the characteristic.



Define the LSL (lower specification limit) and USL (upper specification limit. The system uses

specification limit values in generating certain statistics, such as Cp and CpK. They are also used

in graphics, such as histograms. You can leave either field blank to accommodate characteristics

having unilateral specifications.

Specify the LAL (lower acceptance level) and UAL (upper acceptance level). Using these two

values, you can set absolute minimum and maximum values within which data collected for the

characteristic must fall. The system won’t accept entry of values that fall outside of these limits.

You can leave one or both of these limits blank.

Formula Tab

Measurement Plans - Characteristics: Formula page

Enter Factor 1 and Factor 2 values. Factor 1 and Factor 2 represent a constant value. When

the factors are enabled, you can associate constant values with a characteristic. You can also

reference factor values in control chart formulas and in formulas for calculating characteristic

values.

Click the Enter Formula button to transfer to the Formula Definition page, where you

can enter a formula for the characteristic.

If you define a formula for a characteristic using the Formula Definition page, the formula you

define will display in the Formula field. You can also enter the formula directly into the

Formula field without using the Formula Definition page.

For more information about defining formulas, see Formula Definition Page.

Formula Definition Page

Usage Use the Formula Definition page to create formulas for characteristics

whose sample values are to be derived during data collection. This page

is a calculator-like tool that enables you to create and edit characteristic

formulas.



Object Name QS_MFDS_CALC_PNL

Navigation Click the Enter Formula button on the Measurement Plans -

Characteristics: Formula page.

Formula Definition page

To define a characteristic formula, you can click any of the equation component buttons. The

equation component buttons are grouped according to function. The functions, moving from left

to right, are:

• Basic/standard mathematical functions

• Configuration parameters

• Simple statistics

• Sample value

The keypad area includes buttons for inserting numbers, mathematical operators, parentheses, and

decimal points. You can define a formula by clicking these buttons or by directly entering the

values in the dialog box.

Click the OK button to have the system accept the formula you defined and save the data to the





Examples of Characteristics

Multiply two Characteristics (VAL[Length]*VAL[Width])

Calculate the deviation from the

nominal of the specification

(MEAN[Length]-NOMS[Length])

Note: Requires bilateral specifications.



Round the value of Length to

hundredths

(NINT(VAL[Length]*100)/100)

Calculate Cpk for the current subgroup

of Length

(MINS((USL[Length]-MEAN[Length]

/(3*STDEV[Length]))

((MEAN[Length]-LSL[Length]) /

(3*STDEV[Length])))

Note: Recommended usage should

include the Length characteristic with

n>7 (at least 3) and a Xbar and sigma

chart.

Cpk characteristic should be n=1 with

X and Moving Range chart.

Formulas can be written in algebraic notation. When defining algebraic calculations, always

enclose your formula in parentheses. For example, (VAL[Length] * VAL[Width]).

Equation Construction Functions


ABS( ) Absolute value of the

number specified within

parentheses.

ABS(VAL[Length])

Computes absolute value

of the reading entered for

Length.

EXP( ) Exponential function.

Returns e raised to the

power of the specified

value.

EXP(2)


Specifications page.

FACT[1]


Specifications page.

FACT[2]

INT( ) Integer portion of the


parentheses.

INT(VAL[Length])

Computes integer portion

of the reading entered for

Length.

LOG( ) Natural Log function.

Returns the natural log of

the specified value.

LOG(Length)

LOG10( ) Log based 10 function. LOG10(Length)



LSL Lower specification limit

of the current

characteristic.

LSL

MAXIMUM Maximum value in

subgroup of readings

entered for the SPC

characteristic specified

within brackets.

MAXIMUM[Length]

Computes maximum

value in the subgroup of

readings entered for

Length.

MEAN Mean of subgroup of

readings entered for the


within brackets.

MEAN[Length]

Computes mean of the


entered for Length.

MINIMUM Minimum value in


entered for the


within brackets.

MINIMUM[Length]

Computes minimum

value in the subgroup of


Length.

NINT( ) Nearest integer to the


parentheses.

NINT(VAL[Length])

Computes nearest integer

to the reading entered for

Length.

NOMSL The center point between

the nominal spec lower

limit and the nominal

specification upper limit.

LSL, USL.

NOMSL[Length]

PI π (3.14159) (VAL[Diameter]) ∗ PI

Multiplies the reading

entered for Diameter by

3.14159.

RANGE Range of subgroup of



within the brackets.

RANGE[Length]

Computes range of the


entered for Length.

SQRT( ) Square root of the value

specified within

parentheses.

SQRT(VAL[Length])

Computes square root of

the reading entered for

Length.

SSIZE Subgroup size of the


SSIZE


7 - 1 0 M A I N T A I N I N G M E A S U R E M E N T P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

STDDEV Standard deviation of


entered for the


within brackets.

STDDEV[Length]

Computes standard

deviation of the subgroup

of readings entered for

Length.

SUMX Sum of subgroup of




SUMX[Length]

Computes sum of the


entered for Length.

SUMX2 Square of the sum of


entered for the



SUMX2[Length]

Computes square of the

sum of the subgroup of


Length.

USL Upper spec limit of the


USL

VAL References the current

sample for the

characteristic.

VAL[Length] *

VAL[Width]

The equation processor

works from sample 1 to

sample n within the

current subgroup and

attempts to reference

back to the

characteristics that make

up the derived one.

Defining Operator Instructions

Usage Use the Instructions page to define instructions for Measurement Plans.

Instructions are useful for telling the operator how to take a sample or

how to respond to out-of-control situations. They can include detailed

instructions for taking the sample or which materials to reference.

Object Name QS_MFDS_PLAN_TXT

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Measurement Plans,

Instructions

Prerequisites A Quality Business Unit and Quality Function need to have been

defined.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and Measurement Plan.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A I N T A I N I N G M E A S U R E M E N T P L A N S 7 - 1 1

Measurement Plans - Instructions page

The following element is common to multiple pages in this application and is defined in the

preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit.

Enter Instructions text. This text corresponds to the entire Measurement Plan.

Viewing Measurement Plan Configuration Information

To effectively use the PeopleSoft Quality Measurement Plan configuration environment, you

need to have the ability to view the different configuration data. PeopleSoft Quality responds to

this need by providing you with a set of configuration inquiries.

You can use the configuration inquiries to perform the following:

• Review measurement plans.

• View characteristic specification history.

Reviewing Measurement Plans

Usage Use the Measurement Plan Review inquiry page to view all the

characteristic information associated with a Measurement Plan. Plus,

you can view the history of specification changes associated with the

characteristics in a log.

Object Name QS_MFDSLEVEL2_INQ

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Inquire, Measurement

Plan Review

Prerequisites A Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and Measurement Plan need

to have been previously defined.



Access

Requirements


Measurement Plan Review - Measurement Plan Review inquiry page

The following element is common to multiple pages in this application and is defined in thepreface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit.

The system displays all the characteristic information, plus a log of characteristic specification

changes associated with Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and Measurement Plan

selected.

The fields on this page are the same as those found on the Measurement Plans page. For

more information about these fields, see Defining Measurement Plans.

The specifications that display here may be different than what is actually displayed on the

process assignment. Remember that you can override the specifications when defining the

Control Plan.

When you click the Create Dataset button a dataset is created based upon the inquiry

contents. Using the browser, you may elect to either display the dataset online (assuming

you have the Quality Server installed on your local machine) or download the file to your

local machine. Using the Quality Server you can view the inquiry data, perform

additional analysis on the data, or print the inquiry results.

For more information about analyzing data in the Quality Server see, “Using the Quality

Server Displays”. For more information about the browser options, see “Using the Quality

Server”.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L M A I N T A I N I N G M E A S U R E M E N T P L A N S 7 - 1 3

Displaying Characteristic Specifications

Usage Use the Characteristic Specifications inquiry page to view all

characteristic specification changes made since a given date or the

current specifications in effect.

Object Name QS_MFDSSPEC_INQ

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Inquire, Characteristic

Specifications

Prerequisites A Quality Function and Measurement Plan need to have been previously

defined. Plus specifications have already been assigned and changed for

the characteristics associated with a Measurement Plan.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Quality Business Unit and Quality Function.

Characteristic Specifications - Characteristic Specifications inquiry page



By default, the system will display the characteristic specifications and specification changes for

all Measurement Plans associated with the Quality Business Unit and Quality Function selected.

You have the option to see all the Measurement Plans associated with a quality function or select

a specific Measurement Plan by selecting the Measurement Plan. In addition, you can specify

that you only want to see the active characteristics by selecting the Active Only check box.

You can further qualify your inquiry by selecting to see the full specification history from a given

date. To do this, enter a specific date in Date From and select the Full History check box. The

system initially displays the current date (minus one day) in the Date From field.

If you want to see the current specifications, clear the Full History check box and select the

Active Only check box. When you clear the Full History check box you can no longer enter a

date in the Date From field.



Click the Search button to display the characteristic specification history associated with Quality

Function, Quality Business Unit, and Measurement Plan selected.

The fields on this page are the same as those found on the Measurement Plans page. For

more information about these fields, see Maintaining Characteristics.



you have the Quality Server installed on your local machine) or download the file to your



For more information about analyzing data in the Quality Server see, “Using the Quality

Server Displays”. For more information about the browser options, see “Using the Quality

Server”.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L E S T A B L I S H I N G C O N T R O L P L A N S 8 - 1

C H A P T E R 8

Establishing Control Plans

In setting up your quality control environment, the ability to precisely define sampling, control,

and response criteria is essential. PeopleSoft Quality enables you to clearly and thoroughly

define quality control plans to suit your quality data collection and monitoring requirements.

Before you begin to collect and analyze quality data, you will establish basic sampling and

control criteria through the use of quality control plans. The quality control plan definitionprocess includes:

• Defining the measurement plans for the characteristics you want to monitor.

• Defining attribute codes within categories to facilitate data annotation at time of data entry and

alarm review.

• Defining traceability information for use in tracking and identifying causes of potential

variation.

• Optionally specifying control limits to maintain a predetermined level of process control.

Overview of PeopleSoft Quality Control Plan Configuration

To use PeopleSoft Quality to suit your business needs, it is essential that you understand the

underlying concepts of the PeopleSoft Quality Control Plan.

There are three steps in PeopleSoft Quality that are closely related to each other when defining

Control Plans. These steps are creating the Quality Function, defining Measurement Plans, and,

finally, creating the Control Plan. You need to perform each one of these steps and establish the

relationship between each one so that you can record inspection data in your quality control

environment. Aside from establishing your Quality business unit, these three steps are all that arerequired to begin collecting data.


8 - 2 E S T A B L I S H I N G C O N T R O L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

PeopleSoft Quality control plan configuration

Quality Function

Creating the Quality Function is the first step that needs to be performed. Plus, the Quality

Function is the first point of integration between PeopleSoft Quality and the other PeopleSoft

applications by providing the PeopleSoft Quality application with the component fields common

to the other integrating applications. PeopleSoft has provided several predefined Quality

Functions to facilitate the standard integration with other PeopleSoft applications. You are never

limited to these Quality Functions, and you can always create additional ones to reflect the

various standalone quality applications found throughout your environment.

Quality Functions can be shared across multiple Quality business units and aren’t associated with

one business unit or Set ID. This gives you the ability to share Quality Functions among severalbusiness units.


on subsequent PeopleSoft Quality pages and provides parenting for related process hierarchies

and their associated streams. When defining the Quality Function, you determine the trace and

hierarchy fields that are common to that quality application or functional area; that is, what

information is pertinent for collecting, storing, and reporting quality data. When recording

inspection data against a sampling, hierarchy fields determine what data you are entering

sampling results against, and trace fields are used to enter traceability information such as Lot

Number associated to that sampling. Hierarchy fields become a stream component and are usedby PeopleSoft Quality to maintain control limits.



For example, if you have a Quality Function that has inventory item defined as a hierarchy field

and lot number defined as a trace field, when you go to record inspection data against a sampling,

you would enter the following information: to record data against the sampling you would need to

enter the item number (hierarchy field) and when you are recording the data against the item youwill enter the Lot Number (trace field).

For more information about Quality Functions, see “Defining Quality Functions”.

Measurement Plans

Defining Measurement Plans is the second step. Measurement Plans are where you define the

different characteristics and the sampling and charting criteria used during inspection.

Measurement Plans are groups of one or more characteristics combined together to form

measurement criteria for inspection and control. When creating characteristics for a

Measurement Plan, you determine the properties of the characteristic being measured, the

subgroup size, how to display the data on charts, and what quality control rules should be applied

for each characteristic. In the plan, you can also assign operator instructions that will display

during quality data collection.

For more information about measurement plans, see “Maintaining Measurement Plans”.

Control Plans


a specific product and process. Up until this point, all elements of configuration that you have

established haven’t been applied to a specific process. The Control Plan provides the remaining

element of configuration, defining your process and applying methods of inspection and controlto that process.

When defining a Control Plan, you reference a Quality Function, which tells the system which

fields to display as hierarchy fields on the Control Plan. Then, for each individual hierarchy field

combination, you define the Measurement Plan that would apply. Each characteristic associatedwith the Measurement Plan becomes a stream with its associated details.

PeopleSoft refers to the grouping of hierarchy fields and each measurement plan as a ControlPlan. Each characteristic within the measurement plan is an individual stream.

In addition, when defining the Control Plan, you can determine the method for data entry for each

individual characteristic. You can choose to record data by subgroup or by sample for each

characteristic.

For more information about data entry methods, see Maintaining Control Plans.



Relationship Example

Example of PeopleSoft Quality configuration

Before You Begin

Before you begin defining inspection criteria, you’ll need to define all the data that pertains to the

hierarchy fields on the Quality Functions you are using. Depending on the inspection point and

which PeopleSoft application you are using, or if you are using the PeopleSoft Quality

application standalone, the inspection criteria can be very different. The three PeopleSoft

applications that use PeopleSoft Quality are:

• PeopleSoft Inventory, for Returned Material Authorization (RMA) activity.

• PeopleSoft Purchasing, for purchase receiving activity.

• PeopleSoft Production Management, for recording inspection data against production ID’s or

schedules in your manufacturing environment.

If you are planning on performing RMA activity, it is best to define your criteria in the followingorder:

• Define items using the Item Definition and Item Attributes by Unit component in PeopleSoft

Inventory. When you create Control Plans, be sure to reference an item that already exists.

If you are planning on performing purchase receiving activity, it is best to define your criteria in

the following order:



• Define vendors using the Maintain Vendors component in PeopleSoft Purchasing. When you

create Control Plans, be sure to reference the purchasing vendor for the item.

If you are planning on performing activity against production ID’s and schedules in your

manufacturing environment, it is best to define your criteria in the following order:





• Define machines using the Define Resources component in PeopleSoft Bills and Routings.

You can use station codes to identify various machine parts or outputs as you create Control

Plans. Defining machines and/or stations is an optional step.

• Define work centers using the Define Work Cntrs and Tasks component in PeopleSoft Bills

and Routings. When you record inspection samplings in PeopleSoft Quality for manufacturing

activity, you reference the Work Center and machine where the sampling occurred.

• Define routings for the items using Structure Routings component in PeopleSoft Bills and

Routings. When you record inspection samplings relating to manufacturing activity, you can

specify at what operation the sampling was taken. Defining operation sequences is an optional

step.

• Define the production area using the Area Maintenance component in PeopleSoft Production

Management.

• Reference the product type for the order you are recording information against. The system

supplies this field for you. Your options are rework, production, or tear down.

If you are using the PeopleSoft Quality application standalone, then you need to define all the

data you associate with the hierarchy fields on the Quality Function. In addition, you’ll need to

add this data to other PeopleSoft applications in the correct sequence.

Once you define this information, you can establish the rest of the inspection criteria necessary

for PeopleSoft Quality.

Defining Attribute Groups

Attribute Groups are used to create sets of related attribute codes and descriptions. You associate

an Attribute Group with as many attribute categories as required. The attribute categories (defect

components, probable cause components, and corrective actions) makes it easier to record data

associated with a reading. These attribute codes can be applied to inspection samplings as part of

the quality data collection and alarm review activities and provide quantitative annotation against

the process. Attribute Groups are assigned to Control Plans to present concise and relevant

selection criteria to your quality operators. Define the categories once; then every futurereference to these categories will appear in the selection criteria list.

Understanding Attribute Groups

Before you begin to perform inspection samplings, it is necessary to define inspection codes and

descriptions for various attribute components (categories). Each category (defects, probable

causes, and corrective action) can have multiple entries within a single Attribute Group.

Then, when you are entering an inspection sampling, PeopleSoft Quality provides you with drop-

down lists containing the attribute codes for the categories you have predefined, based on your

selection. You can select each of these separate components while in the process of performing

an inspection sampling and/or reviewing alarms. For analysis and reporting purposes, these

individual components are concatenated to form complete phrases.



PeopleSoft Quality provides you the following attribute categories:

Defect Components

With PeopleSoft Quality, you can define up to three levels of defect components. Eachcomponent can reference three segments of a defect description.

Defect Component 1(Location)

Defect Component 2(Fault)

Defect Component 3(With)

Top Broken Bolt

Bottom Worn Resistor

Cause Components

You can define up to two levels of cause components. With cause components, you can identify

a problem that affects the process you are monitoring.

Cause Component 1 (Problem) Cause Component 2 (Affecting)

Worn Tool

Temperature Setting To Low

Corrective Action Components

You can define a single action component. When there is a problem in the process, the action

component describes what to do, such as decreasing spindle speed, fixing a tool, or notifying asupervisor.

Defining Attribute Labels

Usage Use the Attribute Labels page to define the labels used for the different

attribute categories; defect component, cause component, and corrective

action component.

Object Name QS_ATTRIB_SET

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Attribute Groups,

Attribute Labels

Access

Requirements

Enter a SetID.



Attribute Groups - Attribute Labels page

The following element is common to multiple pages and is defined in the preface of thisPeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: SetID.

Enter the name for your Attribute Group.


Click the Copy From button if you want to create your Attribute Group by copying

information from an existing Attribute Group. The Copy From button is only available

when you are adding a new Attribute Group.

For more information about copying attribute groups, see “Defining Quality Methods”.

When saving a new or modified Attribute Group the system populates the Date Modified fieldwith the current date and time and the Modified By field with the user ID in use during save.

The system displays the component labels for Defect Component 1, Defect Component 2, and

Defect Component 3, for Cause Component 1 and Cause Component 2, and for the

Corrective Action component. These labels (Location, Fault, With, Problem, Affecting, and

Action) are PeopleSoft Quality defaults. You can enter new labels for your components or you

can use the defaults. Entering a blank label will disable that component from entry and selection.

That is, a pick-list won’t be generated for this specific attribute component during data entry or

alarm review.

Maintaining Attribute Codes

Usage Use the Attribute Codes page to maintain attribute codes for their

associated attribute categories (defect component, cause component, and

corrective action component) for an Attribute Group.

Object Name QS_ATTRIB_DEFN



Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Attribute Groups,

Attribute Codes

Access

Requirements

Enter SetID and Attribute Group.

Attribute Groups - Attribute Codes page

The following element is common to multiple pages and is defined in the preface of this

PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: SetID.

When you initially enter this page, the system will display all the attributes codes associated with

all the different attribute components under Attribute Codes for the Attribute Group you enter.

Plus, the Attribute Component field defaults to All Attribute Components. If this is the first

time you have created an Attribute Group, no attribute codes will be displayed in the Attribute

Component fields.

Select the type of Attribute Component you want to view or define. Attribute Component

options include:

All Attribute Components All Attribute Codes display for all the different attribute

components.

Action Component All Attribute Codes display for the Action Component.

Cause Component 1 All Attribute Codes display for Cause Component 1.

Cause Component 2 All Attribute Codes display for Cause Component 2.

Defect Component 1 All Attribute Codes display for Defect Component 1.





Entering Attribute Codes Using the All Attribute Components Selection

Select an Attribute Component of All Attribute Components.

Enter the type of component you are attaching to the attribute group in Attribute Type. Types

include:

Defect Comp 1

Defect Comp 2

Defect Comp 3

Cause Comp 1

Cause Comp 2

Action Comp

Enter a Code and Attribute Text for the component you are adding.

Remember that all the operators will see this information when taking inspection samplings.

The Attribute Text will be different, depending on the type of component you are adding.Attribute Text can include the following:

Component Attribute Text

Defect Component 1 Definition of defect.



Cause Component 1 Definition of what caused the problem.

Cause Component 2 Definition of what caused the problem.

Corrective Action Component Definition of the action to take to correct the

problem.

For more information about inspection samplings, see “Collecting Quality Data”.

Select the Inactive check box if you want to deactivate the code. If you select Inactive, the codewon’t display in the list of valid components.


8 - 1 0 E S T A B L I S H I N G C O N T R O L P L A N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Entering Attribute Codes for One Particular Attribute Component

Select the type of Attribute Component you want to enter data for. For example, if you want to

enter attribute codes for the action component, then select Action Component in the Attribute

Component field.

Enter a Code and Attribute Text for the component you are adding.

Select Inactive if you want to deactivate the code. If you select Inactive, the code won’t display

in the list of valid components.

Viewing Attribute Codes

When you initially enter this page, the system will display all the attribute codes associated with

all the different components under Attribute Codes for the Attribute Group you enter. If this is

the first time you have created an Attribute Group, no components will be displayed for the

Attribute Codes.

Select the Attribute Component of All Attribute Components to view all the attribute codes

associated with all the different components associated with the Attribute Group. The Attribute

Type field will display on the page when you select this option.

Select an Attribute Component of one particular type of Attribute Component, to view the

Attribute Codes associated with that component.

Defining Traceability Sets

Usage Use the Traceability Set page to create a traceability set.

Object Name QS_TRACE_SET

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Traceability Sets

Prerequisites A Set ID and Quality Function need to have been defined.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Set ID and a Quality Function.

Traceability Sets are groups of traceable fields that you assign to Control Plans. Traceability Sets

ensure that information for the traceability items is collected, along with the actual inspection

values for characteristics defined within the Measurement Plan.

Traceability information is often essential in determining the cause of unwanted process

variation. This includes information such as a Lot ID that identifies material used in a process or

a User ID that identifies the person responsible for executing a specific process step. Specific

types of traceability information (Lot ID and User ID) are called traceability items.

All trace fields that you can associate with a traceability set are also common to the rest of

PeopleSoft Manufacturing, Purchasing, and Inventory.

Each trace field can be established at the level of Individual or Subgroup. If the trace field is set

as Individual, then you will be prompted with the trace field for each sample in a subgroup. For

example, if a subgroup size is five, and a traceability set has Lot ID set to Individual, then you’ll


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L E S T A B L I S H I N G C O N T R O L P L A N S 8 - 1 1

be prompted for five lot numbers; one per measured value in the subgroup. In the same example,

if the traceability set has Lot ID set to Subgroup, then you’ll be prompted for one lot number for

the entire subgroup.

Traceability Sets - Traceability Sets page


PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: SetID.

Enter a Trace Set Name and a Description for your Traceability Set.

When saving a new or modified Traceability Set, the system populates the Date Modified field


Select the Active check box to activate the trace field. If the field isn’t selected, PeopleSoft

Quality considers the trace field inactive. You won’t be able to enter data for an inactive trace

field nor do they display.

All the traceability fields you associated with the Quality Function you select will display on this

page under Field Name. You can’t add additional trace fields on this page; you can only modify

information associated with the trace fields.

You can only activate up to 12 trace fields per Traceability Set.

The system automatically assigns the Seq (sequence) number. This is the order in which the tracefields will display during data entry.

Click the Move Down button to move the trace field down in the order.

Click the Move Up button to move the trace field up in the order.

Select the Level at which you collect and store the trace field information. Level options include:

Individual Trace field value entered for each individual sample of a

subgroup.



Subgroup Single trace value entered for the entire subgroup

regardless of subgroup size. You will define group

control fields as subgroup.

Select how you will enter data in the trace field during data entry in Input Type. Input Type

options include:

Auto Dflt (auto default) Default value read from Input Source or internal call-out

routine and displayed on the data entry page. Operator

can override this entry by typing into the field or selecting

from the Prompt Table list.

Fixed Value read from Input Source or internal call-out routine

and displayed on the data entry page. Operator can’t

override this entry.

User Input Operator enters data value directly into the field or selects

from a Prompt Table list.

Enter the Prompt Table or View you want to associate with your trace field. This is the table or

view the system will use to populate the drop-down lists. The default value displayed comes

from the Quality Function but can be overridden here. You won’t be able to enter data in thisfield if you specified an Input Type of Fixed.

Prompt table entries are assumed to be tables or views created within the working database

and are validated using view Tools Record Definition table (QS_PSRECDEFN_VW).

Enter the Custom Field Format for the trace field if you want to use one. This is the name of a

PeopleTools custom field formatting object used for display/input control.

For more information about creating custom field formats, see the PeopleTools

8.12Application Designer PeopleBook, “Creating Field Definitions”.

Enter the Input Source that the system will use to set the default or fixed trace values during data

entry. This Input Source is the drop-down list (XLAT) of % variable or & global variable names.

The trace field value is read from this source at the time of data entry if either Auto Dflt or Fixed

is specified for the Input Type field. You can’t enter anything in this field if you specify anInput Type of User Input. The following options are available:

%Date System will display the current date in date field.

%Time System will display the current time in the time field.

%Datetime System will display the current date and time in the

date/time field.



%OperatorId (operator ID) System will display the user ID that is logged on to the

application.

&G_TRACE_01 through

&G_TRACE_12

System will display the global variable you define in the

PeopleCode prior to going into data entry. For example,

this is how you would define it in PeopleCode: Global

string &G_TRACE_01; This feature included to aid with

modifications.

None System won’t display anything in the field.

External System will display in the trace field a value coming from

the calling integration application: PeopleSoft Purchasing,

Inventory, or Production Management. This feature

included to aid with modifications.

Maintaining Stations

Usage Use the Stations page to maintain stations. Stations can be used in

combination with other hierarchy fields to differentiate or track multiple

points of control. For example, stations can be used to identify various

machine parts or tooling facets, with each having a unique set of process

control limits.

Object Name QS_STATIONS

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Stations

Prerequisites A Quality Business Unit must be defined.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Quality Business Unit.

Stations - Stations page

The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of thisPeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and Description.

Enter a Station Code to associate with the Quality Business Unit.

Enter a Description for the Station Code.



Defining Control Plans

Use the Control Plan to bring together all areas of control into one single plan to be used for data

collection and analysis. The Control Plan is defined as the combination of one set of

characteristics with a specific instance of hierarchy values. The Control Plan is required to

collect data in PeopleSoft Quality; however, the Control Plan is also the method by which you

apply quality controls to the specific hierarchy fields and Measurement Plan. Because a Control

Plan contains a Measurement Plan (which can have more than one characteristic) when you save

the Control Plan, the system creates process streams beneath the Control Plan for each

characteristic in your Measurement Plan. Additional quality control is applied at the process

stream level.

The first page that displays when you enter the Control Plans component is the Load QCPlans

page. Other pages in this component are designed to aid in the creation and retrieval of Control

Plans. The Stream Detail page is one exception. You access this page from the Maintain

QCPlans page, which provides you with access to the process streams for the Control Plan.

Loading Control Plans

Usage Use the Load QCPlans page to select a limited list of Control Plans to

work with on the Maintain QCPlans page. With time, you may have so

many Control Plans that you’ll want to work with a select few.

Object Name QS_ROOT_FILTER

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Control Plans, Load

QCPlans



Access

Requirements




Control Plans - Load QCPlans page


PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit.

All fields on this page are optional. Select the fields (Measurement Plan, Data Entry Name,

and Sample Frequency) you want to filter the Control Plans by. The drop down lists on thispage will provide values found in Control Plans that currently exist.

The Hierarchy Constant group box displays the hierarchy fields associated with the QualityFunction selected. Select the particular hierarchy fields you want to filter your Control Plans by.

Click the Search button to perform the search for the Control Plans with the criteria that you

enter on this page. After the Search process is complete, the Maintain QCPlans page will display

with the Control Plans specified in your search.

Maintaining Control Plans

Usage Use the Maintain QCPlans page to define Control Plan(s). Control

Plans bundle all associated inspection and control information into

individual plans.

Object Name QS_STREAM_ROOT

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Control Plans,

Maintain QCPlans



Access

Requirements




Control Plans - Maintain QCPlans: Hierarchy page

The following element is common to multiple pages and is defined in the preface of thisPeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit.




Click the Clear All Rows button to clear all rows on the page and in the buffer. If you

haven’t saved a row, the changes to the row will be lost. You can only delete Control

Plans that haven’t been previously saved. Clicking this button removes the previously

created Control Plan from the working area, but doesn’t delete the Control Plan.

When you click the Stream Count button, the Stream Details page displays.

For more information about the Stream Details page, see Maintaining Process Streams.

Hierarchy Tab

The first columns on the page will vary, depending on the Quality Function selected. These

columns are the individual hierarchy fields associated with the Quality Function. Enter theindividual hierarchy fields for the Control Plan.

You can only delete Control Plans that haven’t been previously saved.



Data Collection Tab

Control Plans - Maintain QCPlans: Data Collection page

Select the Measurement Plan Name you want to associate with the Control Plan.

Select the Data Entry Method you want to use when performing data collection. Date Entry

Methods include:

By Sample

By Subgroup

Examples of Data Entry Methods

Using the By Sample method, for one particular Control Plan, you inspect all the characteristics

for the first sample, then all the characteristics for the next sample, and so on. Imagine inspecting

a large item that must be fixtured. You would take all measurements of that item prior tofixturing the next item.

By sample data entry method

Using the By Subgroup method, you inspect one characteristic for a group of items, then another

characteristic for a group of items, and so on. Imagine inspecting several small items in

succession with a specific gauge. You would complete the sample for each characteristic prior to

using the next gauge.

By subgroup data entry method



If you are going to collect data against this one Control Plan using Data Entry by Control Plan,

the system will use the Data Entry Method you specify on this page. Otherwise, the system will

use the data entry method you assign on the access list. The system uses the access list when

setting up data entry for multiple Control Plans.

Additional Data Collection Information

Enter a Data Entry Name if you want to group multiple Control Plans together. By giving the

same Data Entry Name to multiple rows you can gather more than one set of streams for data

entry and data extraction purposes.

Enter the Seq (sequence) number to determine in what order the Control Plans with a common

data entry name will appear in data entry.

Select the Sample Frequency to associate with the Control Plan.

Select the Trace Set to associate with this Control Plan. The Trace Set field will only display if

you have associated trace fields with the Quality Function selected.

Select the Attribute Group to associate with the Control Plan. The Attribute Group field will

only display if there are Attribute Groups defined for the Quality Business Unit selected.

For more information about changing the prompt tables for these fields, see “Defining

Quality Functions”.

Status Tab

Control Plans - Maintain QCPlans: Status page

Upon saving the data on the Hierarchy or Data Collection page, the system will display the date

and time the row was created or last modified in Date Modified. Plus, the system will display

the number of streams that exist under this Control Plan in Stream Count. If you are displaying

Control Plan(s) that already exist, the Stream Count field will display the current number of

streams associated with the particular Control Plan.



Creating Multiple Control Plans at Once

Usage Use the Create QCPlans page to define multiple Control Plans at once.

You enter the different fields on the page and have the option to use a

wild card pertaining to a hierarchy field. Using a wild card gives you

the ability to create multiple new Control Plans at once pertaining to a

particular hierarchy field.

Object Name QS_QCPLAN_DEFINE

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Use, Control Plans,

Create QCPlans



Access

Requirements

Enter Quality Business Unit and Quality Function.

Control Plans - Create QCPlans page



This page gives you the ability to create multiple new Control Plans at once. You enter the

different fields on the page and have the option to use a wild card pertaining to a hierarchy field.

After all the fields have been entered, you click the Create New QCPlans (create new quality

control plans) button.

Configuration Settings

The fields in the Configuration Settings group box are the same as those found on the

Maintain QCPlans page. For more information about these fields, see Defining Control

Plans.



Select or enter the appropriate Measurement Plan Name, Data Entry Name, Sample

Frequency, Attribute Group, and Trace Set you want to apply to the new Control Plans.

Wildcard (optional)

The Wildcard (optional) group box affects the Hierarchy Constants group box.

Select the hierarchy field you want to use as a wild card in Field. The hierarchy field selectionsthat display in this field pertains to the Quality Function you selected.

Enter the specific wild card you want to use in the String field. For example, if you select Item

ID as the Field for the wild card, and you want to create Control Plans for all items containing the

letter A, you would enter %A in the String field.

The system will initially display the Source from the Quality Function definition. You can

change the Source to be any valid table or view containing one column matching the wild card

field.

Hierarchy Constants

If you selected a hierarchy field as a wild card, you won’t be able to enter data in that particular

field in the Hierarchy Constants group box.

The hierarchy fields in this group box are associated with the Quality Function. These fields willvary, depending on the Quality Function selected.

Click the Create New QCPlans (create new quality control plans) button to perform the

creation of the Control Plans with the criteria that you enter on this page. The system

will generate a list of values determined by the settings in the Wildcard (optional) group

box and apply the values in the configuration and hierarchy constants to each row in the

list. This will create multiple new Control Plans, all having the same settings, except for

the unique values generated by the wild card you selected. Plus, once the process is

done, the Maintain QCPlans page will automatically display with the Control Plans

already populated.

Maintaining Process Streams

Usage Use the Stream Details page to maintain the individual streams

associated with each Control Plan. In addition, from this page, you

maintain control limits.

Object Name QS_STREAM_DETAIL

Navigation Click the Stream Counts button from the Maintain QCPlans page.



Stream Details: Specification Limits page




PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and UOM.


In the box in the upper-right corner of the page, the system displays the hierarchy fields andMeasurement Plan associated with the Control Plan.

Select whether you want to activate this row and its associated Characteristic when performingdata entry. Select Active to make the row active.

The individual characteristics associated with the Measurement Plan display in Characteristic

along with the Stream ID.

Click the Return button to return to the Maintain QCPlan page.

Specification Limits Tab

The system displays in each row on the page the individual characteristic information associated

with the Measurement Plan for the Control Plan.

The Seq (sequence) field shows the sequence of how the characteristics will display when

performing data entry against the Control Plan. Data entry sequence is dependent upon the

sequence of the Data Entry Names (group of streams) in the Maintain QCPlans page, and then

inside each Data Entry Name is the sequence of the streams.

The system displays several fields on this page that have values assigned only in the

Measurement Plan. These fields are for display only and can’t be changed. The Cascade Lock

field doesn’t affect them. These fields include the following:

• UOM (unit of measure)

• LAL (lower acceptance limit)



• UAL (upper acceptance limit)

The system also displays several fields on this page that have values assigned on the

Measurement Plan that can be overridden here if you want. The Cascade Lock field can affect

these fields if you choose. These fields include the following:

• LSL (lower specification limit)

• USL (upper specification limit)

• Factor 1

• Factor 2

Select whether you want to lock the stream (Cascade Lock) from being updated by changes

made to the parent characteristic from the Measurement Plan. If you lock the stream, it won’t be

updated with changes made on the Measurement Plan. Changes in characteristics that are

cascaded to streams are changes to the active setting, specification limits and factors: LSL (lower

specification limit), USL (upper specification limit), Factor 1, and Factor 2. With cascaded

fields, the assignment of values at the characteristic level in the Measurement Plan causes the

Measurement Plan to act as a template, and the values cascaded to streams can be overridden at

any time at the stream level. You may want to change a specification limit in the characteristic,

instead of changing it on every stream, which is an advantage of cascading. However, if you

don’t want to overwrite the values for specific streams with values from the characteristic, you

will protect those streams with the cascade lock.

Control Limits Tab

Stream Details: Control Limits page

The system displays the Control Chart, Chart Prototype, and Control Procedure for each

characteristic.

In addition, the systems displays on this page (Clim Status (control limit status), LCL (1) (lower

control limit (1), CL (1) (control limit (1), UCL (1) (upper control limit (1), LCL (2), CL (2),

and UCL (2)) if control limits have been established, either by assignment or by calculation,

these fields will reflect the current control limit values and Status.

The Clim Status (control limit status) field displays the control limit status for that particularstream. The valid options are:



• None

• Preliminary

• Monitor

• Ongoing

• Recalc (recalculate)

• Assigned

Several of the fields on this page are the same as those found on the Measurement Plan page.

For more information about these fields, see “Maintaining Measurement Plans”.

Process Control Limit Statuses

Control Limit Status When Assigned

None This status displays if no limits have

yet been assigned or calculated for the

process stream.

Preliminary First level of promotion.

Monitoring Second level of promotion.

OnGoing Third and final level of promotion.

Recalc (recalculate) Recalculated after OnGoing.

Assigned User-assigned.

By clicking the Assign New Limits

button on the Stream Details: Control

Limits page.

Reset Reset by the operator or system

administrator.

By clicking the Reset Limit

Promotions button on Stream Details:

Control Limits page. This action

causes the system to perform limit

promotions according to the control

procedure referenced by the

Measurement Plan.

PeopleSoft Quality assigns the statuses according to the limit promotion milestones

information you defined using the Control Procedures page.



For more information about limit promotion milestones, see “Defining Quality Methods”.

Assigning Control Limits

To assign process control limits, click the Assign New Limits button. The Clim Status

changes to Assigned. A status of Assigned means to ignore the promotional milestones

associated with a control procedure that is associated with the Measurement Plan.

Enter the control limits that you want to assign to the stream in the control limit fields: LCL (1),

CL (1), LCL (1), LCL (2), CL (2), or UCL (2).

Resetting Process Control Limits

To reset process control limits, click Reset Limit Promotions.

Enter the control limits that you want to assign to the stream in the control limit fields: LCL (1),

CL (1), UCL (1), LCL (2), CL (2), or UCL (2).

The Status changes to Reset. PeopleSoft Quality restarts the process using the new promotional

limits tied to the control procedure associated with the Measurement Plan.

Control Limit Promotion Method Example

In a typical control limit promotion method, the result should be ever tightening control limits

over time as the process matures and process improvement methods take effect. The subgroup

milestones of 10, 20 and 30 are used as examples only and aren’t fixed.

Understanding process control limits

When you first start a new process, you don’t know its capability. The control limits are

indeterminate and the system reflects a Preliminary status.



After you have exercised the process for a while, you take a sampling and make some changes to

improve your process. You tighten your control limits to a certain degree and the system reflects

a Monitoring status.

Finally, after you have run the process for a long period of time, you take another sampling. If, at

this point, you feel your control limits are acceptable, the system reflects a status of OnGoing.

At any time during the different levels of promotion you can choose to reset your control limits

and restart with new promotions. When you reset your control limits, the system reflects a statusof Reset.

If you want to ignore the process control limits altogether, you can assign process control limits

for every situation. When you assign control limits, the system reflects a status of Assigned. An

Assigned status doesn’t take the promotion levels into consideration.

Viewing Control Plan Configuration Information

To effectively use PeopleSoft Quality’s Control Plan configuration environment, you need to

have the ability to view the different configuration data. PeopleSoft Quality responds to this need

by providing you with a set of inquiry configuration pages.

You can use these inquiry configuration pages to do the following:

• View where characteristics have been applied.

• View stream specification history.

• View process control limit history.

Displaying Characteristics/Where Applied

Usage Use the Characteristics/Where Applied inquiry page to view where

and/or how frequently characteristics have been applied to various

control plans.

Object Name QS_MFDSCLASS_INQ

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Inquire,

Characteristics/Where Applied


to have been previously defined. Plus, you have applied data to the

Quality Function and Measurement Plan.

Access

Requirements




Characteristics/Where Applied - Characteristics/Where Applied: Stream Hierarchy inquiry page





By default, the system will display all characteristics assigned to all Control Plans associated with

the Quality Business Unit and Quality Function you selected. You have the option to see all the

characteristics associated with a Quality Function or select a specific characteristic by entering

the Characteristic or entering a wild card in the Characteristic field to display a range of

characteristics. Plus, you can further qualify your inquiry by selecting a Class Type and whether

you want to see Active Only characteristics.

In the Characteristic field, you can enter a wild card if you choose. For example, entering %A

will display all characteristics that contain the letter A.

The specifications that display on this page are related to each individual process assignment,

specific to process streams within a Control Plan. These aren’t the characteristic specifications asdefined in the Measurement Plan page, but they may be equal to the characteristic specifications.

Click the Search button to display the characteristic assignments associated with Quality

Function, Quality Business Unit, and any additional criteria selected.



you have Quality Server installed on your local machine) or download the file to your





For more information about analyzing data in the Quality Server, see “Using the Quality

Server”. For more information about the browser options, see “Using the Quality Server”.

Stream Hierarchy Tab

The columns on this page will vary, depending on the Quality Function selected. These columns

are the hierarchy fields associated with the Quality Function.

For more information about defining Quality Functions, see “Defining Quality Functions”.

The rest of the fields on this page are the same as those found on the Characteristics page.


Characteristic Details Tab

Characteristics/Where Applied - Characteristics/Where Applied: Characteristic Details inquiry page

The system displays the characteristic Class Type, LSL (lower specification limit), USL (upper

specification limit), and UOM (unit of measure) associated to each characteristic.

Displaying Stream Specifications

Usage Use the Stream Specifications inquiry page to view specification change

history for individual process streams.

Object Name QS_SPEC_LIM



Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Inquire, Stream

Specifications

Prerequisites A Quality Function and Control Plan need to have been previously

defined. Plus, you have applied data to the Quality Function and

Control Plan.

Access

Requirements


Stream Specifications - Stream Specifications: Stream Hierarchy inquiry page






The system displays the process stream specifications and specification changes for all Control

Plans associated with the Quality Business Unit and Quality Function selected. You have the

option to see all characteristics defined for all Control Plans (process streams) for a quality

function or select a specific set of characteristics by selecting the Measurement Plan. In

addition, you can specify that you only want to see the active characteristics and streams, by

selecting the Active Only check box.



system initially displays the current date (minus 1 day) in the Date From field.

If you want to see the current specifications, clear the Full History check box and select the

Active Only check box. When you clear the Full History check box, you can no longer enter adate in the Date From field.



Click the Search button to display the process stream specification history associated with the

Quality Function, Quality Business Unit, and Measurement Plan selected.









The first columns on the page will vary, depending on the Quality Function selected. These

columns are the hierarchy fields associated with the Quality Function.

Plus, the Measurement Plan associated with the Process Stream displays.


The rest of the fields on this page are the same as those found on the Characteristics page.


Specification Limit Details

Stream Specifications - Stream Specifications: Specification Limit Details inquiry page



The system will display the date and time the specification limits where entered or modified in

Date Modified. Plus, the user who performed the specification limit changes displays in

Modified By.

The Origin Code displays, indicating where the specification limits were set or changed. Codes

include:

MFDS The specification was changed at the measurement plan

level.

STRM The specification was assigned at the control plan/stream

level.

The system displays the USL (upper specification limit), LSL (lower specification limit), Factor

1, and Factor 2 associated with the process stream.

Displaying Control Limits

Usage Use the Control Limits inquiry page to view control limit history for

individual process streams.

Object Name QS_CONTROL_LIMIT

Navigation Manage Quality, Maintain Quality Plans, Inquire, Control Limits

Prerequisites A Quality Function and Control Plan need to have been previously

defined. Plus, you have already applied data to the Quality Function and

Control Plan.

Access

Requirements


Control Limits - Control Limits: Stream Hierarchy inquiry page








By default, the system will display all characteristics for all Control Plans (process streams) and

their associated control limits, limit changes, and limit status for the Quality Business Unit and

Quality Function you specify. You have the option to see all the characteristics associated with a

quality function or select a specific set of characteristics by specifying a Measurement Plan. In

addition, you can specify that you only want to see the active characteristics, by selecting the

Active Only check box.



system initially displays the current date (minus 1 day) in the Date From field.

If you want to see the current specifications, clear the Full History check box, and select the

Active Only check box. When you clear the Full History check box, you can no longer enter a

date in the Date From field.

Click the Search button to display the control limit history associated with the Quality Function,

Quality Business Unit, and Measurement Plan selected.









The first columns on the page will vary depending on the Quality Function selected. These

columns are the hierarchy fields associated with the Quality Function.

Plus, the Characteristic and Measurement Plan associated with the process stream are

displayed.




Control Limit Details (1) Tab

Control Limits - Control Limits: Control Limits Details (1) inquiry page

The fields on this page are the same as those found on the Stream Details page. For more

information about these fields, see Maintaining Process Streams.

Control Limit Details (2) Tab

Control Limits - Control Limits: Control Limit Details (2) inquiry page

The fields on this page are the same as those found on the Stream Details page. For more

information about these fields, see Maintaining Process Streams.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O L L E C T I N G Q U A L I T Y D A T A 9 - 1

C H A P T E R 9

Collecting Quality Data

Operator interaction is a critical piece of the data collection process. The integrity of statistical

information derived from samplings is dependent upon the accuracy and consistency of data

input.

PeopleSoft Quality provides you with a comprehensive data collection environment that

combines efficient operator data entry with online analysis and immediate process feedback. This

means you always have the best information available, to assist in making decisions and/or taking

corrective actions.

Overview of the Quality Data Collection Business Process

Recording sample information against a Control Plan is the most important function in Peoplesoft

Quality. By analyzing the results from the readings, you can continually monitor and makeimprovements or corrections to the processes, as you deem necessary.

With PeopleSoft Quality, you can enter, maintain, and edit quality data against different

characteristics (variable, defect, or defective) within a Control Plan. The system creates a data

entry session for each new sampling that contains all the related measurement, cause, and action

information entered by the operator. If all the required data can’t be entered at once, the sampling

session can be saved for future recall and completion. The saved sessions are considered pending

and can be recalled as often as required to complete the Control Plan requirements, up to a

predetermined expiration date you define. Once a session is completed, it will no longer appear

in the pending list. Completed sampling sessions can also be recalled for editing for apredetermined period of time.

Modes of Accessing Data Entry Pages

In PeopleSoft Quality, you have two modes of accessing the data entry pages when entering or

maintaining Quality data. When you enter data, you can access the data entry pages by selecting

a Control Plan from a list of often-used plans or by entering the specific hierarchy fields

associated with the Control Plan. Once you start to enter readings against a sampling, you create

a Quality session.

When you want to maintain data on a pending Quality session, you can once again select the

particular session from an access list or by entering hierarchy fields.

To edit data on a completed Quality session, you select the particular session by entering specific

hierarchy fields associated with the Control Plan.


9 - 2 C O L L E C T I N G Q U A L I T Y D A T A P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Whether you are entering, maintaining, or editing data against a Quality session, it doesn’t matter

which mode (access list or hierarchy fields) you choose because the pages to perform data entry

are the same in all cases. The only difference lies in the tasks you perform on data entry pages

when entering, maintaining, or editing data.

For more information about defining access lists, see Defining Data Entry Access Lists.

Entering Quality Data

This graphic illustrates the process flow for initially entering data against a sampling for a

Control Plan.

Entering Quality Data Business Process Flow

This is the process you would follow to initiate a Quality session and record characteristic data on

a sampling associated with a Control Plan.



To enter quality data:

1. Determine how you want to access the Control Plans.

Ask yourself if you want to access your Control Plans by an access list or by entering

hierarchy fields associated with the Control Plan.

2. If you choose the access list mode, perform the steps discussed in “To choose the access list

mode.”

3. If you choose the hierarchy field mode, perform the steps discussed in “To choose the

hierarchy field mode.”

To choose the access list mode:

1. Create an access list using the Data Entry Access List - Access List page, and associate

Control Plans with the access list, using the Control Plan Selections page.

2. Enter the access list, and select the Control Plan you want to work with, using the Data Entry

by Access List page.

3. Click the New Data Entry button.

4. Enter data associated with the characteristics on the Control Plan on the Subgroup Method -

Data Entry page or the Sample Method - Data Entry page.

The system will take you to the appropriate Data Entry page, depending on the data entry

method defined for the Control Plan. While entering data you can view the following:

• Instructions for the entire Control Plan, using the Instructions page.

• Current progress you are making on recording data for a sampling, using the Review

page.

5. Submit the readings for analysis.

If alarms are generated from the data you enter, you can perform the following:

• View the alarms and take action, from the Worklist or by using the Alarm Review page.

• Enter the causes for the alarms, using the Probable Causes page.

• Enter the corrective actions taken to correct the alarm condition using the Corrective

Actions page.

If you enter data, and no alarms are generated, you can still perform the following:

• Enter causes for potential problems, using the Probable Causes page.

• Enter corrective actions, using the Corrective Actions page.

6. View the results in a graphical presentation. A graph is rendered for review and will display

on the Graph Display page.



For more information about understanding the graph that is rendered, see “Using the Quality

Server Displays”.

To choose the hierarchy field mode:

1. Enter the hierarchy fields associated with the Control Plan, using the Data Entry by Control

Plan page.

2. On the Data Entry by Control Plan page, click the New Data Entry button.

3. Enter data associated with the characteristics for the Control Plan on the Subgroup Method -



method defined for the Control Plan. While entering data you can:

• Complete the data entry readings for one or more characteristics on the Control Plan.

• View the instructions for the complete Control Plan, using the Instructions page.

• View the current progress you are making on recording data for a sampling, using the

Review page.


If alarms are generated from the data you enter, you can perform the following:



• Enter the corrective actions taken to correct the alarm condition, using the Corrective

Actions page.

If you enter data and no alarms are generated, you can still perform the following:






Server Displays”.



Recalling a Pending Session

This graphic illustrates the process flow for recalling a pending session and then completing the

data entry for the characteristic(s) on a pending session.

Recalling a pending session business process flow

To recall a pending session:

1. Determine whether you have pending sessions that need to be completed.

2. Determine how you want to access the Control Plans.

Ask yourself if you want to access your pending sessions by an access list or by entering

hierarchy fields associated with the Control Plan for the session.



3. If you choose the access list mode, perform the steps discussed in “To choose the access list

mode.”

4. If you choose the hierarchy field mode, perform the steps discussed in “To choose the

hierarchy field mode.”

To choose the access list mode:

1. Enter the access list, and select the Control Plan you want to work with, using the Data Entry

by Access List page.

2. On the Data Entry by Access List page, click the Pending Data Entry button.

3. Select the pending session you want to complete, by clicking the Data Entry Via Recall

button on the Session List page.

4. Enter data associated with the characteristics for the Control Plan on the Subgroup Method -



method defined for the Control Plan. While you continue to enter data for a session you can:

• Complete the data entry readings for the incomplete characteristics.

• View the instructions for the entire Control Plan, using the Instructions page.


Review page.


If alarms are generated from the data you are currently entering, you can perform the

following:




Actions page.

If you enter data, and no alarms are generated, you can still perform the following:








Server Displays”.

To choose the hierarchy field mode:

1. Enter the hierarchy fields associated with the Control Plan, using the Data Entry by Control

Plan page.

2. On the Data Entry by Control Plan page, click the Pending Data Entry button.

3. Select the pending session you want to complete, by clicking the Data Entry Via Recall

button on the Session List page.

4. Enter data associated with the characteristics for the Control Plan on either the Subgroup

Method - Data Entry page or the Sample Method - Data Entry page.


method defined for the Control Plan. While you continue to enter data for a session you can:

• Complete the data entry readings for the incomplete characteristics.

• View the instructions for the entire Control Plan, using the Instructions page.


Review page.


If alarms are generated from the data you are currently entering, you can perform the

following:




Actions page.

If you enter data and no alarms are generated, you can still perform the following:






Server Displays”.



Editing a Completed Session

This graphic illustrates the flow for editing characteristic data for a completed session.

Editing a completed session business process flow

To edit data on a session that is completed:

1. Determine whether you have sessions that need to be edited. Data was originally entered

incorrectly for the session.

2. Enter the hierarchy fields associated with the Control Plan, using the Edit Data page, and

click the Pending Data Entry button.

3. Select the completed session you want to edit, by clicking the Data Entry Via Recall button

on the Session List page.

4. Edit data associated with the characteristics that are completed for the session, using the

Subgroup Method - Data Entry page or the Sample Method - Data Entry page.

The system will take you to the appropriate Data Entry page depending on the data entry



method defined for the Control Plan. While editing data you can:

• Edit the data entry readings for completed characteristics.

• View the instructions for the complete Control Plan, using the Instructions page.


Review page.


If alarms are generated from the data you are currently editing, you can perform the

following:




Actions page.

If you edit data and no alarms are generated, you can still perform the following:






Server Displays”.

Defining Data Entry Access Lists

PeopleSoft Quality gives you the ability to create Access Lists and assign Control Plans to these

Access Lists. Access Lists are used to present a concise list of frequently performed data entry

tasks to an operator. Multiple operators can use the same access lists if desired. The creation of

an Access List greatly advances the security and flexibility in which administrators can assign

specific data entry obligations to operators.

At the start of data entry, you will be presented with a search dialog box prompting for your

current working Quality Business Unit. When you enter the Data Entry by Access List page, the

system will prompt you to enter the Data Entry Access ID. Once you enter the Data Entry Access

ID (and click the Fetch button) the list of available Control Plans is displayed. For security, the

Data Entry Access ID will not offer a drop-down list; the assumption is that the operator knows

his or her Data Entry Access ID and should not have the capability to randomly select others.


9 - 1 0 C O L L E C T I N G Q U A L I T Y D A T A P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

At that point, you select the Control Plan you want to work on and proceed with entering data for

the characteristics on the Control Plan.

Maintaining Access Lists

Usage Use the Access List Assignments page to define an Access List.

Object Name QS_DE_ACCLIST

Navigation Manage Quality, Collect Quality Data, Use, Data Entry Access Lists,

Access List Assignments

Prerequisites A Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and Control Plan(s) need to

have been previously defined.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Quality Business Unit and Data Entry Access ID.

Data Entry Access Lists - Access List Assignments page

The following elements are common to multiple pages and are defined in the preface of thisPeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and Description.

Enter the Description for the Data Entry Access ID.


Click the Copy From button if you want to create the Access List by copying

information from an existing Access List. The Copy From button is only available when

you are adding a new Access List.

For more information about copying from an existing access list, see “Defining Quality

Methods”.

When saving a new or modified Access List, the system populates the Date Modified field with

the current date and time and the Modified By field with the User ID in use during save.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L C O L L E C T I N G Q U A L I T Y D A T A 9 - 1 1

Click the Control Plan Selections link to access the Control Plan Selections page, where you can

select the Control Plans to associate with the access list.

For more information about selecting control plans, see Assigning Control Plans to the

Access List.

Assignments

There are two ways to populate data in the Assignments portion of the page. Options include:

• Copying from an existing Access List.

• Selecting a Control Plan after entering a Quality Function on the Control Plan Selections page.

After selecting one of these options, the system displays the Quality Function and Data Entry

Name associated with the Control Plan.

Enter a Description for the Quality assignment.

If you want the system to not display this Control Plan during data entry, select Inactive. If a

Control Plan is marked Inactive, it won’t display during data entry.

Select Default if you want to automatically default to this particular Control Plan when accessing

the data entry pages using an access list. If you select a Control Plan to be the default, when you

access the Data Entry by Access List and enter the Data Entry Access ID, the system will display

all the Data Entry Names (Control Plans) associated with the Data Entry Access ID. Then you

can click the Launch Default Data Entry link, and the system will automatically display the

appropriate data entry page (Subgroup Method or Sample Method) for the Control Plan you

selected as the default. After entering data for the default Control Plan, you can then click the

OK button, and the system will redisplay the Data Entry by Access List page with all the Control

Plans listed associated with the access list.

Click the Delete All Rows button to delete all rows in the Assignments portion of the

page.

Assigning Control Plans to the Access List

Usage Use the Control Plan Selections page, to display all Control Plans

associated with a Quality Function. After all the Control Plans are

displayed, you can select which ones you want to associate with the

Access List.

Object Name QS_DS_ACCLIST2

Navigation To access this page, click the Control Plan Selections link from the

Access List Assignments page.



Control Plan Selections page


preface of this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and Description.

Select the Quality Function.

Click the Search button to have the system populate the page with all the Data Entry Names

(Control Plans) associated with the Quality Function.

If you don’t associate a Data Entry Name with the Control Plan(s) when you create them,

then those Control Plans will not display on this page. To enter data for those Control Plans,

use the Data Entry by Control Plan component.

For more information about how to associate a data entry name with the Control Plan, see

“Establishing Control Plans”.

Select each of the Data Entry Names (Control Plans) that you want to assign to the Access List

by selecting the Sel (select) check box next to the name.

Click the OK button to add the Control Plan(s) you select to the Access List.

Click the Cancel button when you don’t want to save the information you entered on the page


Entering, Maintaining, and Editing Quality Data

With PeopleSoft Quality, you can enter the readings for an inspection sampling for eachcharacteristic through the Data Entry by Access List or Data Entry by Control Plan components.



To create a new sampling, you will enter inspection readings associated with a previously defined

Control Plan. First, select the Control Plan you are working on from either the Access List or by

entering hierarchy fields associated with the Control Plan and enter readings for the various

characteristics.

After you enter the readings and submit the data to be analyzed, you can see a graphical

representation of the results generated by the Quality Server. In addition, you can enter probable

causes for alarms or log corrective actions for any alarms generated.

If you don’t complete all the readings for the characteristics on the Control Plan, PeopleSoft

Quality gives you the ability to save the session and recall it at a later time to complete the

readings for the other characteristics within the Control Plan. Plus, if you have completed all the

readings for the session and you find you entered data in error, you can go back and correct the

information by editing the session.

When you are creating, maintaining, or editing a sampling, you can view the Control Plan

instructions. The instructions will give you information on how to perform the inspectionreadings for all characteristics associated with the Control Plan.

Finally, to review at any point the Control Plan and current sample results (especially useful for

inspection procedures that can span several hours or days) PeopleSoft Quality provides you with

a quick status review page.

Modes for Control Plan Selection When Entering Data

To accommodate different environments, PeopleSoft Quality provides you with two different

modes for selecting a Control Plan when you want to begin to enter reading data for the

characteristics for a sampling. The two modes PeopleSoft provides are selecting a Control Plan

from an access list or selectively entering the hierarchy fields associated with a Control Plan.

If multiple operators need to access the same Control Plans, it is best to create an Access List and

associate the Access List with the appropriate Control Plans for the different operators. This

helps simplify the data entry process. If they know the Data Entry Access ID and Control Plan

they are working on, they can quickly begin to enter data.

Otherwise, the other mode in which to access the data entry pages is to selectively enter all the

hierarchy fields that are associated with the Control Plan.

Both modes take you to the same data entry pages. It’s the ease of getting to the data entry pages

that the Access List addresses.

Selecting a Control Plan from an Access List

Usage Use the Data Entry by Access List page to view the Control Plans

assigned to the Data Entry Access ID. From there, select the Control

Plan you intend to enter quality control data for.

Object Name QS_DE_ACLEXEC



Navigation Manage Quality, Collect Quality Data, Process, Data Entry by

Access List

Prerequisites A Data Entry Access ID needs to have been previously defined.

Access

Requirements


Data Entry by Access List - Data Entry by Access List page



Enter the Data Entry Access ID.

Click the Search button or tab out of the Data Entry Access ID field to have the system populate

the Assignments section with all the available Control Plans assigned to the Data Entry Access

ID.

Click the Launch Default Data Entry link to have the system automatically display the

appropriate data entry page (Subgroup Method or Sample Method) for the Control Plan you

selected as the default.

For more information about assigning a default control plan, see Maintaining Access Lists.

For more information about the data entry pages, see Methods of Entering, Maintaining, and

Editing Quality Data.

Assignments

The system will display the Data Entry Name, Description, and Quality Function of the

Control Plans you previously associated with the Data Entry Access ID when creating the Access

List. The number in parentheses next to a Data Entry Name tells you the number of Control

Plans associated with the Data Entry Name. For example, Assembly_1 (3) means you have threeControl Plans associated with the Date Entry Name of Assembly_1.



When you click the New Data Entry button, a new session is created and one of the two

Data Entry pages (Subgroup Method or Sample Method) will display depending on the

Data Entry Method associated with the Control Plan. From there, you can enter readings

for the characteristics.

For more information about entering readings for the characteristics, see Methods of

Entering, Maintaining, and Editing Quality Data.

Selecting a Control Plan Using Hierarchy Fields

Usage Use the Data Entry by Control Plan page to select the hierarchy fields

for the Control Plan you want to record quality data for.

Object Name QS_STRMROOT_SEL


Control Plan

Prerequisites A Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and Control Plan need to

have been previously defined.

Access

Requirements


Data Entry by Control Plan - Data Entry by Control Plan page


The fields that display on this page will vary, depending on the Quality Function you select. In

the lower portion of the page, the system displays the hierarchy fields associated with the specific

Quality Function. On this page, Item ID, Machine Code, and Work Center are the hierarchyfields associated with the Quality Function DISCRETE_MFG_2.

Select all of the appropriate values for the hierarchy fields associated with the Quality Function

on the Control Plan.



When you click the New Data Entry button, a new session is created and one of the two

Data Entry pages (Subgroup Method or Sample Method) will display depending on the

Data Entry Method associated with the Control Plan. From there, you can enter readings

for the characteristics.

For more information about entering readings for the characteristics, see Methods of

Entering, Maintaining, and Editing Quality Data.

Modes for Accessing Quality Sessions When Maintaining or Editing Data

PeopleSoft Quality provides the same modes for maintaining data as it does for entering data for a

Control Plan. You can maintain Quality data for an existing pending session. To access the

pending sessions, you can select them by Access List or by entering the hierarchy fieldsassociated with the Control Plan for the session.

There is only one mode to access the completed session for a Control Plan. You can edit data for

an existing completed session. To access the completed sessions, you enter the hierarchy fields

associated with the Control Plan on the completed session.

The Access List mode is not available when you are editing completed sessions.

For more information about the modes for accessing Control Plans, see Modes for Control

Plan Selection When Entering Data.

Selecting a Session from an Access List

Usage Use the Data Entry by Access List page to access a previously started

(pending) session from an Access List. The Access List mode is only

available for pending sessions, not for completed sessions.

Object Name QS_DE_ACLEXEC


Access List

Prerequisites A Data Entry Access ID needs to have been previously defined. Plus,

you must have previously created an incomplete (pending) session.

Access

Requirements




Data Entry by Access List - Data Entry by Access List page



You will use the Data Entry by Access List page when entering data for the first time against a

Control Plan and when you want to complete a pending session associated with a Control Plan.

The fields on this page are the same as when entering data for the first time on a Control

Plan. For more information about these fields, see Selecting a Control Plan from an Access

List.

When you click the Pending Data Entry button, the Session List page displays.

For more information about the Session List page, see Session List Page.

Selecting a Session Using Hierarchy Fields

Usage Use the Data Entry by Control Plan page to access a previously started

(pending) session using hierarchy fields.

Use the Edit Data - Enter Field Hierarchy page to access completed

sessions using hierarchy fields.

Object Name QS_STRMROOT_SEL


Control Plan

Manage Quality, Collect Quality Data, Process, Edit Data



Prerequisites A Control Plan needs to have been previously defined. Plus, you must

have a pending session or a completed session.

Access

Requirements


While the Data Entry by Control Plan page and the Edit Data - Enter Field Hierarchy page

function the same way, for purposes of discussion, the Data Entry by Control Plan page isdisplayed in this documentation. The only differences between the two pages are the following:

• You will use the Data Entry by Control Plan component to finish incomplete (pending)

sessions and the Edit Data component to modify the data on a completed session.

• You can create a new session from the Data Entry by Control Plan page but not from the Edit

Data - Enter Field Hierarchy page.

Data Entry by Control Plan - Data Entry by Control Plan page



This page functions in the same way as the Edit Data - Enter Field Hierarchy page.

The fields on this page are the same as they are when you are entering data for the first time

against a Control Plan. For more information about these fields, see Selecting a Control Plan

Using Hierarchy Fields.

When you click the Pending Data Entry button, the Session List page displays. If you

access the Session List page from the Data Entry by Control Plan page, only the pending

sessions available to maintain display. If you access the Session List page from the Edit

Data - Enter Field Hierarchy page, only the completed sessions available to edit display.

For more information about the Session List page, see Session List Page.



Session List Page

Usage Use the Session List page to choose the pending session you want to

complete or the completed session you want to edit.

Object Name QS_SESSN_SEL

Navigation To access this Session List Page:

Click the Pending Data Entry button on the following pages:

• Data Entry by Access List page

• Data Entry by Control Plan page

• Edit Data - Enter Field Hierarchy page

Session List page


PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit and User ID.

Depending on the mode of entry to this page, you’ll get either a list of pending sessions that need

to be completed or a list of completed sessions available to edit. The most current session

displays at the top of the page.

The system displays the pending sessions or completed sessions in the Session field.

The date and time the session was originally created displays in Created, plus the user who

created the session displays in User ID, along with a Status of Saved, for pending sessions youcan maintain, or Analyzed, for completed sessions that you can edit.

In addition, the hierarchy fields associated with Quality Function and Control Plan display.

These fields will vary, depending on your Quality Function.

Status Definition

The sessions that display on this page are dependent on the Persistence settings, called Session

Data Life (days) and Edit Data Life (days), associated with the Quality Function. The sessions

that display follow this criteria:



Sessions Session Status Data Criteria

Pending Saved Current Date - Session Data Life

(days)

Completed Analyzed Current Date - Edit Data Life

(days)

For example, let’s say you want to edit data for a completed session. The date is March 30, 2000

and the Edit Data Life (days) for the Quality Function is set to 20 days. The list of sessions that

would display on this page are those sessions created between March 10, 2000 and March 30,2000 with a Session Status of Analyzed.

For more information about the Session Data Life (days) and Edit Data Life (days) fields,

see “Defining Quality Functions”.

When you click the Data Entry via Recall Session button, one of the two Data Entry

pages (Subgroup Method or Sample Method) will display depending on the Data Entry

Method associated with the Control Plan. From there, you can complete the session or

edit the data for the session.

For more information about completing or editing a session, see Methods of Entering,

Maintaining, and Editing Quality Data.

Click the Return to Main Page (Return to Previous Page) link to return to the previous page.

Methods of Entering, Maintaining, and Editing Quality Data

With PeopleSoft Quality, you can enter, maintain, and edit Quality data for characteristics in two

ways: by subgroup method or by sample method. The method you choose for data collection

depends on the way you take and record readings for the various characteristics you are working

with. While the pages are functionally equivalent, each page is optimized to enhance field

navigation and input, based on the type of item handling or inspection taking place.

If you want to inspect characteristics subgroup by subgroup, you will use the subgroup method.

You will enter readings for one characteristic on as many units as it takes to meet the subgroup

size for the characteristic; then you’ll enter readings for the next characteristic until its subgroup

size is met, and so on, until you inspect all the characteristics for the Control Plan.

If you want to enter individual units one by one, you will use the sample method. You will enter

data readings for each characteristic on one unit, and then enter readings for each characteristic on

another unit, and so on, until you have inspected enough units to meet the subgroup size defined.



For more information about the subgroup method versus the sample method, see

“Establishing Control Plans”.

Subgroup Method

Usage Use the Data Entry (Subgroup Method) page to enter the readings for the

inspection sampling for each characteristic subgroup by subgroup.

Object Name QS_DE_GUI_S

Navigation To access this page, select a Control Plan, and then click the New

Data Entry button on the Data Entry by Access List page, when the data

entry method for the Control Plan is by subgroup method.

To access this page, select a Control Plan, and then click the New

Data Entry button on the Data Entry by Control Plan page, when the data

entry method for the Control Plan is by subgroup method.

To access this page, click the Data Entry Via Recall button on the

Session List page, when maintaining a pending session, by an access list

or by control plan, or when editing a completed session by using

hierarchy fields. Plus, the data entry method for the Control Plan

associated with the session is by subgroup method.

This Subgroup Method component functions basically the same, whether you are entering data

for the first time, maintaining data for a pending session, or editing data for a completed session.

The differences in the page behavior depend on the type of task you are performing. The types of

tasks you can perform are the following:

If you are entering data for the first time on these pages, you can enter data for all the

characteristics for the Control Plan. You can enter causes and actions for the alarms after the

characteristic has been analyzed, and you can review your current process stream in a graphical

format by clicking the View Chart button.

When you are maintaining data for a pending session, you can complete the readings for the

unfinished characteristics or samples for the session. The previously completed (analyzed)

characteristic data for the session displays on the pages, but it is protected so that it can’t be

changed. Once again, for the characteristics you are entering data for, you can enter causes and

alarms and view the data in a graphical presentation using the Quality Server.

A characteristic sampling is considered complete when its subgroup criteria have been

fulfilled and it has been analyzed. That is, subgroup results are calculated and alarm

conditions evaluated. A data entry session is considered complete when all the

characteristics within the Control Plan have been analyzed.

If you are editing a completed session, you can make corrections to the data you entered for that

session. You can modify trace fields, sample values, or defect information associated with the

historical session. In addition, you can change or augment any of the probable causes and

corrective actions. Once sample values have been changed and you have clicked the Apply



button, the new readings are resubmitted to the Quality Server, and new statistical results are

calculated and saved. No new alarm information will be generated; in fact, the previous alarm

information will still be present. Subgroups that are edited in this way will be stamped in the

database and annotated, when displayed on control charts.

Data Entry (Subgroup Method) page



PeopleSoft Quality generates a sequential Session number. When you enter data for a particular

Control Plan, the system assigns the entries to a Session. You can associate a Control Plan with

multiple Sessions. The Session is composed of the current date and time, first Stream ID for the

Control Plan, and an internally generated sequence number.

When you want to perform any modifications or change historical information, you will enter this

page using a Session previously created. It is very helpful to know the Session, when you want

to maintain or edit a session.

Created displays the date and time the session was created.

The box in the upper-right portion of the page displays the hierarchy fields associated with the

Control Plan.

Characteristic

Click Next Characteristic to scroll to the next characteristic on the Control Plan.

Click Previous Characteristic to scroll to the previous characteristic on the Control

Plan.

Plus, below the Characteristic group box heading, the system displays the number of

characteristics associated with the Control Plan, such as 1 of 3 or 2 of 3.



The system displays an informational type Message for the session. Messages include:

New Entry Control Plan This status displays when you are entering the Data Entry

page for the first time from an access list or by hierarchy

fields.

Pending Entry Control Plan This status displays when you are entering the Data Entry

page for maintenance of a data entry session. This status

displays when you are accessing the Data Entry page from

an access list or by hierarchy fields.

Edit Data Control Plan This status displays when you are entering the Data Entry

page for editing of a data entry session. This status



The system displays the number of number of Control Plans associated with a particular Data

Entry Name. For example, 1 of 1 means there is only 1 control plan associated with this Data

Entry Name.

User Input

Enter the row of data associated with the inspection reading. The titles of the columns that

display on the page are associated with the trace set information related to the Control Plan.

Depending on the definition of the trace set assigned, there may be one or more fields you can

enter or select on the page.

If you previously defined the subgroup size, an equivalent number of detailed rows display on the

page. If you didn’t previously define the subgroup size, which is possible for characteristics

using u, p, and np charts you will enter the Sgrp size (subgroup size) on the page.

Enter the Reading information for the different types of characteristics. Values are:

Variable If you have a characteristic associated with a Variable

data type, enter the value in the Reading field. The Enter

Defects button doesn’t display for characteristics

associated to a variable data type.

Defect If you have a characteristic associated with a Defect data

type, enter the observations on the Defects page. When

you close the Defects page, the defect tally is placed in the

Reading field automatically. You can also enter the

defect tally directly in the Reading field without going to

the Defects page if you choose. What you enter on the

Defects page will always override what you enter directly

in the Reading field on this page.

Defective If you have a characteristic associated with a Defective

data type, enter the findings in #Defectives. You also

have the option of entering any defect observations and

counts on the Defects page.



When you click the Enter Defects button, to record information for a defect data type or

to record additional information for a defective data type, the Defects page displays. You

can use this page to enter the count information, along with the defect descriptions.

The Defects button doesn’t display for characteristics associated with a variable data type.

For more information about entering defect information, see Defects Page.

Characteristic - Other Buttons

Click the Complete Current Sample button to populate the remaining Reading fields

with the average of the readings already entered for the characteristic. You can use this

button after you have entered at least one reading. In addition, you must have selected to

average the data already entered for an incomplete subgroup associated with a

characteristic from the Measurement Plan page.

For more information about completing an incomplete subgroup, see “Maintaining

Measurement Plans”.

Click the Calculate Sample Values button to calculate and populate the Reading fields

associated with a derived characteristic. This button is active only for derived type

characteristics. For example, you define three characteristics (such as length, width, and

area) to define area to equal length times width. If you have already entered readings for

the length and width characteristics, to enter readings for the area characteristic, click the

Calculate Sample Values button; the readings are calculated and entered automatically

on the page.

Click the Next Control Plan in Sequence button to have the system navigate to the next

Control Plan in sequence associated with the Data Entry Name.

Click the Repeat Sampling button to redisplay the Data Entry page and create a new

data entry session. Use this feature if you want to continue entering sample information

without traversing the menu system. This button becomes active when at least one

characteristic for a Control Plan has been completed and saved. When you are editing a

completed session, this button is not active.



Click the Apply button, to save the information that you enter on the page, and remain on the

page. Remaining on the page gives you the ability to view the statistical results and alarms before

dismissing the page, by clicking the Cancel button. When you click the Apply button, the

complete sampling’s information entered on this page is submitted to the Quality Analyzer. At

any time, a completed individual characteristic or all of the completed characteristics for the

Control Plan can be submitted to the Quality Analyzer. The Quality Analyzer performs an online

evaluation of the readings.

Once the quality analysis is completed, any alarms detected are displayed. The alarms display in

the middle area of the page. Up to three alarms will be displayed, one for each control chart’s

subchart. The subcharts are average, variance, and one that indicates a specification limit

violation.

In addition, the appropriate control chart labeling and associated results computed will also bedisplayed in this area of the page.

Click the OK button to have the system perform analysis on the data you entered and save the

data to the database. In this case, the system dismisses the page after the data is saved. The

system will take you back to the starting page where you can select another Control Plan.


and you want to exit the page. If you have already clicked the Apply button when you click the

Cancel button, the system will just dismiss the page. The system will take you back to the page

where you started so you can select another Control Plan to work on.

Sample Method

Usage Use the Data Entry (Sample Method) page to inspect individual units,

one by one.

Object Name QS_DE_GUI_I

Navigation To access this page, select a Control Plan, and then click the New

Data Entry button on the Data Entry by Access List page, when the data

entry method for the Control Plan is by sample method.

To access this page, select a Control Plan, and then click the New

Data Entry button from on the Data Entry by Control Plan page, when

the data entry method for the Control Plan is by sample method.

To access this page, click the Data Entry Via Recall button on the

Session List page when maintaining a pending session by either an

access list or by control plan, or when editing a completed session using

hierarchy fields. Plus, the data entry method for the Control Plan

associated with the session is by sample method.

This Sample Method component functions basically the same, whether you are entering data for

the first time, maintaining data for a pending session, or editing data for a completed session. The

differences in the page behavior depend on the type of task you are performing. The types of

tasks you can perform are as follows:



If you are entering data for the first time on these pages, you can enter data for all the

characteristics for the Control Plan. You can enter causes and actions for the alarms after the

characteristic has been analyzed, and you can review your current process stream in a graphical

format by clicking the View Chart button.

When you are maintaining data for a pending session, you can complete the readings for the

unfinished characteristics or samples for the session. The previously completed characteristic

(analyzed) data for the session displays on the pages but is protected so that it can’t be changed.

Once again for the characteristics you are entering data for you can enter causes and alarms andview the data in a graphical presentation using the Quality Server.

A characteristic sampling is considered complete when its subgroup criteria have been

fulfilled and it has been analyzed. That is, subgroup results are calculated and alarm

conditions evaluated. A data entry session is considered completed when all the

characteristics within the Control Plan have been analyzed.

If you are editing a completed session, you can make after the fact corrections to the data you

entered for that session. You can modify trace fields, sample values, or defect information

associated with the historical session. In addition, you can change or augment any of the

probable causes and corrective actions. Once sample values have been changed, and you click

the Apply button, the new readings are resubmitted to the Quality Server, and new statistical

results are calculated and saved. No new alarm information will be generated; in fact, the

previous alarm information will be present. Subgroups that are edited in this way will be stamped

in the database (status = 800) and annotated when displayed on control charts.

Data Entry (Sample Method) page



PeopleSoft Quality generates a sequential Session number. When you enter data for a particular

Control Plan, the system assigns the entries to a Session. You can associate a Control Plan with



multiple Sessions. The Session is composed of the current date and time, first Stream ID for the

Control Plan, and an internally generated sequence number.

When you want to perform any modifications or change historical information, you will enter this

page using a Session previously created. It is very helpful to know the Session, when you want

to maintain or edit a session.

Created displays the date and time the session was created.

The box in the upper-right portion of the page displays the hierarchy fields associated with the

Control Plan.

Reading

Click Next Sample to scroll to the next sample.

Click Previous Sample to scroll to the previous sample.

The system displays an informational type Message for the session. Messages include:

New Entry Control Plan This status displays when you are entering the Data Entry

page for the first time from an access list or by hierarchy

fields.

Pending Entry Control Plan This status displays when you are entering the Data Entry

page for maintenance of a data entry session. This status



Edit Data Control Plan This status displays when you are entering the Data Entry

page for editing of a data entry session. This status



The system displays the number of number of Control Plans associated with a particular Data

Entry Name. For example, 1 of 1 means there is only 1 control plan associated with this Data

Entry Name.

Traceability

Enter the traceability data associated with the inspection reading. The titles of the fields that

display are associated with the trace set information related to the Control Plan. Depending on

the definition of the trace set, there may be one or more fields you can enter.

Click View Next Trace Fields to view the next set of trace fields.

Click View Previous Trace Fields to view the previous trace fields.



User Input

If you previously defined the subgroup size, an equivalent number of detailed rows display on the

page. If you didn’t previously define the subgroup size, which is possible for characteristics

using u, p, and np charts, you can enter the Sgrp Size (subgroup size) on the page.

Enter the Reading information for the different types of characteristics.

The heading for the Reading field changes to represent the sample you are currently on. For

example, Reading 1 lets you know you are entering data in the Reading field for the first

sample.

Variable If you have a characteristic associated with a Variable

data type, enter the value in the Reading field. The Enter

Defects button doesn’t display for characteristics

associated with a variable data type.

Defect If you have a characteristic associated with a Defect data

type, enter the observations on the Defects page. When

you close the Defects page, the defect tally is placed in the

Reading field automatically. You can also enter the defect

tally directly in the Reading field without going to the

Defects page, if you choose. What you enter on the

Defects page will always override what you enter directly

in the Reading field on this page.

Defective If you have a characteristic associated with a Defective

data type, enter the findings in #Defectives. You also

have the option of entering any defect observations and

counts on the Defects page.

When you click the Enter Defects button, to record information for a defect data type or

to record additional information for a defective data type, the Defects page displays. You

can use this page to enter the count information, along with the defect descriptions.

The Defects button doesn’t display for characteristics associated with a variable data type.

For more information about entering defect information, see Defects Page.



Reading - Other Buttons

Click the Complete Current Sample button to populate the remaining Reading fields

with the average of the readings already entered for the characteristic. You can use this

button after you have entered at least one reading. In addition, you must have selected to

average the data already entered for an incomplete subgroup associated with a

characteristic from the Measurement Plan page.

For more information about completing an incomplete subgroup, see “Maintaining

Measurement Plans”.

Click the Calculate Sample Values button to calculate and populate the reading fields

associated with a derived characteristic. This button is available only for derived type

characteristics. For example, you define three characteristics (such as length, width, and

area) to define area to equal length times width. If you have already entered readings for

the length and width characteristics, to enter readings for the area characteristic, click the

Calculate Sample Values button and the readings are calculated and entered

automatically on the page.

Click the Next Control Plan in Sequence button to have the system navigate to the next

Control Plan in sequence associated with the Data Entry Name.

Click the Repeat Sampling button to redisplay the Data Entry page and create a new

data entry session. Use this feature if you want to continue entering sample information

without traversing the menu system. This button becomes active when at least one

characteristic for a Control Plan has been completed and saved. When editing a

completed session, this button is not active.

Click the Apply button, to save the information you enter on the page, and remain on the page.

Remaining on the page gives you the ability to view the statistical results and alarms before

dismissing the page, by clicking the Cancel button. When you click the Apply button, the

complete sampling’s information entered on this page is submitted to the Quality Analyzer. At

any time, a completed individual characteristic or all the completed characteristics for the Control

Plan can be submitted to the Quality Analyzer. The Quality Analyzer performs an online

evaluation of the readings.

Once the quality analysis is completed, any alarms detected are displayed. Up to three alarms

will be displayed, one for each control chart’s subchart. The subcharts are average, variance, and

one indicating a specification limit violation. The alarms display in the middle area of the page.

Plus, the Selection field will display with the first characteristic selected. At this point, you canselect to view the information associated with one particular characteristic.



In addition, the appropriate control chart labeling and associated results computed will also be

displayed in this area of the page.

Click the OK button to have the system perform analysis on the data you entered and save the

data to the database. In this case, the system dismisses the page after the data is saved. The

system will take you back to the starting page where you can select another Control Plan.


and you want to exit the page. If you have already clicked the Apply button when you click the

Cancel button, the system will just dismiss the page. The system will take you back to the

starting page where you can select another Control Plan to work on.

Defects Page

Usage Use the Defects page to record defect information associated with the

characteristic that has a data type of defects or defectives.

Object Name QS_DFCT8B_PNL

Navigation To access the Defects page, click the Enter Defects button found on multiplepages.

Defects page

Select the defect components and enter the defect Count. On this page, the defect components

are Location, Fault, and Width. You define the titles of the defect component fields and the

selection criteria for these fields, using the Attribute Groups page.

Select the Select One check box next to each defect component you want to associate with the

defect. You can select one, two, or all three of the defect components to associate with the defect.

You can only select one defect component from each list at one time.



After you have selected your defect components, click the Add Defects to List button to

populate the upper portion of the page. Defects will be added to the list with the default

(occurrence) count of 1. If more defects of this type were observed, you may enter the

actual count into the Count field.

A defect count of zero is not valid.

To change one part of the defect component row or the whole defect component row, select the

row you want to change by selecting the List box next to the row. Then select the correct defect

component or components you want for the row and click the Add Defects to List button. Doingthis overrides the values that were already there for the row.






For more information about attribute components, see “Establishing Control Plans”.

Viewing Control Plan Instructions

Usage Use the Instructions page to review the instructions associated with the

complete Control Plan while you are entering data.

Object Name QS_DE_INSTRUCTIONS

Navigation To access the Instructions page, click the Instructions tab found on

multiple pages.

This page operates the same, whether you entering data for the first time, maintaining a pendingsession, or editing a completed session.

Plus, these pages are the same, whether you are using Subgroup Method or Sample Method. The

Data Entry page is the only page that is different between the Subgroup Method and the Sample

Method; the other two pages (Instructions and Review) are the same.

For purposes of discussion, the Subgroup Method page is displayed in this documentation.



Instructions page



In the upper-right portion of the page, a box displays the hierarchy fields associated with the

Control Plan.

The system displays the Sample Frequency associated with the Control Plan.

Instructions

This page displays the instructions you define when you create the Measurement Plan, which you

associate with the Control Plan.

The OK and Apply buttons provide no additional functionality.

Reviewing Current Session Results

Usage Use the Review page to review what has taken place for each

characteristic on the Control Plan. Control Plans usually contain more

then one characteristic. At any time, when you are entering readings for

a Control Plan, you can review what has been completed.

Object Name QS_DE_REVIEW8

Navigation To access the Review page, click the Review tab found on multiple

pages.

This page displays definitional information and current subgroup results for each characteristic

within a Control Plan. Additionally, you can launch the probable cause and corrective actions

pages and view the working Quality Server graph from this page.



This page operates the same, whether you entering data for the first time, maintaining a pending

session, or editing a completed session.

Plus, these pages are the same, whether you are using Subgroup Method or Sample Method. The

Data Input page is the only page that is different between the Subgroup Method and the Sample

Method; the other two pages (Instructions and Review) are the same.

For purposes of discussion, the Subgroup Method page is displayed in this documentation.

Review: Results page





In the upper-right portion of the page, a box displays the hierarchy fields associated with theControl Plan.

Each control plan characteristic displays in the Characteristic column.

Results Tab

When you click the View Chart button the Graph Display page displays with a graph of

current results for the characteristic selected. The data will display in the graph

preference associated with the control plan characteristic.



For more information about the Graph Display page, see Graph Display Page.

Click the Enter Probable Cause button to enter probable causes for the alarms, using the

Probable Causes page.

For more information about entering probable causes, see Probable Causes Page.

Click the Enter Corrective Action button to log any corrective actions taken, using the

Corrective Actions page.

For more information about logging corrective actions, see Corrective Actions Page.

The Lower and Upper (specification limits) associated with the Characteristic also display.

Plus, the UOM (unit of measure) and the Sgrp Size (subgroup size) is displayed.

The Result 1 and Result 2 fields display the subgroup results (based upon the associated control

chart) calculated from the readings.

Alarms Tab

Review: Alarms page

The alarms associated with the characteristic display in Alarm 1, Alarm 2, and Alarm 3.



Graph Display Page

Usage Use this Graph Display page to view the graph associated with the

Control Plan in HTML format.

Object Name QS_DE_CHRT_RVW

Navigation Click the View Chart button when performing data entry or select theDisplay Graph option when performing alarm review.

Graph Display page (1 of 2)

Graph Display page (2 of 2)



The graph defined by the graph preference associated with the characteristics on the control plan

displays. This graph display can be any one of the graph displays supported by the Quality

Server, such as control chart, histogram, Pareto chart, or box plot. In this mode, the graph is

generated by the Quality Server component running on the PeopleSoft Internet Architectureapplication server. This graph is rendered in HTML and is considered display-only.

Click the Return to Previous Page link to return to the Review page.

Click the OK button to return to the page where the data entry session was originated.

Click the Cancel button to return to the page where the data entry session was originated.

For more information about understanding the graphs that display, see “Using the Quality

Server Displays”. For more information about how to perform more extensive analysis on

the data, see “Using the Quality Server”.

Probable Causes Page

Usage Use the Probable Causes page to record the probable cause for the alarm

associated with the characteristic.

Object Name QS_CAUSE8B_PNL

Navigation To access the Probable Causes page, click the Enter Probable Causebutton on the Review - Results page.

Probable Causes page



Use this page to enter the probable causes for the alarm. On this page, the cause components are

Problem and Affecting. Define the titles of the cause component fields and the selection criteria

for those fields, using the Attribute Groups page.

Select the Select One check box that is next to each cause component that you want to associate

with the probable cause for the alarm. You can select one or both of the cause components to

associate with the probable cause. You can only select one cause component from each list at one

time.

After you have selected your cause components, click the Add Probable Cause to List

button to populate the upper portion of the page.

To change one part of the probable cause component row or the whole probable cause component

row, select the row you want to change by selecting the List box next to the row. Then select the

correct probable cause component or components you want for the row and click the Add

Probable Cause to List button. Doing this overrides the values that were already there for the

row.

You can post probable causes and corrective actions for any subgroup that has been

analyzed, whether or not alarms have been detected.







Corrective Actions Page

Usage Use the Corrective Actions page to record the actions taken in response

to an alarm condition or to log comments against the process.

Object Name QS_ACTION8B_PNL

Navigation To access the Corrective Actions page, click the Enter Corrective Actionbutton found on the Review - Results page.



Corrective Actions page

Use this page to enter the corrective actions taken to correct the alarm condition. On this page,

the action component is Action. Define the title of the action component field and the selection

criteria for the field, using the Attribute Groups page. Also, you can log free-form comments

against the process.

Select the Select One check box next to the corrective action component you want to associate

with the corrective action taken for the alarm. You can only select one corrective action

component from the list at a time.

After you have selected the corrective action component, click the Add Corrective

Action to List button to populate the upper portion of the page.

To change one corrective action row, select the row you want to change by selecting the List box

next to the row. Then select the correct corrective action component you want for the row and

click the Add Corrective Actions to List button. Doing this overrides the value that was already

there for the row.

Enter free-form Comments to associate with the corrective action taken to correct the alarm. The

Comments field can be 128 characters long.

You can post probable causes and corrective actions for any subgroup whether or not alarms

have been detected.









Maintaining the Work Area

Periodically, it is a good idea to clear expired sessions and incomplete data sessions from the

database. This ensures maximum performance when you are collecting data.

We suggest running this process once a day. It keeps your environment from becoming

cluttered with unwanted data.

Performing the Purge Process

Usage Use the Start Session Purge page to perform the QS Purge Application

Engine process that will clear your work area.

Object Name QS_START_PURGE

Navigation Manage Quality, Schedule Processes, Process, Start Session Purge

Prerequisites You have sessions that have expired or incomplete sessions that you

want to purge from the database.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Run Control ID.

Process

Name

QS_PURGE

Process Type Application Engine

Start Session Purge - Start Session Purge page


PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Language, Report

Manager, Process Monitor, and Run.

Click the Run button to run this request. The Process Scheduler runs the QS Purge ApplicationEngine process at user-defined intervals.



For more information about the Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process SchedulerPeopleBook, “Process Scheduler Basics”.

Purge Process Information

This process will purge expired sessions and incomplete sessions from the database. In addition,

if you have a partially complete session, this process will only purge the incomplete part of the

session. The completed part of the session is kept.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L R E V I E W I N G P R O C E S S P E R F O R M A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N 1 0 - 1

C H A P T E R 1 0

Reviewing Process PerformanceInformation

When quality control violations occur, you need to know the specifics: the processes, the problem, itseffects, and any necessary corrective actions. With PeopleSoft Quality, operators are provided with

this information, as well as the ability to immediately route control violations to responsible personnel

who can review it and determine what corrective action is needed.

In addition, through easy-to-use pages, you can view statistical results and analyze how a particularprocess has performed over a specified period of time. As you review the process, you can once again

enter probable causes for the alarms and log corrective actions for the alarm condition, as you deem

necessary.

Overview of the Alarm Review Business Processes

PeopleSoft Quality supports three different alarm review business processes.

• Operators can view alarms online as they occur, while they enter data against a Control Plan.

• Additional responsible personnel, besides the operator, can be notified of alarms as they occur

through email or entries on their Worklist, using PeopleSoft Workflow functionality.

• Quality or manufacturing analysts can review alarms and perform analysis on those alarms at a

future date through the use of pages in PeopleSoft Quality.

In all three of these business processes, the individual viewing the alarms can enter probable causesfor the alarm(s), log corrective actions, or make free-form comments that were taken to correct the

alarm condition.

Operators Viewing Alarms

As an operator enters data against a Control Plan, the operator will submit sample readings to beanalyzed by the Quality Server. As the Quality Server analyzes the data, the page will display

subgroup results and any control violations (alarms) as they are detected.

At that point, the operator can view the alarm(s) online and can transfer to other pages, to enter the

probable cause for the alarm, and/or the operator can log the corrective actions being taken to correct

the condition.


1 0 - 2 R E V I E W I N G P R O C E S S P E R F O R M A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

For more information about viewing alarms online, see “Collecting Quality Data”.

Additional Quality Personnel Viewing Alarms

The Quality Server analyzes data that comes from data entered by an operator on the data entry pagesin PeopleSoft Quality or data coming through the PeopleSoft Quality EIPs (Enterprise Integration

Points).

If the Quality Server detects a test violation from data coming from the PeopleSoft Quality pages, an

alarm is generated and immediately displayed to the operator who is performing data entry.

If you are using PeopleSoft Workflow, the additional personnel that you specify in the Workflow setup can be notified of the alarms generated through the PeopleSoft Quality alarm worklist or by email.

A Workflow Application Engine process routes the incoming alarms to the appropriate recipients,

either through email or posting to the Worklist.

For more information about the Quality Workflow Application Engine process, see Performing

the Alarm Workflow Process.

You would typically route email alarm notifications to those individuals who don’t physically takecorrective actions. Those users are made aware of control violations but don’t need to perform any

action unless required to by your specific business requirements.

For personnel who may need to take and log actions for the alarm condition, you’ll have Workflow

generate an alarm entry on their Worklist. From the Worklist, they select the alarm entry they want torespond to and will be taken to a review page in PeopleSoft Quality. On the alarm review page, they

can view the alarm detail information and transfer to other PeopleSoft Quality pages, to enter causes

for the alarm or log the corrective actions that were taken in response to the alarm condition.

For more information about viewing alarms from a Worklist, see Viewing Alarms from the

Worklist.

Quality Analyst Reviewing Alarms

Sometimes after-the-fact review and analysis of alarms can highlight long-term problem areas in a

process or evaluate the effectiveness of corrective actions taken.

PeopleSoft Quality saves alarm information as part of the permanent process record. These alarms

can be recalled for review and analysis at a later date, using an alarm review inquiry. A quality

analyst can add to or modify the cause and action postings to reflect corrections in the process or

procedures taken.



For more information about recalling alarms at a later date, see Viewing Alarms.

Viewing Alarms

The Quality Server analyzes the data you enter against your Control Plan and generates alarms if a

control violation has occurred for the process. At the time an alarm occurs, operators can takeimmediate action to correct the problem or a Quality Analyst can review and monitor the alarms at a

later date, enter causes for the alarms, and log corrective action.

Because it is possible for the Quality Server to generate several alarms at once, it could be very time-consuming to go through the alarms one by one. To facilitate alarm review, PeopleSoft Quality gives

you the ability to create an alarm access profile. By defining an alarm access profile, you can specify

which particular processes or Control Plans you want to view on an ongoing basis. Plus, you canspecify that you only want to view alarms for which no sort of action (causes or corrective action) has

been taken, view only the alarms for which some sort of action has been taken, or view both types of

alarms.

Defining Alarm Access Profiles

Usage Use the Alarm Access Profiles page to define an Alarm Access ID that

specifies the selection criteria for alarm review.

Object Name QS_ALM_ACCLIST

Navigation Manage Quality, Analyze Quality Data, Use, Alarm Access Profiles

Prerequisites You have previously created a Quality Function and associated it to a

Control Plan.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and Alarm Access ID.



Alarm Access Profiles - Alarm Access Profiles page



Enter a Description for your Alarm Access ID.

When you click the Copy From button, the Copy Configuration Item page displays. Click

the Copy From button if you want to create your Alarm Access ID by copying information

from an existing Alarm Access ID. The Copy From button is only available when you are

adding a new Alarm Access ID.

For more information about copying alarm access profiles, see “Defining Quality Methods”.

When saving a new or modified Alarm Access ID, the system populates the Date Modified field withthe current date and time and the Modified By field with the user ID in use during save.

Select the type of alarms you would like to recall during the review. Recall Alarms of Type options

include:

All Alarms Display all alarms regardless of probable cause or corrective

action status.

Closed - Actions Logged Display only alarms that have had probable cause or

corrective action taken against them.

Open - No Actions Logged Display only alarms that have had no probable cause or


Enter the relative age of alarms you want to review, by specifying the Review Period (days). The

system returns alarms based on the number of days specified subtracted from the current date.



Selection Criteria

The fields that display in this portion of the page are the hierarchy fields associated with the Quality

Function you selected. Up to 12 fields can display in this portion of the page.

Enter the search criteria for the hierarchy fields associated with the alarms.

Select the qualifier next to each hierarchy field, and enter the appropriate data expression that goes

along with the qualifier, which can be one of the following:

<> Select alarms where the hierarchy field is greater than or less

than the value.

= Select alarms where the hierarchy field is equal to the value.

ALL All entries will be returned. There is no qualification on this

field.

BETWEEN Select alarms between two hierarchy values you enter.

LIKE Select alarms where the field is like or similar to the value.

The % sign is used as the wild card for this case.

For example, if you have Item ID as one of your hierarchy fields, and you enter an Item ID of LIKE

and 30%. With this expression, the system would retrieve all alarms associated with items startingwith the number 30. The % character is used to denote the wild-card position and can be used

anywhere in the value string. The % character is used to form the search pattern for the item.

If you want to use the BETWEEN qualifier, you’ll need to separate the expression by commas. Forexample, if you want to retrieve alarms associated with a particular set of Work Centers, you would

enter BETWEEN WC10001, WC20001. With this expression, the system would retrieve alarms

associated with the Work Centers between those two values.

Viewing Alarms Using an Access Profile

Usage Use the Alarm Review page to view alarms that match the selection criteria

you specified on your alarm access profile.

Object Name QS_ALM_RVW_INQ

Navigation Manage Quality, Analyze Quality Data, Process, Alarm Review

Prerequisites An Alarm Access Profile needs to have been previously defined. Plus,

alarms have been generated against Control Plans.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and an Alarm Access ID.



Alarm Review - Alarm Review: Stream Hierarchy page

The following element is common to multiple pages and is defined in the preface of this PeopleBook

in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit.

Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We documentfields common to all views first.


Enter the Alarm Access ID. For security, the Alarm Access ID won’t offer a drop down list; the

assumption is that the operators know their Alarm Access IDs and shouldn’t have the capability to

randomly select others.

Click the Search button to have the system populate the page with all the available alarms specifiedby the criteria for the Alarm Access ID. In addition, the system displays the Alarm Types and

Review Period (days) associated with the Alarm Access ID.

The Alarm Types field defaults to what you specified when creating the Alarm Access ID. You can

select another alarm type while viewing the alarms. Alarm Types include:

All Alarms Display all alarms regardless of probable cause or corrective

action status.

Closed - Actions Logged Display only alarms that have had probable cause or


Open - No Actions Logged Display only alarms that have had no probable cause or


The system populates the page with all the alarms that meet the criteria specified for the Alarm Access

ID.



The system displays the date and time the alarm occurred in Date Submitted.

In addition, the Characteristics display where the alarm was generated.

Click the Characteristic (Display Detail) link to transfer to the Alarm Detail page.

For more information about viewing the details of the alarm, see Alarm Detail Page.

When you click the Create Dataset button a dataset is created based upon the contents of this

page. Using the browser, you may elect to either display the dataset online (assuming you

have the Quality Server installed on your local machine) or download the file to your local

machine. Using the Quality Server you can view the alarm data, perform additional analysis

on the data, or print the alarm listings.

For more information about analyzing data in the Quality Server, “Using the Quality Server

Displays”. For more information about the browser options, see “Using the Quality Server”.


The first columns that display on the page will vary, depending on the Quality Function you selected.

These columns are the hierarchy fields associated with the Quality Function.


In addition, the system displays the Measurement Plan associated with the alarm.



Alarm Status Tab

Alarm Review - Alarm Review: Alarm Status page

The system displays the number of test violations that caused the alarm to trigger in Test Violations.

The alarm is tagged to a specific subgroup, and up to three individual test violations can be detected

per subgroup: means chart, variance chart, and spec violation.

The Cause Count field displays the number of probable causes entered against this alarm during data

entry or from this page.

The Action Count field displays the number of corrective actions logged against this alarm either

during data entry or from this page.

Alarm Detail Page

Usage Use the Alarm Detail page to view the detailed information associated with

the alarm. From this page you can transfer to other pages, where you can

enter probable causes for the alarms or log corrective actions.

Object Name QS_ALM_RVW_DET

Navigation Click the Characteristic (Display Detail) link from the Alarm Review -

Alarm Review: Stream Hierarchy or Alarm Status page.



Alarm Detail page

This page displays all the subgroup information associated with a specific alarm.

Alarm Detail

The system displays the Measurement Plan, Characteristic, Date Submitted, Operator ID, and

Session ID associated with the alarm.

Control Test Violations

The control test violations associated with the alarm display under Control Test Violations. There

can be up to three test violations per alarm.

Stream Hierarchy

The system displays the hierarchy fields associated with the Quality Function.

Additional Links

Click the Return to Main Page (Return to Previous Page) link to redisplay the originating (alarm

listing) page.

Click the View Instructions (Display Instructions) link to display the Instructions page. The

Instructions page displays the instructions associated with the Measurement Plan where the alarm

occurred.

For more information about viewing instructions, see Instructions Page.

When you select Display Graph from the available options the Graph Display page displays with the

default graph associated with that characteristic.

The data filling the graph will be the N points (subgroups) leading up to the alarm condition; as

defined by control procedure assigned to this characteristic.


1 0 - 1 0 R E V I E W I N G P R O C E S S P E R F O R M A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

For more information about the Graph Display page, see the “Collecting Quality Data”.

Select Enter Corrective Actions from the available options to display the Corrective Actions page.There, you will log any corrective action(s) taken to correct the alarm condition, as well as free-form

comments.

For more information about entering corrective actions, see “Collecting Quality Data”.

Select Enter Probable Causes from the available options to display the Probable Causes page.

There, you can enter the probable causes for the alarms generated.

For more information about logging probable causes, see “Collecting Quality Data”.

Select Sample Detail from the available options to display the Sample Detail page. This page

contains the individual sample values and trace field entries for the subgroup.

For more information about viewing sample details, see Sample Detail Page.

Instructions Page

Usage Use the Instructions page to view the Control Plan instructions where an

alarm occurred.

Object Name QS_INSTRUCT_PNL

Navigation Click the View Instructions (Display Instructions) link from the Alarm

Detail page.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L R E V I E W I N G P R O C E S S P E R F O R M A N C E I N F O R M A T I O N 1 0 - 1 1

Instructions page

The system displays the Instructions you defined for the Measurement Plan that are associated with

the Control Plan.

Click the Return button to redisplay the Alarm Detail page.

Sample Detail Page

Usage Use the Sample Detail page to view the actual sample values for the

subgroup and the trace fields that were entered for the subgroup.

Object Name QS_TRCDET_PNL

Navigation Select Sample Detail from the available options from the Alarm Detail

page.

Sample Detail page

The system displays the sample details and trace field information associated with the subgroup where

the alarm occurred.

Click the Return button to redisplay the Alarm Detail page.



Viewing Alarms Using Workflow

When an alarm condition occurs, it is added to the operator’s Worklist through an Application Engine

Alarm Workflow process. When the operator is viewing their Worklist and selects one of the alarms

to respond to, a review page in PeopleSoft Quality displays.

Performing the Alarm Workflow Process

Usage Use the Start Alarm Workflow page to perform the Alarm Workflow

Application Engine process. This process will take the alarms that were

generated and post alarm entries to the Worklist or generate emails to notify

appropriate individuals of the alarms.

Object Name QS_START_WF

Navigation Manage Quality, Schedule Processes, Process, Start Alarm Workflow

Prerequisites You have previously entered data against a subgroup, and alarms were

generated.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Run Control ID.

Process Name QS_ALM_WF

Process Type Application Engine

Start Alarm Workflow - Start Alarm Workflow page


PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Run Control ID, Language, Report

Manager, Process Monitor, and Run.

For more information about the Process Scheduler, see PeopleTools 8.12 Process SchedulerPeopleBook, “Process Scheduler Basics”.

This process will take all of the alarms that were previously generated and post alarm entries to the

appropriate individuals’ Worklists or notify them via email of the alarm.



Viewing Alarms from the Worklist

Usage Use the Alarm Detail - Alarm Detail page to view alarms from your

Worklist.

Object Name QS_ALM_WF_DET

Navigation Click an alarm entry on your Worklist that was generated from the

Start Alarm Workflow process

Manage Quality, Analyze Quality Data, Process, Alarm Detail

Prerequisites You have previously entered data against a subgroup, and alarms were

generated.

Access

Requirements

You can use this page only if you incorporated PeopleSoft Workflow into

PeopleSoft Quality. To review a session, click an alarm entry on your

Worklist.

Alarm Detail - Alarm Detail page

This page operates the same as the Alarm Review - Alarm Detail page. The only difference is that

you access the Alarm Detail - Alarm Detail page from a Worklist, and you access the Alarm Review -Alarm Detail page directly, by navigating to the page in PeopleSoft Quality.

For more information about the Alarm Review - Alarm Detail page, see Viewing Alarms Using

an Access Profile.

We suggest you access this page only through your Worklist.



Reviewing Control Plan Performance

Various quality personnel will, from time to time, have a need to monitor the performance of the

processes for which they are responsible. This process review can entail assessment of key statistics,

graphical analysis, and, if necessary, posting of probable causes and corrective actions.

Using the Control Plan Performance component gives select quality users (like process engineers or

manufacturing supervisors) the ability to monitor their processes of interest and is similar to creating adata extraction in PeopleSoft Quality. These pages are simple to use, and anyone using them can

easily retrieve process performance data associated with a specific Control Plan.

Instead of creating a data extraction, which requires knowledge of all the process data and defining

SQL like statements, you can enter hierarchy field information related to the Control Plans you areinterested in. Simply stated, these pages give you the ability to produce a quick snapshot of your

process data over a specified period of time. Plus, from these pages, you can transfer to other pageswhere you can enter the causes for alarms generated against the Control Plan and/or log corrective

actions.

In addition, the process data that you view online in these pages can easily be transferred to the

Quality Server with the click of a button. Once the data is in the Quality Server, you can performadditional what-if analyses and save the data to a Quality Server dataset. This dataset can be recalled

at a future date so that you can complete your analysis or perform additional analysis, if you choose.

For more information about data extractions, see “Using the Quality Server”.

Selecting Control Plans

Usage Use the Control Plan Inquiry page to select the Control Plan and to specify

the time frame for which you want to view the Control Plan performance.

Object Name QS_STRMRVW_SEL

Navigation Analyze Quality Data, Process, Control Plan Performance, Control

Plan Inquiry

Prerequisites You need to have previously entered data for a Control Plan.

Access

Requirements




Control Plan Performance - Control Plan Inquiry page

The following element is common to multiple pages in this application and is defined in the preface of

this PeopleBook in PeopleBooks Standard Field Definitions: Unit.

Select the specific hierarchy fields in the upper portion of the page associated with the Control Planfor which you want to view the performance. The hierarchy fields that display on this page will vary,

depending on the Quality Function you selected.

Enter the time frame for which you want to view the Control Plan performance. Select Sessions By

options include:

All Subgroups This option will display all the subgroups for the process.

The # Subgroups (number of subgroups) field isn’t active

when this option is selected.

Note. Selecting the All Subgroups option against high

volume processes can result in long fetch times.

Daily Window This option will select process data starting from a specifiednumber of days from the current date and time. Enter the

number of days to subtract from the current date, in the #

Days (number of days) field.

Specific Date Range This option will select process data within a specific date

range. Enter the Date From and From Time, and enter the

Date To and To Time.

Subgroup Window This option will display the most current “N” subgroupscompleted. You’ll enter the number of subgroups in #

Subgroups.

Click the Search button to retrieve sample information, according to the criteria that you specified.After the Search operation is complete, the system will calculate various statistical values for each

characteristic and transfer to the Stream Review page.



When you click the Create Dataset button a dataset is created based upon the contents of all

the data from the Control Plan Performance component. Using the browser, you may elect to

either display the dataset online (assuming you have the Quality Server installed on your local

machine) or download the file to your local machine. Using the Quality Server you can view

the inquiry data, perform additional analysis on the data, or print the inquiry results.

For more information about the browser options, see “Using the Quality Server”. For more

information about analyzing data in the Quality Server, see “Using the Quality Server

Displays”.

Reviewing Process Streams

Usage Use the Stream Review page to view the summary process control

information associated with the Control Plan.

Object Name QS_STRMRVW_GEN

Navigation Manage Quality, Analyze Quality Data, Process, Control Plan

Performance, Stream Review

Prerequisites This page is the second page in the Control Plan Performance component.

You will need to enter data on the Control Plan Inquiry page before coming

to this page.

Access

Requirements


Control Plan Performance - Stream Review inquiry page



The system displays the Characteristics associated with the Measurement Plan, along with their

Stream IDs, the current LSL (lower specification limit) and USL (upper specification limit), and the

number of Subgroups.

In addition, if any alarms occurred while you were performing data entry for the process, the alarm

count will display in the Alarms field.



Click the Characteristic Name (Display Detail) link to display the Subgroup List page for that

characteristic. The list of subgroup values selected and used to calculate the summary will be

displayed.

For more information about viewing the subgroup results, see Subgroup List Page.

Subgroup List Page

Usage Use the Subgroup List page to view the subgroup results associated with the

process stream for the Control Plan.

Object Name QS_SGRP_DET_PNL

Navigation Click the Characteristic Name (Display Detail) link on the Control Plan

Performance - Stream Review page.

Subgroup List page

The system displays the subgroup results associated with the selected process stream. The Sgrp Size

(subgroup size), Result 1 and Result 2, along with number of Test Violations display.

In addition, the number of corrective actions logged for a test violation display in Action Count, and

the number of causes entered for the test violation display in Cause Count.

Click the Enter Probable Cause button to display the Probable Causes page. There, you

can enter the probable causes against any subgroup selected. Note, unlike the alarm review

functions, you can apply causes and actions against any subgroup in the list, not just the most

current subgroup.

For more information about entering probable causes, see “Collecting Quality Data”.



Click the Log Actions button to display the Corrective Actions page. There, you will log

any corrective action(s) taken to correct the alarm condition. Note that unlike the alarm

review functions, you can apply causes and actions against any subgroup in the list, not just

the most current subgroup.

For more information about logging corrective actions, see “Collecting Quality Data”.

Click the Return to Main Page (Return to Previous Page) link to redisplay the Control Plan

Performance - Stream Review page.

Click the View Instructions (Display Instructions) link to display the Instructions page. The

Instructions page displays the instructions associated with the Control Plan.

For more information about viewing instructions, see Instructions Page.

When you click the Display Graph link the Graph Display page displays with a graph of current

results for the characteristic. The data will display in the graph preference associated with the control

plan characteristic.

For more information about the viewing the graph, see the “Collecting Quality Data”.

Reviewing Basic Statistics

Usage Use the Basic Statistics page to view the basic statistics associated with the

performance of the Control Plan.

Object Name QS_STRMRVW_STS

Navigation Manage Quality, Analyze Quality Data, Process, Control Plan

Performance, Basic Statistics

Prerequisites This page is the third page in the Control Plan Performance component.


to this page.

Access

Requirements


The remaining pages in the Control Plan Performance component (Basic Statistics, Capability Indices,

and Attribute Statistics) display the different types of statistics that are related to each other and are

easily grouped together.

The Basic Statistics page displays the set of basic statistics that include Mean, Range, Standard

Deviation, Skewness, and Kurtosis.



The Capability Indices page displays the capability indices that are industry-accepted calculations forcomparing the process output to the defined specification limits. Capability indices include Cp, Cpk,

Cpl, Cpu, and Cr.

The Attribute Statistics page displays statistics that only apply to discrete data types: count data.Attribute Statistics include Sum of Defects, Defects Per Unit, Defects Per Hundred, Defects Per

Thousand, and Defects Per Million.

Control Plan Performance - Basic Statistics inquiry page



The system displays the basic statistics (Mean, Range, Std Dev (standard deviation), Skewness, and

Kurtosis) which are predefined statistics that PeopleSoft Quality calculates for the differentcharacteristics for the Control Plan.

Also, the total number of values in a sample displays in Observations.

For more information about the basis statistics calculations, see “Statistical Equations and

Methods Used for Quality” and “Statistical Equations and Methods Used for Quality”.

Reviewing Capability Indices

Usage Use the Capability Indices page to display the capability indices associated

with the performance of the Control Plan.

Object Name QS_STRMRVW_STS2

Navigation Manage Quality, Analyze Quality, Process, Control Plan Performance,

Capability Indices

Prerequisites This page is the fourth page in the Control Plan Performance component.


to this page.

Access

Requirements




Control Plan Performance - Capability Indices: Cp/Cpk inquiry page



Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We document

fields common to all views first.

Cp/Cpk Tab

The system displays the process capability indices (Cp, Cpk, Cpl, Cpu, and Cr) which are industry-

accepted estimates associated with the characteristics for the Control Plan. Capability indices include:

Capability Indice Description

Cp Process Potential

Cpk Process Capability

Cpl Lower Process Capability

Cpu Upper Process Capability

Cr Capability Ratio

% Spec Tab

Control Plan Performance - Capability Indices: % Spec inquiry page



The estimated total percentage of units that are out of specification displays in Est % Total (estimatedpercent total). The estimated percentage of units below the specification limit display in Est % Below

(estimated percent below), and the estimated percentage of units above the specification limit

displayed in Est % Above (estimated percent above).

For more information about capability indices, see “Statistical Equations and Methods Used

for Quality”.

Reviewing Attribute Statistics

Usage Use the Attribute Statistics page to view the attribute statistics associated

with the defects or defectives characteristics for the Control Plan. This page

will only display data associated with characteristics on a Control Plan that

have a data type of defects or defectives

Object Name QS_STRMRVW_STS4

Navigation Manage Quality, Analyze Quality, Process, Control Plan Performance,

Attribute Statistics

Prerequisites This page is the fifth page in the Control Plan Performance component.


to this page.

Access

Requirements


Control Plan Performance - Attribute Statistics: Sums inquiry page



Multiple views of this page are available by clicking the tabs in the scroll area. We documentfields common to all views first.



Sums Tab

The system displays the Sum Defects attribute statistic associated with the characteristic for the

Control Plan. These statistics are only calculated for characteristics that have a data type of defects or

defectives, which is basically count data.

In addition, the total number of samples observed (a tally of all the subgroup sizes entered for each

subgroup fetched by the page) displays in Sum Sgrp Size (sum subgroup size).

Defects Tab

Control Plan Performance - Attribute Statistics: Defects inquiry page

The system displays the attribute statistics (Defects/Unit, Defects/100, Defects/1000, andDefects/Million) associated with the characteristics for the Control Plan. These statistics are only

calculated for characteristics that have a data type of defects or defectives, which is basically count

data.

For more information about the attribute statistic calculations, see “Statistical Equations and

Methods Used for Quality”.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L U S I N G T H E Q U A L I T Y S E R V E R 1 1 - 1

C H A P T E R 1 1

Using the Quality Server

The Quality Server is a software application that enables you to interactively display, manage,and analyze quality data.

The Quality Server isn’t a piece of hardware.

Understanding the Quality Server

PeopleSoft Quality is composed of a set of services or modules: Web Services, EIP (Enterprise

Integration Point) Services, and the Quality Server. Each module provides support for a different

set of functions and tasks. The Web Services module provides the analysis and graphics to the

PeopleSoft Internet Architecture. The EIP Services module provides the PeopleSoft Quality EIP

with high performance statistical analysis. The Quality Server is a small Windows program that

resides on your workstation. With it, you can perform a variety of analyses against quality data

that is either extracted from the PeopleSoft Quality database or entered manually. Data that is

managed within the Quality Server is called a dataset.

PeopleSoft provides a full complement of graphing, testing, and statistical tools within the

Quality Server and enables the results to be printed or exported in several formats. Using the

Quality Server, you can manipulate datasets to create what-if scenarios by adding or dropping

selected points, applying different testing methods, or changing specification and control

parameters. All of these modifications are confined to your dataset; the Quality Server won’t

update or overwrite the database.

PeopleSoft Quality Services enable you to display, manage, and analyze quality data both on and

off the web.

Launching the Quality Server

There are several ways to access the Quality Server when you are using Peoplesoft Quality. Theways in which you can access the Quality Server are as follows:

Quality Server as a PeopleSoft Internet Architecture (PIA) Service:

• Click the View Chart button, when you are entering sample data or the Display Graph option

when performing alarm review.


1 1 - 2 U S I N G T H E Q U A L I T Y S E R V E R P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Quality Server as a workbench local to your system:

• Launch the Quality Server using a shortcut defined on your desktop.

• Click the Create Dataset button, when you are performing inquires against the Measurement

Plan, Control Plan, or alarm review.

• Click the Create Dataset button, when you are reviewing control plan performance.

• Click the Search button when executing a data extraction.

If you have a Quality Server shortcut defined (you’ll see the Quality Server icon on your

desktop) you can double-click the icon and start the Quality Server in offline mode. The

shortcut is simply another way to execute the Quality Server. Choose this method if you

previously extracted data from the database or if you are going to enter data ad hoc.

When you access the Quality Server by clicking the Display Graph or the View chart buttons,

when entering sample data or reviewing alarms, another page will display with the graph defined

by the graph preference associated with the characteristic. This graph display can be any one of

the graph displays supported by the Quality Server, such as a histogram or control chart. In this

mode, the graph is generated by the Quality Server component running on the PeopleSoft Internet

Architecture application server. This graph is rendered in HTML and is considered display-only.

When you access the Quality Server by clicking the Create Dataset button from the Measurement

Plan or Control Plan inquiry pages or the Control Plan Performance pages, a File Download page

displays. The File Download page also displays when executing an extraction. Using the File

Download page you have a couple of options. These options include:

• If you select Open this file from its current location option the Quality Server that is installed

locally on your system will open, and the Spreadsheet and Selector panel displays by default

populated with the data from the particular page you are using.

• If you select the Save this file to disk option the data is saved to a dataset at the location you

specify on your system. Then, anyone who has the Quality Server installed locally on his or

her system could then display this dataset that is created, or you could view the dataset in the

future if you have the Quality Server installed locally.

For more information about entering sampling and corrective action data, see “Collecting

Quality Data” and “Reviewing Process Performance Information”. For more information

about the Measurement Plan and Control Plan Inquiry pages or the Control Plan

Performance component, see “Maintaining Measurement Plans” and “Establishing Control

Plans” and “Reviewing Process Performance Information”.



Quality Server (Application) window

When you launch the Quality Server directly, an initial blank panel displays. From there, you can

open an existing dataset (File, Open) or create a new dataset (File, New). After you have

selected either option, the Quality Server window displays the Spreadsheet display and the

Selector panel. The Spreadsheet display is the mechanism used to manage the data associated

with your dataset.

If you open an existing dataset, the Spreadsheet display and Selector panel will populate with the

data defined in the dataset. If you create a new dataset, the Spreadsheet display and Selector

panel won’t contain any data.

The Selector panel gives you the ability to create a new dataset or manipulate an existing dataset

for analysis purposes. Once you’ve opened or defined a dataset, you can perform all sorts of

analyses on the process control data contained in it. Performing extensive analysis on your data

will give you the ability to improve and enhance how your processes perform in your production

environment.

For more information about the Selector panel, see Using the Selector Panel.

Understanding the Quality Server Toolbar

The Quality Server toolbar is located at the top of the Quality Server main window beneath the

menu bar. The number of active pull-down menus on the menu bar varies, depending on whetheryou have opened a dataset.



There are several buttons on the Quality Server toolbar. Some of the toolbar buttons are standard

Windows buttons, such as Cut and Paste. The remaining buttons are unique to the Quality

Server application and become active depending on the subset selected and graphic windows

open. Because only one graphic window at a time receives focus, these options may becomeactive or inactive dynamically, as you display each graph.

Introducing the Quality Server Buttons

The buttons on the Quality Server toolbar are shortcuts. You can select each toolbar functionfrom the View menu on the Quality Server menu bar.

Save, Print, Cut, Copy, and Paste are standard Windows commands.

Button Button Name Button Description

New Create a new dataset. For more information, see

Launching the Quality Server.

Open Open an existing dataset. For more information, see

Launching the Quality Server.

NA Save as HTML Save the active graph window to HTML format.

Save Save the current dataset to file.

Print Print the active window.

Cut Cut the selected Spreadsheet text.

Copy Copy selected text to the Clipboard.

Paste Insert the contents of the Clipboard to the active cursor

position in the Spreadsheet.

Selector Panel Display the subset and column role selector window.

For more information, see Using the Selector Panel.

Control Chart This button displays a Control Chart based upon the

currently selected subsets. For more information, see

Summarizing the Quality Server Charts and Using the

Control Chart Display.

Histogram This button displays a histogram based upon the

currently selected subsets. For more information,


Histogram Display.



Button Button Name Button Description

Bar Graph This button displays a Bar Graph based upon the



Bar Graph Display.

Line Graph This button displays a Line Graph based upon the



Line Graph Display.

Pareto Chart This button displays a Pareto Chart based upon the

currently selected subsets and attribute column. For

more information, see Summarizing the Quality Server

Charts and Using the Pareto Chart.

Box Plots This button displays a Box Plot based upon the



Box Plots Display.

Spreadsheet This button displays a Spreadsheet of the dataset

opened. For more information, see Summarizing the

Quality Server Charts and Using the Spreadsheet

Display.

Statistical Matrix This button displays a Statistical Matrix chart based

upon the currently selected subsets. For more

information, see Summarizing the Quality Server

Charts and Using the Statistical Matrix Display.

Previous

Characteristic

Display the previous characteristic in the format of the

active graphic window. This is applicable if multiple

subsets have been selected for analysis.

Next Characteristic Display the next characteristic in the format of the

active graphic window. This is applicable if multiple

subsets have been selected for analysis.

Redraw Redraw the active window and apply any point/cell

selections.

Restore Dataset Reload the original data for the active window.

About Use to get release and help information about the

Quality Server.

Loading Datasets Into the Quality Server

Offline analysis of your quality control data can prove to be very beneficial. PeopleSoft Quality

provides you with several ways to get your data into the Quality Server. Once the data is loaded,



you can generate graphics and perform offline analysis using the many features and functions

provided by the Quality Server.

Understanding Datasets

The Quality Server needs data in order for it to execute and assist you with offline analysis. The

information managed by the Quality Server is called a dataset.

A dataset contains all the related measurement, traceability, attribute, and configuration

information required to perform quality analysis. This information is formatted specifically for

use with the Quality Server and resides external to the quality database. It is important to

understand datasets and how they are defined, so that you can create valid data extractions to suit

your analysis needs. In the Quality Server, the Spreadsheet displays the dataset content and

layout.

Datasets are composed of data columns, subsets of data, and the data itself. Datasets in

PeopleSoft Quality can contain three different column types and two row types. The column androw types include:

Columns Rows

Common (Traceability) Standard

Data (Reading, Defects, Violations) Tall

Subset

Understanding Columns and Rows

Common columns Common columns contain information that applies to all

subsets in the dataset. This data usually represents your

traceability information, such as lot numbers and date

stamps. Using common columns can help minimize the

need for typing in redundant information when creating a

stand-alone dataset.

Data columns Data columns contain information specific to an

individual subset. This data typically includes

measurement values, subgroup counts, and attribute

information such as defects and causes/actions.

Note. Datasets created from the database, such as

performing data extractions or inquiry analysis, use data

columns exclusively.



Subset Subsets are logical groupings of data typically based on a

process stream or characteristic. A subset encompasses all

in the columns in the dataset much like a page does in a

typical spreadsheet program. Subsets are configured

similarly to measurement plan characteristics; you can

assign a data type and control parameters to a subset. This

enables the subset to be graphed and analyzed easily.

Note. Datasets created from the database will populate

the subset control configuration parameters with the

current settings for the characteristic/stream. A dataset

can contain up to 100 subsets. Plus, the tabs on the

Quality Server Spreadsheet represent Subset values.

Standard rows Standard rows are the horizontal rows you see in the

Spreadsheet.

Tall rows Tall rows are expanded rows visible when a standard row

contains more than one entry. For example, a tall row

would be displayed if a single row contained multiple test

violations for a control chart. Click the F2 button twice to

enter multiple lines into a tall cell.

Spreadsheet - Subset1

Datasets are displayed as a Spreadsheet in the Quality Server. In this dataset, you can see there

are two subsets (Subset1 and Subset2). The dataset also contains one common column and two

data columns. If you were to click Subset2, you would see that it contains the same informationas Subset1.



You can create datasets in the system in a few different ways, as follows:

• Create a dataset by defining and running a data extraction.

• Enter the Quality Server and create a dataset from scratch.

• Enter the Quality Server from the Measurement Plan or Control Plan Configuration Inquiry

pages or the Control Plan Performance pages, and, while you are viewing the Spreadsheet, save

the information to a dataset. Clicking the Create Dataset button and either launching the

quality server from your browser (this assumes the workbench has been installed on your localmachine) or downloading the dataset from the application server.

For more information about defining and running data extractions, see Defining Data

Extractions and Executing the Data Extraction.

For more information about creating a dataset from scratch, see Using the Selector Panel.

Defining Data Extractions

Using the PeopleSoft Quality data extraction process, you can select a set of inspection data from

the PeopleSoft database and analyze it using Quality Server tools. You define the data you want

to extract and make it available to the Quality Server for exploratory and ad hoc analysis. Once

you’re working in the Quality Server, you can manipulate the information you extracted. You

can add data to the extraction, change the data that is already there, or delete data in order to

perform what-if analyses on your process results. In addition, you can view your data in a varietyof graphical representations.

For more information about the different graphics supported, see “Using the Quality Server

Displays”.

Any analysis that you perform on the inspection data residing in the Quality Server won’t affect

what resides in the PeopleSoft Quality database. The Quality Server won’t send information back

to the database. You can play around with the Quality Server data as much as you want without

affecting your PeopleSoft data.

When you define your data extraction, keep in mind that you can share the extraction between

various users. Extractions are reusable queries that retrieve data from the PeopleSoft Quality

database. In addition, usually one person will define the extraction in your company, and others

will review the extracted information. The primary uses of custom extractions are statistical

monitoring activities and recalling data in the Quality Server.

Creating an extraction involves selecting the database items you want extracted and constructing

selection criteria expressions to limit the scope of the extraction.



Defining General Extract Information

Usage Use the General page to define the general information to associate with

your extract.

Object Name QS_QSX_DEF

Navigation Manage Quality, Analyze Quality Data, Use, Data Extraction

Definition, General

Prerequisites You have already established quality control information in your

database.

Access

Requirements

Enter a Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and Extraction Name.

Note. Executing the extraction will result in the creation of a flat file on

the server to be used in later analysis, and therefore extraction names

must conform to operating system file naming conventions. It is best to

refrain from using any special characters (dashes, underscores, and

apostrophes) in Extraction names.

Before you define your data extraction, consider what data you want to extract, what you want to

do with the data, and how you want it organized. Once you have a clear idea for your extraction,

you’ll need to identify the categories of data you want to extract from the database and the

amount of data you want to include in the extraction. Remember you are defining a dataset to be

used by the Quality Server.

Data Extraction Definition - General page




Click the Copy From button if you want to create your new extraction by copying

information from an existing extraction. The Copy From button is only available when

you are adding a new extraction.


1 1 - 1 0 U S I N G T H E Q U A L I T Y S E R V E R P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

For more information about copying from an existing extraction, see “Defining Quality

Methods”.

When saving a new or modified extraction, the system populates the Date Modified field with

the current date and time and the Modified By field with the User ID in use during the save

processing.

Enter the Description for the extraction you are defining.

Select how you want to subset the data for the extraction in Subset By. Subset By options

include:

All (Single Subset) All data is displayed as one subset.

Characteristic Subset the data by individual characteristic.

Stream Subset the data by process stream.

Select the default Graph Pref ID (graph preference ID) you want to associate with this

extraction.

Display Options

Use Display Options to determine what data is displayed. Extractions will automatically display

vital session data information such as the readings taken; this option gives you the ability to

specify other categories of information to be displayed as well.

• Select Hierarchy Fields to have the system also display the hierarchy fields associated with

the Quality Function.

• Select Traceability Fields to have the system also display the traceability fields associated

with the Quality Function.

• Select Causes/Actions to have the system also display the causes and actions for the

session(s).

You can select one of these options at a time or all of them together at once.

Defining Extract Criteria

Usage Use the Session/Stream Selection page to define how you want to filter

the data in your database for the extraction and for which data entry

sessions you want to extract data so that you can perform analysis on

them.

Object Name QS_QSX_FLDS

Navigation Manage Quality, Analyze Quality Data, Use, Data Extraction

Definition, Session/Stream Selection


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L U S I N G T H E Q U A L I T Y S E R V E R 1 1 - 1 1

Prerequisites This page is the second page in the Data Extraction Definition

component. You will need to enter data on the General page before

coming to this page.

Access

Requirements

Enter Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and Extraction Name.

Once you have specified the general information for the extraction and selected the category or

categories of session data you want to display, the Session/Stream Selection page gives you

various way to specify the sessions from which you want to view the data. You can limit the

extraction to sessions entered for specific values of hierarchy data and trace data from the

Business Unit and Quality Function or to sessions entered within a certain period of time.

Data Extraction Definition - Session/Stream Selection page



Enter the timeframe or the amount of sessions or streams you want to include in this extraction.

Select Sessions By options affect session selection based on timeframes. Choosing a value for

Select Sessions By will activate the selection fields appropriate to that value and deactivate allother selection fields. Options include:

All Subgroups This option will extract all the subgroups for the process.

Daily Window This option will extract the sessions entered in the last ndays, based on the current date and time. Enter the

number of days to subtract from the current date in the No.

Days (number of days) field.

Specific Date Range This option will extract the sessions entered between a

certain date range. Enter the Date From and From Time,

and enter the Date To and To Time.



Subgroup Window This option will extract the most current n subgroups

entered. You’ll enter the number of subgroups in the No.

Subgroups (number of subgroups) field.

Select whether to Lock selections for your extraction criteria. Select the Lock selections check

box to protect the integrity of the expressions and the amount of data to be included in the

extraction. If you don’t lock the statements here you can modify the statements when you

perform the extraction.

The hierarchy fields and trace fields associated with the Quality Function display on the left side

of the page. The hierarchy fields and trace fields that display on this page will vary, depending on

the Quality Function you selected.

You can use these hierarchy and trace fields to further limit the sessions that are retrieved. For

the hierarchy fields and trace fields, select the qualifier next to each field, and enter the

appropriate data expression for the qualifier. Qualifier values are as follows:

<> Greater than or less than the value entered.

= Equal to the value entered.

ALL All entries will be returned. There is no qualification on

this field.

BETWEEN Select the field between two values that you enter.

LIKE Select the field where it is like or similar to the value. The

% character is used as the wild card in this case.

For example, if Item ID is one of your hierarchy fields, and you enter an Item ID of LIKE 30%.

With this expression, the system would retrieve all items starting with the number 30. The %

character is used to denote the wild-card position and can be used anywhere in the value string.

The % character is used to form the search pattern for the item.

If you want to use the BETWEEN qualifier, you’ll need to separate the expression with commas.

For example, to retrieve information associated with a particular set of Work Centers, you would

enter BETWEEN WC10001, WC20001. With that expression, the system would retrieve

information associated to the Work Centers between those two values.

Leave all hierarchy and trace field specifications as ALL if you want no selection for quality

function values.



Executing the Data Extraction

Usage Use the Execute Data Extraction page to run the extraction process. The

extraction process is performed using PeopleCode.

Object Name QS_QSX_ING

Navigation Manage Quality, Analyze Quality Data, Process, Data Extraction

Prerequisites You need to have previously defined and created a data extraction.

Access

Requirements

Enter Quality Business Unit, Quality Function, and Extraction Name.

Data Extraction - Execute Data Extraction page



This page displays the extraction criteria you previously defined using the Data Extraction

Definition component.

When you define your extraction, you have the option of locking the extract statements and the

amount of data you would like to extract from the database. If you haven’t previously locked

your statement, then you can modify the Expressions associated with these statements and the

Session History on this page.

For more information about defining extract criteria, see Defining General Extract

Information and Defining Extract Criteria.

Click the Search button to run the Data Extraction PeopleCode process. When the process is

complete a dataset is created based upon the extraction contents. Using the browser, you may

elect to either display the dataset online (assuming you have Quality Server installed on your

local machine) or download the file to your local machine. Using the Quality Server you canview the inquiry data, perform additional analysis on the data, or print the inquiry results.



For more information about the Quality Server, see Understanding the Quality Server. For

more information about the browser options, see Browser Options.

The Extraction process creates one file in the location you specified when you installed

PeopleSoft Quality. The name of the file is the Extraction Name with the extension (.cld).

Using the Selector Panel

The Selector panel is the mechanism by which you specify the columns and subsets you want to

analyze. In addition, the Selector panel provides access to the dataset configuration screens,

enabling you to add or modify columns and subsets for an existing dataset or for configuring a

new dataset.

Understanding the Selector Panel

Spreadsheet and Selector panel - Existing Dataset

The Selector panel and Spreadsheet display together when you initially launch the Quality Server

from an extraction or when you open an existing dataset. If you open an existing dataset, the

Spreadsheet and Selector panels are populated with data that exists in the dataset. In this case, the

Selector panel is used to manipulate and display the data in different ways, for analysis purposes.

With the Selector panel you can:



• Select different subsets of data to display in the Quality Server displays.

• Change the graph preferences.

• Group your data using another dataset column.

• Add additional common columns, data columns, and subsets to the existing dataset.

Using the Spreadsheet with an existing dataset, you can add, change, or delete data that exists inthe dataset.

Once you have opened a dataset, you can access the many Quality Server graphs, using the

Quality Server toolbar.

Spreadsheet and Selector panel - New Dataset

If you are creating a new dataset, the Selector panel and Spreadsheet will be empty until you

define the configuration and enter data into the new dataset. The Spreadsheet and Selector panels

give you the ability to easily and quickly create a new dataset. Use the Selector panel to

configure the layout of your new dataset. With the Selector panel you can:

• Define common columns, data columns, and subsets that you want in your new dataset.

• Select the graph preference you want to associate with your dataset.

• Determine whether you want to group your data using another dataset column.

After you have configured your dataset, you can enter the data values you want to associate with

your dataset, in the columns and rows in the Spreadsheet. You can enter as many data values asyou want in the Spreadsheet. You can also copy, cut, and paste within the Spreadsheet cells.



Once you have configured the dataset and entered some data, you can access the many Quality

Server displays, using the Quality Server toolbar.

Creating a New Dataset or Modifying an Existing Dataset

The Spreadsheet and Selector panels are the mechanisms used to create a new dataset or to

manipulate or modify existing datasets. The Spreadsheet and Selector panels are used in

conjunction to manage datasets.

The Spreadsheet is the means by which you enter, modify, and view the actual data values in the

dataset. When you are creating a new dataset from scratch, the Spreadsheet will give you the

ability to enter the data you want to associate with the dataset. For existing datasets, you can add,change, or delete data associated to the dataset, using the Spreadsheet.

When you are creating a new dataset, the Selector panel gives you the ability to configure your

new dataset. When working with an existing dataset, the Selector panel enables you to

manipulate the dataset. For example, it gives you the ability to analyze one subset of data at atime or multiple subsets together and to assign columns to roles to be analyzed.

Once you have entered sufficient data into the dataset and have made subset selections, the

graphic tools options will become available.

Using the Selector Panel

Usage Use the Selector panel to perform one of the following:

• Configure a new dataset.

• Manipulate or reconfigure an existing dataset for analysis purposes.

After you configure your new dataset or reconfigure your existing

dataset, you’ll want to save the dataset. Then you’ll enter the values you

want to associate with your new dataset or make modifications to the

existing dataset values, using the Spreadsheet.

Navigation To configure a new dataset:

Access the Quality Server that is local to your system, and then select

File, New on the initial window that displays.

To reconfigure an existing dataset:

Access the Quality Server that is local to your system, and then select

File, Open on the initial window that displays. Finally, select the

dataset you want to use.

Prerequisites Quality Server needs to have been successfully installed locally on your

system.

The Selector panel is used to create a new dataset or to modify an existing dataset. The Selector

panel operates basically the same, whether you are creating a new dataset or modifying an

existing dataset. For purposes of discussion, the Selector panel is documented in this section,



using an existing dataset. The differences in functionality between creating a new dataset and

modifying an existing dataset will be documented in the text of the panel.

Once you have a dataset that contains data, you’ll use the Selector panel to make subset selectionsso that you can proceed to analyze the data in the dataset using the different graphic tools.

Selector panel

The system displays Column Role Assignments, Graph Pref (graph preference), and Subset

Selections on this panel when you open an existing dataset. If you are creating a new dataset, the

system displays N/A (not applicable) in all of the Column Role Assignments fields, and there are

no values in Subset Selections. Once you define the dataset, you’ll be able to select theappropriate values for these fields.

Depicting Data Graphically in the Quality Server

Once you have a dataset, do the following to perform data analysis and to depict your data

graphically:

Select the values to plot, using the Measure field. This is the data that will be plotted on the

different Quality Server displays. All displays use the Measure field, except for the Pareto Chart

that exhibits attributes information. This is also the data column used for calculating any

statistics and tests.

Select the Attribute you want to use on the Pareto Chart. The attribute columns and types you

can select are based on the dataset.

Select the column to Group By (optional). Group By gives you the ability to specify an

alternate data grouping using another column. For example, you can create subgroups based

upon some traceability field (Lot Number) as an alternative to viewing the natural subgroup size

defined for the subset. All readings corresponding to a unique group value will be groupedtogether.

Select the Graph Pref (graph preference) you want to use for the Quality Server displays.



For more information about graph preferences, see “Defining Graph and Display

Preferences”.

Select one or more subsets under Subset Selections that you want to analyze or view in theQuality Server. The subsets you can select are based on the dataset.

Note. You must select at least one subset in order to see any of the Quality Server displays

except for the Spreadsheet.

As you make selections using the Selector Panel, the various tool buttons will become active on

the Quality Server toolbar, indicating which graphs may be chosen.

For more information about the different Quality Server displays, see “Using the Quality

Server Displays”.

Configuring a New Dataset or Reconfiguring an Existing Dataset

Usage Use the Dataset Configuration panel to perform one of the following:

• Configure the new dataset layout.

• Modify the configuration of the existing dataset.

Navigation Click the Configure button on the Selector panel.

The Dataset Configuration panel is used to configure a new dataset or modify the configuration of

an existing dataset. The Dataset Configuration panel operates basically the same, whether you

are configuring a new dataset or modifying an existing dataset. For purposes of discussion, the

Dataset Configuration panel is documented in this section, using an existing dataset. The

differences in functionality between configuring a new dataset or modifying the configuration of

an existing dataset will be documented in the text of the panel.



Dataset Configuration panel - Existing Dataset

Enter a Description and Subset Label for an existing dataset or the new dataset. The Subset

Label is for reference only and can provide more information about the dataset, beyond the

dataset name.

If you are using an existing dataset, the system will display the existing Common Columns,

Data Columns, and Subsets associated with the dataset. If you are creating a new dataset, nodata will display for Common Columns, Data Columns, or Subsets.

It is important to add the different columns in the order in which they appear on the panel.

Create Common Columns, then create Data Columns, and, finally, create Subsets. You can’t

add any more common columns once the data columns have been added to your dataset.

When you click the Add button under Common Columns the Column Detail panel displays. On

the Column Detail panel you will enter the new Common Columns you want to associate with thedataset.

The Add button under Common Columns won’t be accessible if you created your dataset

using the extraction process or if you have data columns defined. If you created the existing

dataset in the Quality Server initially, then you can click the Add button and enter additional

Common Columns.

For more information about adding common columns see, Column Detail Panel.



When you click the Add button under Data Columns the Column Detail panel displays. On the

Column Detail panel you’ll enter the Data Columns you want to associate with the dataset.

For more information about adding data columns see, Column Detail Panel.

When you click the Add button under Subsets the Subset Detail panel displays. On the Subset

Detail panel you’ll enter the Subsets you want to associate with the dataset.

For more information about adding subsets see, Subset Detail Panel.

When you click the Formula button the Subset/Column Detail Panel displays. On theSubset/Column Detail panel you can enter the formula for a measurement data column.

The Formula button becomes available when you select a measurement Data Column and a

Subset together at the same time. Click a value under Data Columns and click a value under

Subsets.

For more information about defining a formula for a measurement data column, see

Subset/Column Detail Panel.

Column Detail Panel

Usage Use the Column Detail panel to add common columns or data columns

to a dataset.

Navigation Click the Add button under Common Columns or Data Columns on the

Dataset Configuration panel.

Column Detail panel

Enter the Column Name and select the Column type. Column type options include:



1) APPLICATION FIELD 12) HCLIM 28) SUBGROUP

SEQUENCE

2) STREAM COMPONENT 14) TEST VIOLATION 29) SAMPLE NO

7) DATE AND TIME 15) DEFECT 31) SUBGROUP STATUS

8) VALUE 16) CAUSE 35) ATTRIBUTE TALLY

9) SUBGROUP SIZE 17) ACTION

11) SEQUENCE 20) COMMENT

When you create columns in the dataset, they will inherit properties from the selected Column

type. This gives the Quality Server the ability to make assumptions about the new column and

how it can be used for analysis. The Column type contains properties such as data type (character

or integer) and row type (single or multiple). Using this method minimizes the number of

parameters you would be required to enter when defining columns in the dataset.

Click OK to go back to the Dataset Configuration panel.

Subset Detail Panel

Usage Use the Subset Detail panel to add subsets to a dataset.

Navigation Click the Add button under Subsets on the Dataset Configuration panel.

Subset Detail panel

Enter the Name of the subset.

Select the Data Type to associate with the subset. Options include:

• Variables

• Defects



• Defectives

For more information about data types see, “Maintaining Measurement Plans”.

Enter the Subgroup Size for the new subset by moving the slider, or enter the subgroup sizedirectly.

Select the Control Chart to associate with the new subset. Control Chart selection is dependent

on the Data Type you select. Available combinations include:

Data Type Available Control Charts

Variables X and Moving Range

Xbar and Range

Xbar and Sigma

Defects c Chart

u Chart

Defectives p Chart

Np Chart

Select the Control Proc (control procedure) to associate with the new subset.

The actual charts and control procedures listed will be dependent upon the configuration of

your database.

For more information about Control Charts and Control Procedures, see “Defining Quality

Methods”.

Enter the Lower and Upper Spec Limits (lower and upper specification limits) and Factors 1

and 2.

Enter the Control Limits for the first Chart field (Lower, Control, and Upper).

Enter the Control Limits for the second Chart field (Lower, Control, and Upper).

The current process control limits will display from the database if the dataset you are using was

created via an extraction or inquiry.




Subset/Column Detail Panel

Usage Use the Subset/Column Detail panel to have the system derive an entire

column’s worth of values, using a formula you define.

Navigation Click the Formula button under Subsets on the Dataset Configuration

panel. The Formula button becomes available when you select a

measurement Data Column and a Subset together at the same time.

Click a value under Data Columns and click a value under Subsets.

Subset/Column Detail panel

The upper portion of the panel displays the subset and data column you selected. This panel

currently displays Area:Value. Area is the subset selected and Value was the data columnselected.

Enter the Formula in the box that applies to the measurement column and subset. This formula

behaves similar to the formula used for deriving characteristics in the measurement plans. For

example, you would use a formula in the case of prototyping or characterizing a process that in

real life uses derived characteristics or if you want to derive costs from live data by appending a

subset (characteristic) to a dataset that has been extracted from the database.


For more information about defining formulas, see “Maintaining Measurement Plans”.

Using the Spreadsheet

Usage Use the Spreadsheet to perform the following:

• Add data values to a newly created dataset.

• Add, change, or delete data values associated with an existing

dataset.



Navigation To add initial data values to a new dataset:

Access the Quality Server local to your system, and then select File,

New on the initial window that displays.

To add, change, or delete data for an existing dataset:

Access the Quality Server local to your system, and then select File,

Open on the initial window that displays. Finally, select the dataset you

want to use.

Prerequisites Quality Server needs to have been successfully installed locally on your

system.

The Spreadsheet is used to add data for a new dataset or to modify data on an existing dataset.

The Spreadsheet operates basically the same, whether you are adding data for the first time or

modifying existing data. For purposes of discussion, the Spreadsheet is documented in this

section, using an existing dataset. The differences in functionality between adding new data and

modifying existing data will be documented in the text of the panel.

Spreadsheet display - existing dataset

The system displays the data associated with an existing dataset on the Spreadsheet. If you are

creating a new dataset, the Spreadsheet won’t contain any data.

To add data to an existing dataset or to add data to a new dataset, click an empty cell and enter the

new data values. You can also cut and paste the different cells within the Spreadsheet. In

addition, you can clear any data from the cells or change any existing data in the cells. This

function is similar to Excel, if you have used that application.



Creating Quality Server Templates

The Quality Server enables you to create custom graphic layouts (also referred to as templates)

that you can store and reuse. With the templates, you can display one or more data analysis tools

in the Quality Server panel simultaneously.

You can access the data analysis tools individually, using the Quality Server toolbar or the View

menu.

For more information about the data analysis tools, see Understanding the Quality Server

Toolbar.

For more information about the Quality Server displays, see “Using the Quality Server

Displays”.

Understanding Quality Server Layouts

One of the primary values of using a layout is data comparison. You can use it to displaydifferent graphs and charts for the same sets of data, to make it easier to compare the information.

For example, suppose you use a line graph, a bar graph, and a box plot to display your data every

time you examine a dataset. You can set up the Quality Server panel to display the three charts in

the identical format for each dataset you examine.

You can also compare two similar datasets. For example, if you’ve created a layout that will use

certain attributes or measurement columns, you can apply that layout to all similar datasets thathave those columns defined. The datasets don’t have to be identical, just similar.

For more information about datasets, see Loading Datasets Into the Quality Server.

You can create layouts of any combination of charts, save them, and apply them again later.

After you apply them, you can change them and save them again as new layouts, without

changing the original layout.

Creating Quality Server Layouts

You can create any arrangement of charts and save the arrangement as a template or layout. The

easiest way to access the charts for creating the layout is to use the buttons on the Quality Server

toolbar.

First, you must open the dataset you want to display, and then you can open the charts you want

to be included in your template. Size and position the charts on the Quality Server panel so they



will display your data in the way that will be most useful to you. Then save the layout, by

selecting File, Save Layout.

Save Layout - File Menu

Name your new layout file, and enter it in the Save As panel. The extension .tpl is automatically

appended to all layout files.

The template file is saved to the same directory location as the dataset files on your

workstation. Templates, like datasets, don’t reside in the PeopleSoft database and should be

considered user-specific.

Save As

When you click the Save button, the layout file is saved for future use.

For more information about the charts in the Quality Server toolbar, see Understanding the

Quality Server Toolbar.



Applying Quality Server Layouts

To apply a layout, you must have created one and saved it for reuse. You can’t apply a layout

until you have opened a dataset.

To apply a layout, select File, Apply Layout.

Apply Layout - File Menu

Select one of the templates listed in the Open panel, and click the Open button.

Open layout

The template is displayed with the data from your open dataset.



Quality Server layout

The panels on the layout display the data from the currently selected dataset. If you open a

different dataset and apply the same layout, you will see the new data displayed in the samearrangement of panels.

Each time you apply a different layout to the same data, the new layout replaces the previous one.

For more information about the charts in the Quality Server toolbar, see Understanding the

Quality Server Toolbar.

You can manipulate any of the charts in the layout the same as when you display the chart

individually. You can move each chart, work with the data, and change the layout of the charts in

the panel.

To display the original layout, apply it again from the File menu.

For more information about the data analysis tools, see Understanding the Quality Server

Toolbar.

For more information about the Quality Server displays, see “Using the Quality Server

Displays”.



Saving Current Configuration Settings

The control settings for each dataset (CLD file) are embedded in the CLD file. In the case of data

extractions or inquires (where the output is written to a CLD file for download) the current

database configurations for control charts, control procedures, control tests, and graph and display

preferences are appended to the file along with the actual data. This insures a concise snapshot of

the configuration no matter when you view the dataset.

Using the Save Control Definitions option in the Quality Server, you can refresh your local

configuration file with the settings from any CLD file, and it also enables you to apply the latest

database configurations (control tests, control charts, and control procedures) to any new datasetcreated off-line.

Saving control definitions

Select Save Control Definitions to save the current configuration settings for control charts,

control tests, and graph and display preferences. When you make this selection, the system will

update the local QS_QSRV.CFG file with whatever control definitions have been set in the

database and embedded in an extraction or inquiry CLD file. With this selection, changes made

under the Define Quality Methods menu in PeopleSoft Quality are easily copied to a client

machine for off-line analysis, such as when creating new datasets within the Quality Server.

Example of How to Use This Option

Let’s say someone in your organization creates a new control test using the PeopleSoft Qualityapplication. After the new control test is saved it is written to the database.

Now let’s say you want to have this new control test available for off-line analysis in the Quality

Server. In order for this control test to be referenced in off-line quality analyses, your local

configuration must be updated to include the new control test. To update your configuration,

perform an extraction or inquiry and download the associated CLD file. Upon opening the file in

the Quality Server, choosing the Save Control Definitions option will update the local cache

(configuration) file with the new test.

Browser Options

When you are in PeopleSoft Quality using any of the inquiry pages or reviewing control plan

performance, you have the option to create a dataset by clicking the Create Dataset button. Plus,

during the execution of a data extraction you can also create a dataset by clicking the Searchbutton.

When you click either the Create Dataset button or the Search button you receive a FileDownload page.



Reviewing file download options

When the File Download page displays you have a couple of options.

Select Open this file from its current location if you want to open the Quality Server that is

installed locally on your system, and the Spreadsheet and Selector panel displays by default

populated with the data from the particular page you are using.

Select Save this file to disk if you want to save this dataset to a location you specify on your

system or the network. Then, anyone who has the Quality Server installed locally on his or her

system could then display this dataset that is created, or you could view the dataset in the future if

you have the Quality Server installed locally.

Click the OK button to have the system perform the option you selected.

Click the Cancel button to exit the page regardless of the option chosen. No action will take

place.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L U S I N G T H E Q U A L I T Y S E R V E R D I S P L A Y S 1 2 - 1

C H A P T E R 1 2

Using the Quality Server Displays

This section describes how to use the PeopleSoft Quality Server charts and analysis tools toassess process performance and optimize controls to achieve continuous process improvement.

Summarizing the Quality Server Charts

Peoplesoft Quality provides several industry standard charts and graphs. Each chart possesses

unique display and analysis traits that you can alter to provide a custom view of your data. Using

the Quality Server, you can display multiple graphs simultaneously for ease of comparison orreporting.

For more information about the Quality Server charts, see Using the Quality Server Charts.

Quality Server Chart Chart Contents Summary

Control Chart

Panel Definition. Use the Control Chart to

view and analyze control charts for the

current dataset selections.

Interaction.

Select a point to see its details.

Remove individual points or groups of

points.

Tests.

Apply various control procedures.

For more information, see Using the



1 2 - 2 U S I N G T H E Q U A L I T Y S E R V E R D I S P L A Y S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L


Histogram

Panel Definition. Use the Histogram to

display the distribution analysis graphics

for the currently selected dataset.

Interaction.

Click a cell and highlight to select for

elimination.

Use mouse sweep to highlight cells to see

their details on the status line.

Tests.

means test

stdev test


Histogram Display.

Bar Graph

Panel Definition. Displays statistics for

each selection from the Selector panel in

Bar Graph format.

Interaction. None.

Tests. None.

For more information, see Using the Bar

Graph Display.

Line Graph

Panel Definition. Displays the current

subset measurement values in the Line

Graph format.

Interaction.

Sweep mouse to highlight a section in

yellow. Details of highlighted points are

displayed below the graph.

Tests. None.

For more information, see Using the Line

Graph Display.

Pareto Chart

Panel Definition. Displays attribute

counts in a ranked-order format.

Interaction.

Click a cell to select for removal from

chart.

Tests. None.

For more information, see Using the Pareto

Chart.




Box Plots

Panel Definition. Displays box & whisker

plots, capability graphs, and min/max

(minimum/maximum) graphs.

Interaction.

Select a cell to display detail statistics.

Tests. None.

For more information, see Using the Box

Plots Display.

Spreadsheet

Panel Definition. Displays dataset

information in spreadsheet format. Enter

or change cell values.

Interaction.

You can change the column headers and

width of the columns.

Tests. None.


Spreadsheet Display.

Statistical Matrix

Panel Definition. You can view tabular

formatted statistics related to one or more

subsets of the dataset.

Interaction.

You can change the column widths.

Tests. None.


Statistical Matrix Display.

For more information, see “Defining Graph and Display Preferences”.



Using the Quality Server Charts

The Quality Server displays are also called graphing tools. When you click each graphing tool

button on the Quality Server toolbar, the system displays a specific chart based upon the current

selections made from the Selector panel.

Using the Control Chart Display

Usage The Control Chart is the best Peoplesoft Quality tool to view process

performance over a specific time period or number of samples. Control

charts can help you distinguish between natural and unnatural process

variation and the effectiveness of corrective actions taken. With the

Control Chart tool, you have a broad range of options for exploring and

modifying the chart types and applying control tests.

NavigationTo display the Control Chart, click the Control Chart button, or

select View, Control Chart in the Quality Server.

Control Chart

Understanding the Control Chart Layout

The Control Chart display is comprised of multiple graph panes; also referred to as sections.Each section in the control chart displays information about the subset that you are examining.



Title Section

Title section - control chart

The title section displays the label of the chart being applied for example, X-bar and Range

charts. The title section also displays the subset for which the data is being displayed, for

example, Temp A.

In the title section, n is the subgroup size used for this control chart.

The Sgrps (subgroups) entry indicates the number of subgroups or plotted points displayed in this

chart.

The OCL (operating control limit) status field indicates the current status of control limit

promotion or calculation.

The OCL statuses correspond to the standard None, Preliminary, Monitoring, and Ongoing

limit statuses. The status of Modified indicates the control limits were calculated

dynamically for this graph window and not extracted from the database.

Proc is the control procedure that is in effect. This label also indicates whether the alarms

indicated on the chart were:

(Tested) Tests and alarms were performed locally to this graph and

not necessarily present in the database.

(Actual) Alarms associated with the subgroups were extracted from

the database.

For more information about defining charts, see “Defining Quality Methods”.



Chart Section

Chart section - control chart

The chart section displays the main body of the graph. For example, if you selected the X-bar

and range charts, you would see two graphs displayed on the control chart, one for the X-bar and

one for the range chart.

Each point on the graph represents an individual subgroup.

Alarms or out-of-control points are indicated by red triangles. All others are represented by green

circles. A blue square indicates the subgroup readings were edited in the database using the

PeopleSoft Quality data entry panels.

Points with cause and action information associated with them will be indicated by an over-

bar.

You can see the subgroup values for each point on the chart by finding its number in the detail

section of the control chart.

Control Limit Description Section

Control Limit Description section - control chart

The control limit description section displays the values and appropriate labels for the upper

control limit (UCL), mean (CL), and lower control limit (LCL) for each graph. These limits

may be have been extracted from the database, calculated or set local to the graph.



For more information, see Modifying Control Chart Graph Options.

Separator Section

Separator section - control chart

The separator section is blank, unless you have selected a point in the graph section; then it

displays detailed information about the selected point.

Detail Section

Detail section - no point selected on control chart

The detail section displays a list of subgroup summary information if no point has been selectedon the graph. This list includes the subgroup plot point values and alarm descriptions.

Detail section - point selected on control chart

If you select an individual point on the graph, this area is used to display detail information such

as traceability fields, probable causes, and corrective actions for that subgroup. If the dataset has

been extracted from the Quality database, the Subgroup Status field will also be displayed. The

Subgroup Status field is used to indicate whether a subgroup has been edited or changed in the

database. A Subgroup Status of 800 indicates one or more sample values have been changed for

the subgroup, and this point will be designated as a blue square on the chart. A Subgroup Status

of 200 indicates the subgroup has not been edited.



Managing Subset Data for the Control Chart

The Control Chart tool will create a separate graph for each subset you have highlighted in the

Selector panel. For example, if you selected LENGTH, WIDTH, and HEIGHT in the Selectorpanel, the Control Chart tool will have three graphs available for viewing.

Plus, if you select two or more subsets that have the same data type, subgroup size, control chart,and specifications, you can view a summary chart of the subgroups.

You can cycle through the multiple charts by using the Previous Characteristic

and Next Characteristic buttons on the Quality Server toolbar.

Each graph is displayed, one at a time, within the existing tool window.

For more information about the Selector panel, see “Using the Quality Server”.

Interacting With the Control Chart Display

You can use several methods to interact with the Control Chart tool.

You can resize the sections by placing the cursor on the thick bar between the sections. Then you

can drag the edge of the section to whatever size you want.

You can select an individual point and view the details, including subgroup calculations, trace

data, and cause and corrective action information.

When you click points in the chart section, a yellow vertical bar highlights the points you want to

examine. The corresponding values for the points are displayed in the detail section of the chart.

You can move this bar by dragging it, or you can use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys on

the keyboard. To remove the yellow highlight bar, drag it to the far left or far right of the chart.

You can select multiple subgroup points by holding down the SHIFT key and dragging the mouse

over the points you want to remove or restore. The points you select are enclosed in red boxes in

the chart section, and the summary list is in the detail section. To deselect the points with red

boxes hold down the SHIFT key and drag the mouse over the selected points, or you can use the

Restore button. These subgroups will be discounted from any local control limit recalculations or

test violations when you click the Redraw button.

To redraw the Control Chart graph after you have selected points or run tests, click the

Redraw button on the Quality Server toolbar; or select Modify Graph, Redraw. The

Redraw button redraws only the active window.

To restore the dataset back to its original state click the Restore Dataset button on the

Quality Server toolbar; or select Modify Graph, Restore Dataset.



When you use the control chart to apply tests, deselect points, or change control limits, the

results are local to the active window; the dataset is not altered.

Modifying Control Chart Graph Options

Usage Use the Modify Control Chart dialog box to select options to modify the

graph settings and display characteristics for the active Control Chart

window.

Navigation Once you have a control chart displayed, open the Modify Control Chart

dialog box by selecting Modify Graph, Settings.

You can modify the control chart by resizing the sections to adjust the amount of display

information, changing the control limits, and choosing whether to display the control limit labels,

alarm indicators, varying control limits, and test zones.

Any changes you make to the control chart are in effect only for the active chart. If you open a

second control chart window, the changes will not be in effect.

Modify Control Chart dialog box

Select the Fit Points to Window check box to size the graph to fit completely inside the chart

section of the window. Otherwise, the graph may extend beyond the current window size, and

you’ll need to scroll on the window to view all the points.

If you select the Display Ctl Limit Labels (display control limit labels) check box, the labels will

display in the description section of the control chart. This is useful if you have limited space and

it is more important to display the graph than the labels.

If you want to display the red triangles (alarm indicators) that represent subgroup points that areout of limits, select the Display Alarm Indicators check box.


1 2 - 1 0 U S I N G T H E Q U A L I T Y S E R V E R D I S P L A Y S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Select Display varying limits to display historical control limits associated with a dataset in a

step-wise fashion on the control chart. The system will draw the chart based on the most current

control limits, and they will appear as straight lines. If the time period depicted by the chart

includes prior limit calculations, and you select this option, the system will display the limits asexpanding or contracting segments against a fixed scale.

The Display varying limits check box applies only to datasets extracted from the Quality

database.

Control chart with varying control limits

Select Display test zones if you want the + Sigma and – Sigma lines to display within the main

body of the control chart.

In the Control Limits fields, you can reset any of the limits for the upper control limit (UCL),

mean line (CL), or lower control limit (LCL). There is a column to set limits for each graph inthe active section of the control chart.

Select the Maintain Current Limits check box if you don’t want the current control limits tochange (be recalculated) while you are working with this control chart.

The limits will be recalculated when you click the Redraw button.

Executing Tests From the Control Chart Menu Bar

Usage Use the Control Procedures dialog box to select a control procedure and

apply it to the current control chart.

Navigation Once you have a control chart displayed, choose a different control

procedure to run against the current datasets, select Tests, Apply

Control Procedure.

You can select a control procedure from the list and apply it to the current chart. Each procedure

contains one or more control tests that are executed against the chart to test alarm conditions.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L U S I N G T H E Q U A L I T Y S E R V E R D I S P L A Y S 1 2 - 1 1

The control procedures and tests were set up when you defined Quality methods.

For more information about setting up or changing the tests in the control procedures, see

“Defining Quality Methods”.

Control Procedures dialog box

To run the tests, select a control procedure. The tests run immediately, and the results are

displayed in the lower portion of the Control Procedures dialog box, in the results area.

The first number represents the number of chart-based alarms; alarms not generated from

specification violations. The number in parentheses is the number of alarms generated fromspecification violations.

For example:

3 (3) Subgroups Alarmed on X Chart

6 (3) Subgroups Alarmed on MRange Chart

indicates that 3 alarms were generated from non-specification violations and 3 alarms were

generated from specification violations on the X-Bar graph of the Control Chart.

Because each point on the chart can have more than one alarm condition, the total number of

alarms can exceed the number of points on the chart. The number of specification-related alarmsis the same for the second Mrange Chart.

When you click the Done button, the dialog box closes, and the graph on the control chart is

updated.

To restore the original graph or the original dataset, use the Redraw and Restore Dataset buttons

on the Quality Server toolbar.



For more information about using Redraw and Restore Dataset, see Interacting With the


In addition, by using the configuration panels associated with the Selector panel in the Quality

Server, you can change all types of things related to a subset. You can change Subgroup Size,

Control Chart type, default Control Procedure, and the Upper and Lower Spec Limits.

For more information about using the configuration panels, see “Using the Quality Server”.

Using the Histogram Display

Usage The Histogram displays the distribution analysis graphics generated

from the currently selected dataset.

Navigation

To display the Histogram, click the Histogram button, or select

View, Histogram in the Quality Server.

Histogram

Understanding the Histogram Layout

The Histogram display comprises multiple panes; also referred to as sections. Each section in the

histogram displays information about the subset that you are examining.



Title Section

Title section - histogram

The title section displays the subset being analyzed for example, TEMP A.

In the title section, Observations is the number of points used for the analysis.

The title section displays a description of how the data distribution was assessed: Pearson Best-

Fit, Tested for Normality, or Normality Assumed.

For more information about Pearson Best Fit and Normality Test statistics, see “Statistical

Equations and Methods Used for Quality” and “Statistical Equations and Methods Used for

Quality”.

Chart Section

Chart section - histogram

The chart section of the histogram displays the main body of the graph.

Specifications and +/- 3 sigma regions are denoted by dashed lines (optional).

The mean point is indicated by a thin, red vertical line.

The histogram is scaled by frequency on the left and by percent on the right.

The distribution curve (indicated by a thick, red curved line) overlays the chart (optional).



List Section

List section - histogram

The list section displays the summary statistics. You can change the statistics listed to fit your

requirements by changing the Graph Preference settings. The statistics are calculated based uponthe active data values for this subset.

For more information about changing Graph Preference settings, see “Defining Graph and

Display Preferences”.

Detail Section

Detail section - histogram

The detail section is blank, unless you have selected a vertical bar (cell) in which case, it displays

detailed cell information. To select a cell, drag the cursor over the vertical bar, and it is

highlighted in yellow. The Detail section exhibits detailed information about the Cell # (cell

number), the dimensions, and the Tally for the selected subset.

The Cell # is the order of the individual cell in the histogram. For example, Cell #6 is the sixth

cell in the sequence of cells displayed.

Width is the dimension of the cell in the display. Tally is the total number of individual values

in a cell.

The % (percent) number is the percent of individual values in a cell.



Managing Subset Data for the Histogram

The histogram will create a separate graph for each subset you highlighted in the Selector panel.

For example, if you highlighted LENGTH, WIDTH, and HEIGHT, the histogram will have threegraphs available for viewing.

Plus, if you select two or more subsets that have the same data type, subgroup size, control chart,and specifications, you can view a summary chart of the subgroups.

To cycle through multiple histograms, use the Previous Characteristic and Next

Characteristic buttons on the Quality Server toolbar.

Each graph is displayed, one at a time, within the existing tool window.

Interacting With the Histogram Display

You can use several methods to interact with the histogram display.



You can click a cell, and it becomes crosshatched. When you click the Redraw button, the

histogram is redrawn with the crosshatched cells removed. This is useful if you want to examine

a smaller subset of the data. By deleting cells, you can temporarily exclude the data values

associated with that cell and recalculate the histogram and statistics.

To select a cell, drag the cursor over the vertical bar, and it is highlighted in yellow. You can see

the details of the selected cell in the detail section of the histogram.

To redraw the histogram graph after you have selected points, click the Redraw button

on the Quality Server toolbar, or select Modify Graph, Redraw. The Redraw button

redraws only the active window.

To restore the dataset back to its original state, click the Restore Dataset button on the

Quality Server toolbar, or select Modify Graph, Restore Dataset.

Cell values excluded from the graph are local to the active window; the dataset is not altered.



Modifying Histogram Graph Options

Usage Use the Histogram Options dialog box to select options to modify the

settings and display characteristics for the active histogram window.

Navigation Once you have a histogram displayed, open the Histogram Options


You can modify the histogram by resizing the sections, to adjust the amount of display

information in each section of the graph. You can choose whether to display the overlay curve,

the overlay specs, or to overlay a box plot. You can change the number of cells displayed and the

upper and lower specification limits.

Any changes you make to the histogram are in effect only for the active chart. If you open a

second histogram window, the changes will not be in effect.

Histogram Options dialog box

Select the Overlay Distribution Curve check box if you want the red bell curve line to overlay

the cells of the histogram.

Select the Overlay Specs (overlay specifications) check box if you want to see the blue, dashed,

vertical lines indicating the upper specification limit (USL) and the lower specification limit(LSL).

If you select the Overlay Box and Whisker Plot check box, you can see a box plot displayed

with the curve graph on the histogram.



Histogram with box plot overlay

You can select the Number of Cells you want displayed in the histogram. Move the slider, or

enter the number of cells in the settings box to the right, to indicate how many cells you want

between 4 and 30.

The sample values will be reordered to fit within the number of cells specified.

To change the Spec Limits (specification limits) enter the limits in the Upper and Lower fields.

Executing Tests From the Histogram Menu Bar

There are two tests you can execute for the histogram, the Mean Test and the Stdev (standard

deviation) Test.

The Mean Test

Usage Use the Mean Test dialog box to execute the Mean Test against the

histogram.

Navigation Once you have a histogram displayed, select Tests, Mean Test.

The mean test is used to test the mean of the current sample versus a target mean and confidencelevel that you enter.



Mean Test dialog box

In the Mean Test dialog box, you can enter the Target Mean and the Confidence Level. Or, if

you prefer, you can use the defaults.

Click the Calculate button to see the test values.

Mean Test calculations

The results of the t Test calculation are displayed in the Mean Test dialog box. When you click

the Done button, the dialog box closes, and the graph on the histogram is updated.

For more information about the Mean Test, see “Statistical Equations and Methods Used for

Quality”.

The Stdev Test

Usage Use the StdevTest (standard deviation test) dialog box to execute the

Stdev Test against the histogram.

Navigation Once you have a histogram displayed, select Tests, Stdev Test.



The Stdev test is used to test the standard deviation of the current sample versus a target standard

deviation and confidence level that you enter.

The standard deviation test has a limitation of df = 100.

Standard Deviation Test dialog box

The system displays the Sample Size. You can’t change the sample size.

In the Target Standard Dev (target standard deviation) field, enter the standard deviation

numbers for your test. Or, if you prefer, you can use the defaults.

Select the Confidence Level from the drop-down list. Confidence Levels include:

0.995 0.050

0.990 0.025

0.975 0.010

0.950 0.005

Click the Calculate button to see the test values.



Stdev Test calculations

The results of the Chi Squared Test calculation are displayed in the Stdev Test dialog box. When

you click the Done button, the dialog box closes and the graph on the histogram is updated.

For more information about the Stdev Test, see “Statistical Equations and Methods Used for

Quality”.

Using the Bar Graph Display

Usage The Bar Graph tool enables you to compare the statistics among subsets,

such as Temp A, Temp B, and Temp C.

NavigationTo display the Bar Graph, click the Bar Graph button, or select

View, Bar Graph.



Bar graph

Understanding the Bar Graph Layout

The bar graph display is comprised of multiple panes; also referred to as sections. Each section in

the bar graph displays information about the subset that you are examining.

There is a bar on the graph for each subset you selected in the Selector panel.

Title Section

Title section - bar graph

The title section of the bar graph displays the statistics you are comparing. There may also

include a description of how normality is assessed, Pearson Best-Fit, Tested for Normality, or

Normality Assumed.

Scale Section

Scale section - bar graph



The scale section displays the name of the statistical item you are comparing, the Mean, the

upper and lower scale limits (based on the minimum and maximum statistical values). You can

select different statistics from the Modify Graph, Settings dialog box.

For more information about the Settings dialog box, see Modifying Bar Graph Options.

Graph Section

Graph section - bar graph

The graph section displays a bar for each characteristic you are comparing.

Interacting With the Bar Graph Display



Modifying Bar Graph Options

Usage Use the Modify Bar Graph dialog box to select options to modify the

settings and display characteristics for the active Bar Graph window.

Navigation Once you have a bar graph displayed, open the Modify Bar Graph dialog

box by selecting Modify Graph, Settings.

You can modify the size of the bar display, the bar values, reorder, and change the statistic on the

bar graph.

Any changes you make to the bar graph are in effect only for the active chart. If you open a

second bar graph window, the changes will not be in effect.



Modify Bar Graph dialog box

Select the Fit Bars to Window check box if you want the graph expanded to fit the full size of

the Bar Graph display window. Otherwise, the graph may extend beyond the current window

size, and you’ll need to scroll on the window to view all the bars.

If you want to see the numeric values of each bar on the graph, select the Display Bar Values

check box.

To see which bars represent the minimum and maximum values, select the Indicate Min/Max

(<>) Bars (indicate minimum/maximum bars) check box. The bar that contains the lowest value

will display <. The bar with the highest value will display >. This option is useful for

distinguishing the highest and lowest value bars, if the bars are almost the same lengths on thegraph.

Enter a numeric value in the Bar Display Limit (# bars) (number of bars) field to indicate the

number of bars you want to display on the graph. The limits for constraining the number of bars

are from 2 to 1000. If you enter 0 or 1, then no limits are imposed, and all the subsets youselected in the Selector panel will be displayed.

Graphing Order (Bars)

Select the order in which the bars (subsets) display on the bar graph. Select the Selection option

to have the system display the subsets in the order in which they were selected on the Selector

panel. Check Ascending to have the bars display in ascending order by statistical value. Select

Descending to have the bars display in descending order by statistical value.

To compare statistics, select an item from the list in the Statistic field. You can compare

machines to machines or multiple readings for cylinders of different diameters, by selecting fromthe list of statistics. Statistic values include:

MEAN OBSRV

MINIMUM MAXIMUM

STDDEV RANGE



VARIANCE STDERR

COEFVAR SKEWNESS

KURTOSIS ZLOWER

ZUPPER LOWER3S

UPPER3S DISTYPE

SUMX SUMX2

SUMZ SIZEN

Q1 MEDIAN

Q3 AVEMEANS

AVEVARS CP

CPK CPL

CPU CPK90

PCSPEC PCLOWER

PCUPPER PCTOTAL

SUMDEF DEFPH

DEFPT DEFPM

DEFPU LSL

USL FACT1

FACT2 TRANS

For more information about several of these statistics, see “Statistical Equations and

Methods Used for Quality”.

In the Scale Limits fields, you can enter different values for the Lower and Upper specification

limits.



Using the Line Graph Display

Usage The Line Graph displays the measurement values of the subsets selected,

in line graph format. A line graph is sometimes referred to as a Trend

chart.

Navigation

To display the line graph, click the Line Graph button, or select

View, Line Graph.

Line graph

Understanding the Line Graph Layout

The line graph display comprises multiple graph panes; also referred to as sections. Each section

in the line graph displays information about the subset that you are examining. All the subsets

you are comparing are overlaid on the same graph in the line graph layout.

Title Section

Title section - line graph

The title section displays the label of the graph being displayed for a specific column, such as

READING. The title section also displays the maximum number of points drawn on the graph.



For more information about defining charts, see “Defining Graph and Display Preferences”.

Scale Section

Scale section - line graph

The scale section of the line graph indicates the numeric values for the scale used for the graph.

The scales are usually calculated based upon the minimum/maximum observations for the subsets

selected, but you can change the scale limits using the Modify Line Graph dialog box.

Graph Section

Graph section - line graph

The graph section displays a line for each subset you selected in the Selector panel. For example,

if you selected three subsets, you will see three lines displayed on the line graph. Each line will

have a different geometric shape for its point indicator, and each line will be displayed in a

different color.



Legend Section

Legend section - line graph

The legend section displays the geometric shape and color that will represent each subset on the

line graph.

Detail Section

Detail section - line graph

The detail section displays the individual data values for the points in each subset selected.

Managing Subset Data for the Line Graph

All subsets are overlaid in the line graph so you can view them at the same time. You can

examine the graph with or without lines or points.

For more information about displaying lines and points, see Modifying Line Graph Options.

Interacting With the Line Graph Display

You can select subgroup points on the line graph display to examine details.

When you click points on the graph section, a yellow vertical bar highlights the points you want

to examine. The corresponding values for the points are displayed in the detail section of the

chart, a single point for each subset. You can move the yellow vertical bar by dragging it, or you

can use the LEFT ARROW and RIGHT ARROW keys on the keyboard. To remove the yellow

highlight bar, drag it to the far left or the far right of the chart.





Modifying Line Graph Options

Usage Use the Modify Line Graph dialog box to select options to modify the

settings and display characteristics for the active line graph window.

Navigation Once you have a line graph displayed, open the Modify Line Graph


You can modify the line graph by resizing the sections to adjust the amount of display

information, changing the display lines and points, and changing the graph scale.

Any changes you make to the line graph are in effect only for the active chart. If you open a

second line graph window, the changes will not be in effect.

Modify Line Graph dialog box

Select the Fit Point to Window check box if you want the graph expanded to fit the full size of

the line graph display window. Otherwise, the graph may extend beyond the current window

size, and you’ll need to scroll on the window to view all the points.

If you want to display the lines that connect each point on the graph, select the Draw Connecting

Lines check box.

Select the Draw Points check box if you want to display the points on each line in the graph.

In the Scale Limits fields you can enter different values for the Lower and Upper scale limits.

Using the Pareto Chart

Usage A Pareto Chart is a special type of vertical bar graph used to display

attributes data in descending order of frequency of occurrence.

NavigationTo display the Pareto Chart, click the Pareto button, or select

View, Pareto.



Pareto Chart

Understanding the Pareto Chart Layout

The Pareto chart is comprised of multiple graph panes; also referred to as sections. Each section

in the Pareto chart displays information about the subset that you are examining.

The Attribute Column Role Assignment on the Selector panel will determine which attribute

will display on the Pareto chart.


Title Section

Title section - Pareto chart

The title section includes a heading that indicates which subset of data and attribute you are

currently analyzing. In this example, the attribute being analyzed is Defects, and the Pareto chart

being displayed is for all the subsets you selected on the Selector panel.

If you have filtered the attributes in any way, either by clicking a cell or from the Modify ParetoChart dialog box, you’ll see (Filtered) in the title section.



For more information about filtering the attributes, see Modifying Pareto Chart Options.

Scale Section

Scale section - Pareto chart

The scale section displays the name of the data column you are analyzing and a scale that exhibits

the display limits for the Pareto chart. In this example, the data column is Defects and the scale is

Frequency.

Chart Section

Chart section - Pareto chart

The chart section contains the main body of the Pareto chart, including a description of each

attribute, the attribute count, and the percentage of the number of defects for which that attributeaccounts. The red line represents the Cumulative Percent Line, also known as the Lorenz curve.

Managing Subset Data for the Pareto Chart

When you select multiple subsets on the Selector panel and then click the Pareto button, the chart

that is initially displayed is a composite of all the subsets selected. From there, you can cycle and

view the individual Pareto charts for each subset. For example, if you selected three subsets on

the Selector panel, four Pareto charts will be generated. The first Pareto chart to display will be a

composite of all the subsets; then there will be a Pareto chart for each individual subset.

You can cycle through the multiple Pareto charts by using the Previous

Characteristic and Next Characteristic buttons on the Quality Server toolbar.



Each chart is displayed, one at a time, within the existing tool window.


Interacting With the Pareto Chart Display

There are a few interactions you can perform with the Pareto chart display.



You can click a cell and it becomes crosshatched. When you click the Redraw button, the Pareto

chart is redrawn with the crosshatched cells removed. This is useful if you want to examine a

smaller subset of the data or compare only certain attributes. When you click the Restore button,

the Pareto chart is redrawn back to its original state. The redraw and restore functions only apply

to the Pareto chart that you are currently manipulating, and these functions do not affect the other

Pareto charts.

To redraw the Pareto chart after you have selected cells, click the Redraw button on the

Quality Server toolbar, or select Modify Graph, Redraw. The Redraw button only

redraws the active window.

To restore the dataset back to its original state, click the Restore Dataset button on the

Quality Server toolbar, or select Modify Graph, Restore Dataset.

Cell values excluded from the graph are local to the active window; the dataset is not altered.

Modifying Pareto Chart Options

Usage Use the Modify Pareto Chart dialog box to modify the settings or

display characteristics for the active Pareto chart window.

Navigation Once you have a Pareto chart displayed, open the Modify Pareto Chart


You can modify the Pareto chart by choosing whether to display your cells in one window,

choosing to display cumulative lines, selecting the graphing order of the cells, choosing the

number of cells to display in your Pareto chart, and filtering the attribute components that aredisplayed.



Any changes you make to the Pareto chart are in effect only for the active chart. If you open a

second Pareto chart window, the changes will not be in effect.

Modify Pareto Chart dialog box

Select Fit Cells to Window to size the Pareto chart to fit completely inside the chart section of

the window. Otherwise, the graph may extend beyond the current window size, and you’ll need

to scroll on the window to view all the cells.

Select Display Cumulative (%) Lines if you want the Cumulative Percent Line to display across

the graph. Otherwise, it will not display.

Select the Graphing Order (cells) option. Options include:

Ascending If you choose ascending graph order, your cells will be in

ascending order by attribute count.

Descending If you choose descending graph order, your cells will be in

descending order by attribute count.

Enter the number of cells you would like to see on the Pareto chart in the Top N Cells field. For

example, if you enter 10, 10 cells will be display in the Pareto chart, if they are available.

Leaving this field set to 0 or 1 will display all attribute cells.

The Filter by Attribute Components specifies whether to display data based on components of

the defect phrase or the cause/action phrase.

These phrases can consist of up to three components. The defect phrase includes: Location,

Fault, and With. The Cause/Action phrase includes: Problem, Affecting, and Action.

The Filter by Attribute Components section applies mainly to datasets extracted from the

PeopleSoft database.

The actual component meanings may vary, depending on how they were defined in the

Attribute Categories panels.



Filter buttons refer to the first, second, and third phrase components, respectively:

1. The first component (Location or Problem).

2. The second component (Fault or Affecting).

3. The third component (With or Action).

For the first, second, and third components, select the filtering criteria and then the component

attribute by which to filter. Filtering criteria includes:

Expand This option includes all the attributes for the component.

This is the default setting for all three components.

Ignore This option excludes all the attributes having the

component.

Select This option gives you the ability to select one specific

component (by value) of the attribute to display.

Exclude This option displays everything, except for the selected

component, by value.

Select the component attribute to accompany your filter criteria. You define these attributes in

the Attribute Groups component.

For more information about attribute categories, see “Establishing Control Plans”.

When you are finished with your selections, click the OK button. The Pareto chart will display

with the options you have selected in this dialog box. In addition, the title section will have theword Filtered displayed.

Using the Box Plots Display

Usage Box Plots are also referred to as Box and Whisker plots because of the verticalwhisker lines at each end of the horizontal scale.

Box Plots are unique graphs that give you the ability to display and comparemultiple subsets at once. The Box Plots display supports three styles of plots.The plots include:

• Box & Whisker

• Capability

• Min/Max (minimum/maximum)



NavigationTo display the Box Plots, click the Box Plots button, or select

View, Box Plots.

Box Plots

Understanding the Box Plots Layout

The box plots display is comprised of multiple graph panes; also referred to as sections. Each

section in the box plots displays information about the subset you are examining.

Title Section

Title section - box plots

The title section includes a heading that indicates the plot type, what data column is being used as

the basis for generating the box plots, and the normality criteria for the calculations used to

generate the box plots. In this example, the plot type is Box & Whisker, the data column isReading, and the normality criteria is Pearson Best Fit.

The Graph Preference you select on the Selector panel determines the normality criteria to displayfor the box plot.



For more information about maintaining graph preferences, see “Defining Graph and

Display Preferences”.

Scale Section

Scale section - box plots

The scale section displays the name of the data column you are analyzing and a scale, which

exhibits the box plots limits. In this example, the data column is Reading and the graph type isBox & Whisker.

Ordinarily the scale is calculated based upon the minimum/maximum values of the data to

be graphed.

Chart Section

The chart section can vary, depending on the Graph Style you have selected. The Graph Stylesyou can choose are Box & Whisker, Capability, and Min/Max (minimum/maximum).

For more information about changing the graph styles, see Modifying Box Plots Graph

Options.

Chart section - Box & Whisker

The Box & Whisker chart section contains the Box & Whisker displays. The ends of the whisker

lines represent the minimum and maximum values, the left and right edges of the boxes represent

the first quartile and third quartile values, and the center lines represent the median value.

The individual boxes correspond to either the subsets you selected or the data groupingsestablished with the Group By Column Role Assignment on the Selector panel.




Chart section - capability graph

The capability graph chart section contains the capability graphs. The left and right edges of the

box represent the plus and minus 3 sigma values, and the centerline represents the mean value. In

addition, the green dashed lines represent the lower and upper specification limits, and the yellow

parts represent the areas out of specification based upon the distribution fitting (Normality,

Pearson Best Fit) criteria in effect.

The individual boxes correspond to either the subsets you selected or the data groupings

established with the Group By Column Role Assignment on the Selector panel.


Chart section - min/max graph (minimum/maximum graph)

The min/max graph chart section contains the min/max graphs. The left and right endpoints

represent minimum and maximum values, and the centerline represents the mean.

The individual boxes correspond to either the subsets you selected or the data groupings

established with the Group By Column Role Assignment on the Selector panel.




Detail Section

Detail section - cumulative box plots

The detail section of the box plots includes the collective summary statistics for all of the boxplots on the display.

Detail Section - individual box plot

If you select an individual box plot, then the summary statistics for that individual box plot

displays.

Managing Subset Data for the Box Plots

When you select multiple subsets on the Selector panel and then click the Box Plots button, the

box plots that are displayed represent all of the subsets you selected. All of the selected subsets

are overlaid together in the same box plots window.


Interacting With the Box Plots Display

You can select individual box plots by clicking the subset name. A red box will display around

the subset you have selected. When you do this, the detail section of the display will change from

the collective summary of statistics for all the box plots to the individual summary statistics of the

subset you selected.

You can deselect an individual box plot by clicking above the first box or below the last box inthe label area. Click to the left of the boxes.



Modifying Box Plots Graph Options

Usage Use the Modify Box Plot dialog box to modify the settings or display

characteristics for the active box plots window.

Navigation Once you have a box plot displayed, open the Modify Box Plot dialog

box by selecting Modify Graph, Settings.

You can modify the box plots by choosing the graph style, choosing to fit the display to the

window, choosing to overlay the + Sigma and - Sigma region, and modifying the graph scale

limits.

Modify Box Plot dialog box

Select the Graph Style you would like to see in the chart section of the box plots display. Graph

Style options include:

• Box & Whisker

• Capability

• Min/Max

For more information about how these graph styles display, see Understanding the Box Plots

Layout.

Select Fit Plots to Window to size the box plots to fit completely inside the chart section of the

window. Otherwise, the graph may extend beyond the current window size, and you’ll need to

scroll on the window to view all the plots.



Overlaying distribution curves on box plots

Select Overlay + / - 3 Sigma Region if you want a distribution curve to overlay on each

capability box in the box plots window. Otherwise, it will not display. This option is only

applicable when the Graph Style is set to Capability.

The distribution curve will be calculated according to the normality/curve fitting criteria in

effect by the Graph Preference ID selected.

The Graph Scale Limits are calculated by the system and displayed for you. The scales are

calculated by adding and subtracting a percentage of the upper and lower plot values, based upon

the graph type and options selected. You can modify the Lower and Upper Graph Scale

Limits, if you choose. This changes how the box plots display in the window, and the scale

section of the display will change to reflect the new graph scale limits. The scale you enter will

stay in effect until you select another graph style or (sometimes) when you change the overlay 3 +

/ - Sigma region check box. In short, if you change any of the settings that could potentially alter

its assessment of minimum/maximum plot values, the scales will be recalculated.

When you are finished with your selections, click the OK button. The box plots will display with

the options you have selected in this dialog box.

Using the Spreadsheet Display

Usage The Spreadsheet is a display that enables you to conveniently view and

manipulate the data cell values. You can use the Spreadsheet to modify

or add additional data.

NavigationTo display the Spreadsheet, click the Spreadsheet button, or

select View, Spreadsheet.



Spreadsheet

Understanding the Spreadsheet Layout

The Spreadsheet displays the current dataset information in a grid format. The Spreadsheet has

columns with column headings and rows of data pertaining to the columns. The Spreadsheet

displays the data values for the dataset, and the subsets within the dataset display across the

bottom of the Spreadsheet.

The Spreadsheet functions much the same way as an Excel spreadsheet functions, if you are

familiar with that application.

Interacting With the Spreadsheet Display

The Spreadsheet gives you the ability to enter additional data in the cells on the Spreadsheet or to

change data that already exists in a cell. In addition, you can copy, cut, and paste data within theSpreadsheet cells. This gives you the ability to enter additional data very quickly.

For more information about the Spreadsheet, see “Using the Quality Server”.

Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the display to view additional data columns.

Click each subset at the bottom of the Spreadsheet to see the data associated with that subset.

You can also export the data on the Spreadsheet to an Excel Spreadsheet and other application

types. To export the data, select File, Export, and select the appropriate options.



Using the Statistical Matrix Display

Usage The statistical matrix is a spreadsheet type of display that gives you the

ability to conveniently view statistical data. You can use the statistical

matrix to display statistics as columns or rows determined by settings in

the Graph Preferences.

NavigationTo display the statistical matrix, click the Statistical Matrix

button, or select View, Statistical Matrix.

Statistical Matrix

Understanding the Statistical Matrix Layout

The statistical matrix format is very similar to a spreadsheet. You can view tabular formattedstatistics related to one or more subsets of the dataset.

Three categories of statistics are available for display. The categories include:

General statistics This category includes Mean, Observations, Standard

Deviation, Variance, Covariance, Range, Minimum,

Maximum, Skewness, Kurtosis, Z Scores, Sum, Upper and

Lower Sigma, Quartile, and Median.

Capability indices This category includes Cp, Cpk, Cpl, Cpu, Cr, Cpk@90%,

% below specification, % above specification, % total

specification, and other associated statistics.

Defect statistics This category includes Defect Sum, Defects/Unit,

Defects/Hundred, Defects/Thousand, and Defects/Million.



Interacting With the Statistical Matrix Display

The statistical matrix display uses the Measure Column Row Assignments and the selected Graph

Preference from the Selector panel.

The Measure field depicts the values to display on the statistical matrix.

The Graph Preference determines how the data will display in the statistical matrix, in the

Quality Server window.


Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the display to view additional data columns.

Saving and Printing the Quality Server Charts

All of the Quality Server displays (Control Chart, Histogram) can be sent to a printer so that you

can have a hard copy of the display, and they can also be saved in HTML format so they can be

distributed or viewed by any browser.

Saving Quality Server Datasets and Displays

There are two methods to view all the different Quality Server displays using the Quality Server.

One of the methods is to create a data extraction from the PeopleSoft database, which creates a

dataset, and then open the dataset and view the different displays using the Quality Server. In this

case, the data is already saved to a dataset.

The second method is to view the graphics in the Quality Server after transferring from a

PeopleSoft inquiry page.

Saving a Dataset

To save the dataset, select File, Save.

Saving the Display in HTML Format

To save the display in HTML format, select File, Save as HTML.

This option saves the display and the associated text to an HTML file that can then be viewed by

any browser. You can then use this file for Web publishing or simply to email a report in a form

accessible by any browser. One of the advantages of saving to an HTML format is the individual

who is viewing the file doesn’t need a copy of the Quality Server on his or her workstation.



Printing Quality Server Displays

Any of the Quality Server displays can be sent to a printer so that you can have a hard copy of the

display.

To print a Quality Server display:

1. Have the display (Control Chart, Histogram, or Pareto Chart) that you want to print as your

active window in the Quality Server.

2. Select File, Print.

Before you print the display to hard copy, you can preview what will be printed on the hard

copy by selecting File, Print Preview.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N T E G R A T I N G W I T H O T H E R P E O P L E S O F T A P P L I C A T I O N S 1 3 - 1

C H A P T E R 1 3

Integrating With Other PeopleSoftApplications

PeopleSoft Quality integrates with PeopleSoft Purchasing, PeopleSoft Inventory, and PeopleSoft

Production Management. For Purchasing and Production Management, you’ll be able to perform

the following:

• Initiate a quality data entry session.

• Transfer to the PeopleSoft Quality data collection application, through the use of a button.

• Enter quality control data for the session.

• View online the results and alarm information from the data entered against the session.

• Transfer back to the initiating application.

For PeopleSoft Inventory, you’ll be able to perform the following:

• Initiate and save a quality data entry session.

• Retrieve and complete the quality sessions at a later date directly using PeopleSoft Quality

pages that were created by the RMA (Return Material Authorization) process.

• View online the results and alarm information from the data entered against the session.

In this section, we’ll cover in more detail all the information you need to know to understand the

integration between the different PeopleSoft applications and PeopleSoft Quality. Plus, we’ll

discuss the step-by-step processes for the different interfaces between the applications.

Before You Begin

Use the Installation Options - Products page to verify that PeopleSoft Quality is installed on your

system. Before any of the other PeopleSoft applications can integrate with PeopleSoft Quality,

PeopleSoft Quality must be installed in your environment. If you are using PeopleSoft

Purchasing, PeopleSoft Inventory, and PeopleSoft Production Management, you don’t necessarilyhave to be using PeopleSoft Quality.


1 3 - 2 I N T E G R A T I N G W I T H O T H E R P E O P L E S O F T A P P L I C A T I O N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

For more information about verifying product installations, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Financials and Supply Chain

Management General Options”.

Verifying PeopleSoft Quality installation

The Quality check box will be selected if PeopleSoft Quality is installed on your system.

If you don’t have PeopleSoft Quality installed, the necessary link or buttons will be

unavailable that would transfer you to quality data entry from PeopleSoft Purchasing or

Production Management.

For more information about installing PeopleSoft Quality Services, see PeopleSoftInstallation and Administration PeopleBooks.

Integrating With PeopleSoft Purchasing

When you inspect material that was received against a purchase order, using PeopleSoft

Purchasing, you can immediately initiate a quality data entry session in PeopleSoft Quality.

Known information (hierarchy fields and trace fields) are passed from PeopleSoft Purchasing to

PeopleSoft Quality when you click the Transfer to Quality link on the Inspection - Receipt Lines

page. This automatically creates a quality data entry session.

Upon transferring to PeopleSoft Quality, the operator will enter sample information that is

required for the Control Plan that has been defined for this purchase receiving process. While in

PeopleSoft Quality, the operator can view alarms generated against the Control Plan, enter

probable causes and log corrective actions for the alarms, and view the entered data in graphical

format.



After the operator is finished entering data against the quality data entry session the operator can

click a button to transfer back to PeopleSoft Purchasing. At that time, the operator can continue

to receive material, or initiate the Return To Vendor Setup process, using the defect quantity from

PeopleSoft Quality. The defect quantity is passed back to PeopleSoft Purchasing fromPeopleSoft Quality.

If for some reason not all the inspection data can be entered at this point, the quality data

entry session can be recalled and completed (directly from PeopleSoft Quality) at any time.

For more information about entering data for a quality data entry session, see “Collecting

Quality Data”.

Reviewing Predefined Quality Function

PeopleSoft provides a standard and predefined Quality Function to use for the integration

between PeopleSoft Purchasing and PeopleSoft Quality. You’ll want to reference this Quality

Function when you define the Control Plans and traceability sets for the purchase receiving

process.

RECV_INSPECT Quality Function

Purchasing RECV_INSPECT (receive inspect) Quality Function

Stream Hierarchy Fields Trace Fields

INV_ITEM_ID DISTRIB_LINE_NUM

VENDOR_ID DISTRIB_SEQ_NUM

LOT_ID




OPRID

RECEIVER_ID

RECV_LN_NBR

SERIAL_ID

TAG_NUMBER

VENDOR_LOT_ID


Before You Begin

Before PeopleSoft Purchasing can integrate with PeopleSoft Quality through receipt inspectionprocess, you’ll need to define the following information in PeopleSoft Quality:

• Quality Business Unit

• Traceability Set

• Attribute Groups

• Measurement Plan

• Control Plan

Quality Business Unit

You’ll need to define a Quality Business Unit that matches the Purchasing Receiving Business

Unit. Using the SetID associated with Purchasing Receiving Business Unit for the quality control

tables, you’ll also define configuration information in PeopleSoft Quality.

Traceability Sets and Attribute Groups in PeopleSoft Quality are associated with a SetID.

Measurement Plans and Control Plans are associated with a Quality Business Unit. In the case of

integrating with PeopleSoft Purchasing, the Purchasing Receiving Business Unit and the

PeopleSoft Quality Business Unit will have the same name.

For more information about establishing Quality Business Units, see “Setting Up PeopleSoft

Quality”. For more information about establishing Purchasing Receiving Business Units,

see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Purchasing PeopleBook, “Defining Your Operational Structure in

PeopleSoft Purchasing”.



Traceability Set

The Traceability Set determines how you’ll enter traceability data during a quality data entry

session. It also affects how data is analyzed in PeopleSoft Quality.

Upon installing PeopleSoft Quality, a Quality Function is provided to use for PeopleSoft

Purchasing integration. This Quality Function defines what hierarchy fields and trace fields that

you’ll be using in the data collection process. The trace fields must be grouped within a Trace

Set and attached to a Control Plan before they can be used in quality data collection.

When you define the Trace Set the system will display the trace fields defined in the Quality

Function. A comprehensive list of trace fields is provided, however, you have the option to

disable trace fields by marking one or more of them inactive. If you mark the trace field as

inactive, the trace field won’t be a data collection requirement in the PeopleSoft Quality data

collection pages.

Example of traceability set used for PeopleSoft Purchasing integration

If you want the operator to be able to change the trace set values supplied to PeopleSoft Quality

from PeopleSoft Purchasing, the Input Type should be Auto Dflt (auto default). If you don’t want

the operator to be able to change these fields in PeopleSoft Quality, the Input Type should be

Fixed. In addition, for a trace field value to pass from PeopleSoft Purchasing to PeopleSoftQuality, the Input Source should be External.

In addition, using the Seq (sequence) field, you can change the order of how trace fields should

be entered by the operator when they are performing data collection in PeopleSoft Quality.

When defining the Traceability Set, you’ll want to reference the predefined Quality Function

RECV_INSPECT.

For more information about Traceability Sets, see “Establishing Control Plans”.



Attribute Groups


an Attribute Group with as many attribute categories as you want. The attribute categories (defect


associated with a reading. These attribute codes can be applied to inspection samplings, as part of

the quality data collection and alarm review activities, and provide quantitative annotation against


selection criteria to your quality operators. Define the categories once, and then every futurereference to those categories will appear in the selection criteria list.

For more information about Attribute Groups, see “Establishing Control Plans”.

Measurement Plan

The Measurement Plan is where you define the different characteristics and the sampling and

charting criteria that you want to use during inspection. In the case of purchase receiving, you’ll

most likely define characteristic(s) with a Data Type of Defectives to track rejected or defective

material. The passing of data between PeopleSoft Quality and PeopleSoft Purchasing is reliant

upon one characteristic being of attribute type (defectives). Plus, set the subgroup size to zero if

you want the actual inspected subgroup size to be passed from PeopleSoft Purchasing to

PeopleSoft Quality. The quantity along with the inspection results will be stored in PeopleSoft

Quality.

When defining the Measurement Plan, you’ll want to reference the predefined Quality

Function RECV_INSPECT.

For more information about defining Measurement Plans, see “Maintaining Measurement

Plans”.

Control Plan


a specific product and process. In the case of purchase receiving, you’ll define Control Plans for

the Item and Vendor combinations that you want to record quality control data against.

In addition, when you create Control Plans, you specify how you want to enter data against the

Control Plan in PeopleSoft Quality, by specifying the data entry method (By Subgroup or By

Sample). This is an important piece of information because the system uses the data entry

method to determine which page will display for you to perform data entry for a session inPeopleSoft Quality.



When defining the Control Plan, you’ll want to reference the predefined Quality Function

RECV_INSPECT, the appropriate Traceability Set, and the appropriate Measurement Plan.

For more information about defining Control Plans, see “Establishing Control Plans”.

Overview of PeopleSoft Purchasing Integration With PeopleSoft Quality

Transferring to PeopleSoft Quality data entry from purchase receiving

To pass purchase receiving information to PeopleSoft Quality:

1. Define the inspection sampling percent for the items you are going to purchase and inspect.

Use the Purchasing Attributes - Purchasing Controls page to define the inspection sample

percent and to select the Inspection Required check box for the items you are going to

purchase and inspect.

For more information about the Purchasing Attributes - Purchasing Controls page, see

PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining

Items”.

2. Create a purchase order that requires inspection.

There are a few different ways to create purchase orders in Purchasing.



For more information about creating purchase orders, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Purchasing PeopleBook, “Understanding Purchase Orders”.

3. Receive the purchase order using purchasing Receiving.

For more information about receiving purchase orders, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Purchasing PeopleBook, “Understanding Receiving”.

4. Process the receipts with the batch Receiver Interface Push Application Engine process

(PO_RECVPUSH) which will insure the receipts are ready for receipt inspection.

This process depends on the Interface Receipt check box being selected. The Interface

Receipt check box can be selected when defining Procurement - Receiver Setup information

using the User Preferences component and will default to the Receiving component. If the

Interface Receipt checkbox was not selected when defining User Preferences it can be

selected on the Receipt Defaults page or using the Receipt Defaults page you can override the

selection that defaults from User Preferences.

For more information about the Interface Receipt check box, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Application Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Financials and Supply

Chain Management General Options” and PeopleSoft 8.00.01 PurchasingPeopleBook, “Receiving Shipments”. For more information about the Receiver

Interface Push Process, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Purchasing PeopleBook, “Receiving

Shipments”.

5. Display the received items that require inspection, using the Inspection component in

PeopleSoft Purchasing.

For more information about the Inspection component, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Purchasing PeopleBook, “Inspecting Received Items”.

6. Click the Transfer to Quality link on the Inspection - Receipt Lines page to initiate a quality

data entry session in PeopleSoft Quality, and transfer to either the Data Entry - Subgroup

Method page or the Data Entry - Sample Method page, depending on the data entry method

specified when the Quality Control Plan was created.

PeopleSoft Purchasing passes to PeopleSoft Quality the hierarchy and trace fields associated

with the Quality Function, and the inspection quantity is passed to PeopleSoft Quality as the

SGRP (subgroup) size.



For PeopleSoft Purchasing to pass the inspection quantity of an item to PeopleSoft

Quality you need to define the subgroup size for the item as zero on the measurement

plan and define the inspect sample percent for the item as well using the Item

Definition component. This will enable PeopleSoft Quality to accept the subgroup

size from PeopleSoft Purchasing.

Inspection quantity = ((receipt quantity for line items) X (sample inspection

percent for the item) – current inspection quantity)

For more information about the Inspection - Receipt Lines page, see PeopleSoft8.00.01 Purchasing PeopleBook, “Inspecting Received Items”.

7. Enter the quality control information against the quality data entry session, using the Data

Entry page in PeopleSoft Quality.

For more information about entering quality control information, see “Collecting

Quality Data”.

8. View the results and perform analysis on the data that you entered for the data entry session

in PeopleSoft Quality.

To view results, enter corrective actions or log probable causes, or view the data in graphical

format, use the Subgroup Method or Sample Method component in PeopleSoft Quality.

9. Click the OK button on one of the pages in the Subgroup Method or Sample Method

component to transfer back to the Inspection - Receipt Lines page in PeopleSoft Purchasing.

If a defect quantity was recorded in PeopleSoft Quality, the defect quantity will be passed

back to PeopleSoft Purchasing.

10. View the results of the inspection process.

Upon returning to receipt inspection if PeopleSoft Quality updated the SGRP Size it will be

retrieved and added to the current inspection quantity field value. If the inspection quantity is

large enough to satisfy the inspection sample percent for the item the inspection status will go

to Complete. Also, on return to receipt inspection from PeopleSoft Quality the PeopleSoft

Quality pass/fail count is moved to receipt inspections return quantity. If the pass/fail count

is greater than zero then the reject action is defaulted to Replacement and the reject reason

defaults to Failed Inspection. At save time, you have the option to automatically generate a

Return to Vendor for the returned quantity.

If a defect quantity is returned from PeopleSoft Quality, you can then initiate the Return to

Vendor (RTV) Setup. Click the RTV Setup link on the Inspection - Receipt Lines page.


1 3 - 1 0 I N T E G R A T I N G W I T H O T H E R P E O P L E S O F T A P P L I C A T I O N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

If no defect quantity is returned, you can continue with your purchase receiving activities.

Integrating With PeopleSoft Inventory

When material is returned on an RMA (return material authorization) in PeopleSoft Inventory,

you have the option to enter detailed quality information against the material received on the

RMA using PeopleSoft Quality that has been designated in PeopleSoft Quality as requiring

inspection. After the material is received on an RMA, a quality data entry session is created.

Sessions are created only for items that have had the quality configuration information set up for

them in PeopleSoft Quality. Otherwise, no session will be created.

When recording quality control information against the quality session, you’ll be able to assign

detailed defect information for the material being returned. Probable cause and corrective action

information can also be collected as part of an investigative or troubleshooting process. While in

PeopleSoft Quality you’ll be able to view the data collected against the session using controlcharts.

Reviewing the Predefined Quality Function

PeopleSoft provides a standard and predefined Quality Function to use for the integration

between PeopleSoft Inventory and PeopleSoft Quality. You’ll want to reference this Quality

Function when you define the Control Plans and traceability sets for the RMA process.

RMA Quality Function

Inventory RMA Quality Function


INV_ITEM_ID CONFIG_CODE

CONTAINER_ID

INV_LOT_ID


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N T E G R A T I N G W I T H O T H E R P E O P L E S O F T A P P L I C A T I O N S 1 3 - 1 1


QTY_INV_RECV

RECEIPT_DTTM

RECEIVER_ID

RETURN_FROM_BU

RETURN_FR_CUST_ID

RMA_ID

RMA_LN_NBR

SERIAL_ID

STORAGE_AREA


Before You Begin

Before PeopleSoft Inventory can integrate with PeopleSoft Quality through the RMA process,

you’ll need to define the following information in PeopleSoft Quality:





• Control Plan


You’ll need to define a Quality Business Unit that matches the Inventory Business Unit that you

reference as the Return To Business Unit on the individual RMA lines. Using the SetID

associated with this Return To Inventory Business Unit for the quality control tables, you’ll also

define configuration information in PeopleSoft Quality.



integrating with PeopleSoft Inventory, the Return To Inventory Business Unit and the PeopleSoft

Quality Business Unit will have the same name.




Quality”. For more information about establishing Inventory Business Units, see PeopleSoft

8.00.01 Inventory PeopleBook, “Defining Your Operational Structure in PeopleSoft

Inventory”.

Traceability Set

The Traceability Set determines how you’ll enter traceability data during a quality data entrysession. It also affects how data is analyzed in PeopleSoft Quality.

Upon installing PeopleSoft Quality, a Quality Function is provided to use for PeopleSoft

Inventory integration. This Quality Function defines what hierarchy fields and trace fields that

you’ll be using in the data collection process. The trace fields must be grouped within a Trace

Set and attached to a Control Plan before they can be used in quality data collection.

When you define the Trace Set the system will display the trace fields defined in the Quality

Function. A comprehensive list of trace fields is provided, however, you have the option to

disable trace fields by marking one or more of them inactive. If you mark the trace field as


collection pages.

Example of traceability set used for PeopleSoft Inventory integration


from PeopleSoft Inventory, the Input Type should be Auto Dflt (auto default). If you don’t want

the operator to be able to change these fields in PeopleSoft Quality, the Input Type should be

Fixed. In addition, for a trace field value to pass from PeopleSoft Inventory to PeopleSoftQuality, the Input Source can be External or left blank.





When defining the Traceability Set, you’ll want to reference the predefined Quality Function

RMA.


Attribute Groups


an Attribute Group with as many attribute categories as you want. The attribute categories

(defect components, probable cause components, and corrective actions) makes it easier to record

data associated with a reading. These attribute codes can be applied to inspection samplings, as

part of the quality data collection and alarm review activities, and provide quantitative annotation

against the process. Attribute Groups are assigned to Control Plans to present concise and

relevant selection criteria to your quality operators. Define the categories once, and then every

future reference to those categories will appear in the selection criteria list.


Measurement Plan

The Measurement Plan is where you define the different characteristics and the sampling and

charting criteria used during inspection. In the case of RMA receiving, you’ll most likely define

characteristic(s) with a Data Type of Defects to categorize the problems and/or reasons for

returned material. The passing of data between PeopleSoft Quality and PeopleSoft Inventory is

reliant upon one characteristic being of attribute type (defects or defectives). Plus, set the

subgroup size for the item/characteristic to zero so that sample size can be passed from

PeopleSoft Inventory to PeopleSoft Quality. This sample size along with inspection results willbe stored in PeopleSoft Quality.

When defining the Measurement Plan, you’ll want to reference the predefined Quality

Function RMA.


Plans”.



Control Plan


a specific product and process. In the case of the RMA process, you’ll define Control Plans foritems to be received on RMAs that you want to record quality control data against.


Control Plan in PeopleSoft Quality by specifying the data entry method (By Subgroup or By


method to determine which page will display for you to perform data entry for a session in

PeopleSoft Quality.

When defining the Control Plan, you’ll want to reference the predefined Quality Function

RMA, the appropriate Traceability Set, and the appropriate Measurement Plan.


Overview of PeopleSoft Inventory Integration With PeopleSoft Quality

Receiving items on the RMA

To pass RMA information to PeopleSoft Quality:

1. Create an RMA that requires recording of quality control information using Inventory.

For more information about creating RMAs, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 ApplicationFundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Managing Returned Material”.



2. Receive the RMA using the InterUnit + RMA Receiving component. Upon receipt of the

RMA (Receipt Type of RMA, receipt line status of Closed) a quality data entry session is

created for every putaway line on the RMA.

After you receive the items marked as Quality Item on the receipt line, the system passes the

hierarchy field information and all possible trace fields from the RMA to PeopleSoft Quality

so that the information can be associated with the quality data entry session.

From the Receipt Details page of the InterUnit and RMA Receiving component you can enter

serial ID, lot ID, and container information. When you click the Copy Lines to Putaway Page

button for each item, the entered lot and serial information automatically generates a putaway

detail line and transfers this receipt data to the appropriate lines.

A serial controlled item will generate a quality data entry session for each serial ID entered.

However, multiple receipt lines with lot numbers will only generate one quality data entry

session with only the lot number from the first row being transferred to PeopleSoft Quality.

If the Quality Item check box is not selected for the item on the RMA (the item has

not been associated to a control plan in PeopleSoft Quality), and the receipt line status

was not set to Closed while saving from the receipt header, a pending quality data

entry session won’t be created for that item.

For more information about the Interunit + RMA Receiving component, see

PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Inventory PeopleBook, “Receiving and Putting Away Stock”.

3. Navigate to the Data Entry by Control Plan page, enter the item associated with the quality

data entry session that was created by receiving the RMA, and click the Pending Data Entry

button.

You can complete the session immediately or you can complete the session at some time in

the future within the period (in days) determined by the Session Life Days assigned to this

quality function.

If you can’t remember the item associated with the RMA, you have the capability to

view all pending sessions, by leaving the hierarchy fields blank on the Data Entry by

Control Plan page and clicking the Pending Data Entry button.

For more information about the Data Entry by Control Plan page, see “Collecting

Quality Data”.

4. Select the quality data entry session that was created by receiving the RMA on the Pending

Sessions page, and click the Data Entry Via Recall button.



The sessions created by the RMA process will display as the Receiver ID Number, plus the

Line Number, plus the Sequence Number.

5. Enter the quality control information against the quality data entry session, using either the

Data Entry - Subgroup Method page or the Data Entry - Sample Method page.

When you click the Data Entry Via Recall button on the Pending Sessions page, either the

Data Entry - Subgroup Method page or the Data Entry - Sample Method page displays. The

page that displays depends on the Data Entry Method (By Subgroup or By Sample) you

specified when creating the Control Plan in PeopleSoft Quality for the RMA process.


Quality Data”.

6. View results and perform analysis on the data you enter for the quality data entry session.



Integrating With PeopleSoft Production Management

When recording operation completions and scrap information against a production ID or schedule

for any Production Type (Production, Rework, or Teardown) using PeopleSoft Production

Management, you can immediately initiate a quality data entry session in PeopleSoft Quality.

Known information (hierarchy fields and trace fields) are passed from the production ID or

schedule to PeopleSoft Quality when you click the Quality Data Entry button on the Record

Completions/Scrap page, which automatically creates a quality data entry session.

Upon transferring to PeopleSoft Quality, the operator will enter sample information for the

manufactured item being completed. The sampling requirements are defined in the Quality

Control Plan. While in PeopleSoft Quality, the operator can view alarms generated against the

Control Plan, enter probable causes and log corrective actions for the alarms, and view the

entered data in graphical format.

After the operator is finished entering data against the quality data entry session, the operator cantransfer back to Production Management to continue to work on the production ID or schedule.

If for some reason not all the inspection data can be entered at this point, the quality data

entry session can be recalled and completed (directly from PeopleSoft Quality) at any time.

Reviewing Predefined Quality Functions

PeopleSoft provides three predefined Quality Functions (COMPLETIONS, COMPL NO MC

(completions no machine code), and COMPL NO OP (completions with no operation sequence))



to use for the integration between PeopleSoft Production Management and PeopleSoft Quality.

You’ll need to reference the appropriate Quality Function when you define the Control Plans for

the record completions and scrap process for a manufactured item.

When to Use the Different Production Management Quality Functions

Let’s start from the beginning. When you define an item that is going to be manufactured on the

shop floor, you will create a routing and bill of material for that item. The bill of material that

you define for the item can contain one output or multiple outputs. When you define the routing,

you determine each operation required to manufacture the item and whether a machine or labor or

both are required at each operation on the routing.

Then you determine how the item will be manufactured. Will you be using a non-repetitive or

repetitive production process? If you use a non-repetitive process, you’ll create production ID’s

for the items. If you use a repetitive process, you’ll create production schedules. In either case,

you need to determine at what operation(s) you’ll record completions for the item when it is beingmanufactured on the shop floor.

COMPL NO OP Quality Function

In your environment, if you don’t create routings for your manufactured items, you’ll associate

your completions process Quality Control Plans with the COMPL NO OP Quality Function. In

this case, when you record completions against the production ID or schedule for the

manufactured items, you won’t enter an Operation Sequence because you don’t have a routing.

Also, if you define manufactured items that have routings, but you don’t record an Operation

Sequence, when recording completions against a production ID or schedule for the manufactured

items, you’ll also associate your completions process Quality Control Plans with the COMPL NO

OP Quality Function.

COMPL NO MC Quality Function

In your environment, if you define manufactured items with routings, where the operations where

you record completions are associated with a work center that doesn’t contain machines, you’ll

associate your completions process Quality Control Plans with the COMPL NO MC Quality

Function. In this case, when recording completions against a production ID or schedule for the

manufactured items, you’ll enter an Operation Sequence, and that operation will be associated

with a work center that doesn’t contain a machine.

COMPLETIONS Quality Function

In your environment, if you define manufactured items with routings, where the operations where

you record completions are associated with a work center that contains machines, you’ll associate

your completions process Quality Control Plans with the COMPLETIONS Quality Function. In

this case, when recording completions against a production ID or schedule for the manufactured

items, you’ll enter an Operation Sequence, and that operation will be associated with a work

center that contains one or more machines.



COMPLETIONS Quality Function

Production Management Completions Quality Function


COMPL_OP_SEQ BOM_CODE

INV_ITEM_ID DT_TIMESTAMP

MACHINE_CODE INV_LOT_ID

PRDN_AREA_CODE OPRID

PRODUCTION_TYPE PRODUCTION_ID

WORK_CENTER_CODE RTG_CODE

COMPL NO MC Quality Function

Production Management COMPL NO MC (completions no machine code) Quality Function




COMPL_OP_SEQ BOM_CODE

INV_ITEM_ID DT_TIMESTAMP

PRDN_AREA_CODE INV_LOT_ID

PRODUCTION_TYPE OPRID

WORK_CENTER_CODE PRODUCTION_ID

RTG_CODE

COMPL NO OP Quality Function

Production Management COMPL NO OP (completions no operation) Quality Function


INV_ITEM_ID BOM_CODE

PRDN_AREA_CODE DT_TIMESTAMP

PRODUCTION_TYPE INV_LOT_ID

OPRID

PRODUCTION_ID

RTG_CODE




Before You Begin

Before PeopleSoft Production can integrate with PeopleSoft Quality through the record

completions and scrap process you’ll need to define the following information in PeopleSoftQuality:





• Control Plan


You’ll need to define a Quality Business Unit that matches the Manufacturing Business Unit

where you are recording completions and scrap information for your processes. Using the SetID

associated with this Manufacturing Business Unit for the quality control tables, you’ll also define

configuration information in PeopleSoft Quality.



integrating with PeopleSoft Production Management the Manufacturing Business Unit and the

PeopleSoft Quality Business Unit will have the same name.


Quality”. For more information about establishing Manufacturing Business Units, see

PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Setting Up Your Manufacturing System PeopleBook, “Defining Your

Business Unit Structure”.

Traceability Set

The Traceability Set determines how you’ll enter traceability data during a quality data entrysession. It also affects how data is analyzed in PeopleSoft Quality.

Upon installing PeopleSoft Quality, three Quality Functions are provided to use for PeopleSoft

Production Management integration. These Quality Functions define what hierarchy fields and

trace fields that you’ll be using in the data collection process. The trace fields must be grouped

within a Trace Set and attached to a Control Plan before they can be used in quality data

collection.

When you define the Trace Set the system will display the trace fields defined for a particular

Quality Function. A comprehensive list of trace fields is provided, however, you have the option

to disable trace fields by marking one or more of them inactive. If you mark the trace field as


collection pages.



Example of traceability set used for PeopleSoft Production Management integration


from PeopleSoft Production Management, the Input Type should be Auto Dflt (auto default). Ifyou don’t want the operator to be able to change these fields in PeopleSoft Quality, the Input

Type should be Fixed. In addition, for a trace field value to pass from PeopleSoft Inventory to

PeopleSoft Quality, the Input Source can be External or left blank.



When defining the Traceability Set, you’ll want to reference one of the predefined Quality

Functions: COMPLETIONS, COMPL NO MC, or COMPL NO OP.


Attribute Groups


an Attribute Group with as many attribute categories as you want. The attribute categories (defect


associated with a reading. These attribute codes can be applied to inspection samplings, as part of

the quality data collection and alarm review activities, and provide quantitative annotation against


selection criteria to your quality operators. Define the categories once, and then every future

reference to those categories will appear in the selection criteria list.




Measurement Plan

The Measurement Plan is where you define the different characteristics, and sampling and

charting criteria used during inspection. These measurement plans are likely to include variablesand attribute characteristics in order to capture real manufacturing quality results.

Note. When defining the Measurement Plan you’ll want to reference one of the predefined

Quality Functions: COMPLETIONS, COMPL NO MC, or COMPL NO OP.


Plans”.

Control Plan


a specific product and process. In the case of the manufacturing completions process, depending

on the Quality Function you use, you’ll define Control Plans for items that have different

completions criteria, when the item is being manufactured on the shop floor.

When defining the Control Plans for the completions process, you need to know how you record

completions for the items you manufacture. Do your items have routings? Do you specify an

operation, when recording completions against a production ID or schedule for those items? Plus,

if you specify an operation while recording completions, is that operation related to a work center

that contains one or more machines, or does it not contain any machines? Finally, do you

manufacture your item using a repetitive or non-repetitive process? You’ll need to answer all of

these questions before you define your Quality Control Plans in your environment.

If the hierarchy fields in the control plan do not match the hierarchy fields associated with the

production ID or schedule you are completing you’ll receive a message when trying to transfer

from the Record Completions/Scrap page in PeopleSoft Production Management to PeopleSoft

Quality. The message states that “Quality was not set up for this. Please review the Quality

Control Plans”. Some planning will need to be put into all the production combinations of item

IDs, work centers, machine codes, and production areas when creating control plans for your

environment.


Control Plan in PeopleSoft Quality by specifying the data entry method (By Subgroup or By


method to determine which page will display for you to perform data entry against for a quality

data entry session in PeopleSoft Quality.

When defining the Control Plan, you’ll want to reference one of the predefined Quality

Functions (COMPLETIONS, COMPL NO MC, or COMPL NO OP), the appropriate

Traceability Set, and the appropriate Measurement Plan.




Overview of PeopleSoft Production Management Integration WithPeopleSoft Quality

You can pass information to PeopleSoft Quality and record quality control information against a

quality data entry session, using either a production ID or Production schedule for a manufactured

item in PeopleSoft Production Management. In this section, we’ll give you all the details

necessary to understand how Production Management integrates with PeopleSoft Quality.

Passing Information to PeopleSoft Quality Using a Production ID

Recording completions on a production ID with multiple outputs

To pass production information to PeopleSoft Quality using a production ID with a single outputor multiple outputs:

1. Create a production ID.

A production ID can be created for a manufactured item that will produce a single output or

multiple outputs. Plus, whether you have an item that will produce a single output or

multiple outputs, the item can have one of the following criteria:

• An item that has no routing and doesn’t require an Operation Sequence to be entered

when recording completions while being manufactured.

• An item that has a routing and doesn’t require an Operation Sequence to be entered when



recording completions while being manufactured.

• An item that has a routing and does require an Operation Sequence to be entered when

recording completions. The operation you enter when recording completions is

associated with a work center that doesn’t contain any machines.



associated with a work center that does contain one or more machines.

For more information about creating production IDs, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Production Management PeopleBook, “Maintaining Production Orders and

Production Schedules”.

2. Retrieve and display the different production ID’s using the Record Completions/Scrap -

Production Selection page

Display one of the previously created production IDs from step 2.

For more information about the Production Selection page, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Production Management PeopleBook, “Completing Operations and Recording

Scrap”.

3. Enter completions and scrap data for one of the different structured production IDs, using the

Record Completions/Scrap page.

For more information about entering completions and scrap information, see

PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production Management PeopleBook, “Completing Operations

and Recording Scrap”.

4. Click the Quality Data Entry button on the Record Completions/Scrap page to initiate a

data entry session, and to transfer to either the Data Entry - Subgroup Method page or the

Data Entry - Sample Method page in PeopleSoft Quality, depending on the data entry method

you specified when creating the Quality Control Plan in PeopleSoft Quality.

If you have a production ID related to a manufacturing item that produces a single output, the

Quality Data Entry button will be next to the Previous Operations group box.

If you have a production ID related to a manufacturing item that produces multiple outputs,

the Quality Data Entry button will be in the Output Details scroll area of the page. In this

case, you are able to record quality control information and create a quality data entry session

for any of the different outputs that are produced from the production ID.




Quality Data”.

5. View results and perform analysis on the data you enter for the quality data entry session.




component to transfer back to the Completions/Scrap page in PeopleSoft Production

Management.

Passing Information to PeopleSoft Quality Using Production Schedules

Recording completions on a production schedule

To pass production information to PeopleSoft Quality using a production schedule with a singleoutput or multiple outputs:

1. Create a production schedule.

A production schedule can be created for an item that will produce a single output or multiple

outputs. Plus, whether you have an item that will produce a single output or multiple outputs,

the item can have one of the following criteria:



• An item that has no routing and doesn’t require an Operation Sequence to be entered

when recording completions while being manufactured.

• An item that has a routing and doesn’t require an Operation Sequence to be entered when

recording completions while being manufactured.



associated with a work center that doesn’t contain any machines.



associated with a work center that does contain one or more machines.

For more information about creating production schedules, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Production Management PeopleBook, “Maintaining Production Orders and

Production Schedules”.

2. Retrieve and display the different production schedules, using the Record Completions/Scrap

- Production Selection page.

Display one of the previously created production schedules from step 2.

For more information about the Production Selection page, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01Production Management PeopleBook, “Completing Operations and Recording

Scrap”.

3. Enter completions and scrap data for the different structured production schedules, using the

Record Completions/Scrap page.

For more information about entering completions and scrap information, see

PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Production Management PeopleBook, “Completing Operations

and Recording Scrap”.

4. Click the Quality Data Entry button on the Completions and Scrap page to initiate a data

entry session, and to transfer to either the Data Entry - Subgroup Method page or the Data

Entry - Sample Method page in PeopleSoft Quality, depending on the data entry method you

specified when creating the Quality Control Plan.

5. Enter the quality control information against the quality data entry session.

If you have a production schedule related to a manufacturing item that produces a single

output, the Quality Data Entry button will be next to the Previous Operation group box.

If you have a production schedule related to a manufacturing item that produces multiple

outputs, the Quality Data Entry button will be in the Output Details scroll area of the page. In



this case, you are able to record quality control information and create a quality data entry

session for any of the different outputs that are produced from the production ID.


Quality Data”.

6. View results and perform analysis on the data entered for the session.




component to transfer back to the Completions/Scrap page in PeopleSoft Production

Management.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N T E G R A T I N G W I T H T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S 1 4 - 1

C H A P T E R 1 4

Integrating With Third-Party Applications

Many times, companies implementing manufacturing or distribution systems use automated

collection devices or systems to assist in quality inspection and control. Through the use of the

PeopleSoft Application Messaging technology, you can easily pass the quality information

collected from those devices to PeopleSoft Quality.

Before You Begin

Before a third-party application can integrate with PeopleSoft Quality through the use of the

PeopleSoft Application Messaging technology (Quality Enterprise Integration Points (EIPs))

you’ll need to verify PeopleSoft Quality is installed, and you’ll define several pieces of

configuration information in PeopleSoft Quality.

Verifying Installation of PeopleSoft Quality

You’ll first need to verify that PeopleSoft Quality is installed on your system. Use the Products

page to verify that the PeopleSoft Quality application is installed.

For more information about the Products page, see PeopleSoft 8.00.01 Application

Fundamentals for FSCM PeopleBook, “Defining Financials and Supply Chain Management

General Options”.


1 4 - 2 I N T E G R A T I N G W I T H T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Verifying the PeopleSoft Quality product installation

The Quality check box will be selected if PeopleSoft Quality is installed on your system.

Defining PeopleSoft Quality Configuration Information

There are several pieces of information that need to be defined in PeopleSoft Quality before athird-party application can integrate with PeopleSoft Quality. This information includes:

• Quality Function




• Control Plan

Quality Function


on subsequent PeopleSoft Quality pages and provides parenting for related process hierarchies

and their associated streams. When defining a Quality Function, you determine the trace and

hierarchy fields that are common to that quality application or functional area; that is, what

information is pertinent for collecting, storing, and reporting quality data. When recording

inspection data against a sampling, hierarchy fields determine what data you are entering

sampling results against, and trace fields are used to enter traceability information such as the Lot

Number associated with that sampling. Hierarchy fields become a stream component and are

used by PeopleSoft Quality to maintain control limits.




Traceability Set

The Traceability Set determines how you’ll enter trace fields when entering data against a Control

Plan.

When you define the Trace Set, the system references the Quality Function to predefine the trace

fields that are available for use. A comprehensive list of trace fields is provided, but you have the

option whether to use particular trace fields or not. If you mark the trace field inactive, you won’t

be required to enter it during data entry.


Attribute Groups


an Attribute Group with as many attribute categories as you want. The attribute categories

(defect components, probable cause components, and corrective actions) makes it easier to record

data associated with a reading. These attribute codes can be applied to inspection samplings as

part of the quality data collection and alarm review activities and can provide quantitative

annotation against the process. Attribute Groups are assigned to Control Plans to present concise

and relevant selection criteria to your quality operators. Define the categories once, and thenevery future reference to those categories will appear in the selection criteria list.


Measurement Plan

The Measurement Plan is where you define the characteristics and the sampling and charting

criteria that you want to use during inspection.


Plans”.

Control Plan


a specific product and process.

In addition, when you create a Control Plan, you specify how you want to enter data against the

Control Plan in PeopleSoft Quality, By Subgroup or By Sample. This is an important piece of

information because the system uses the data entry method to determine which page will display

for you to perform data entry in PeopleSoft Quality.




If you don’t have PeopleSoft Quality installed, you won’t see the buttons that will transfer

you to Quality data entry from PeopleSoft Purchasing and Production Management.

Overview of PeopleSoft Quality Integration with Third-PartyApplications

PeopleSoft Quality integrates with third-party applications through the use of the PeopleSoft

Application Messaging Technology. PeopleSoft has predefined a couple of application messages

(we’ll refer to them as Quality EIPs (Enterprise Integration Points)) for purposes of integratingthird-party applications with PeopleSoft Quality.

System View of PeopleSoft Quality Integration with Third-Party Systems

TuxedoDatabase

Server DatabaseSQL

PS Application Messaging API

Application Messaging Based

Application

User's EIP Application Program

Analyzer

Service

PS

Application

Server

XML Message

PS

Application

Message

Queue

Tuxedo Messages

Reviewing the overall structure of PeopleSoft Quality integration with third-party applications

Component/Layer Purpose

Application Messaging API PeopleTools supplied Application Messaging

API.

EIP Application The program/layer that makes Application

Messaging API calls to submit data to the

PeopleSoft Quality defined application

message queue for analysis.

Analyzer Service The NT Service based application that

provides PeopleSoft Analytical Services to

any application capable of posting a message

to the appropriate PeopleSoft Application

Messaging message queue.



Component/Layer Purpose

Application Message Queue PeopleSoft defined application message

queue.

Application Server PeopleTools supplied application server.

For more information about PeopleSoft Application Messaging Technology, see

PeopleTools 8.12 Application Messaging PeopleBook, “Introduction to Application

Messaging”.

Understanding PeopleSoft Quality EIPs

Analyzer Mover Database

QUALITY_DATA_SUBMIT

Message

QUALITY_DATA_UPDATEMessage

Reviewing PeopleSoft Quality EIP messages and subscription processes

PeopleSoft Quality provides two different application messages (Quality EIPs (Enterprise

Integration Points)) that give you the ability to pass quality control information from an existing

third-party system into PeopleSoft Quality. These two messages are Quality_Data_Submit and

Quality_Data_Update.

Using your own specific data collection (application) program, you will post messages in the

format required by the Quality_Data_Submit message into the Quality_Data_Submit message

queue using application messaging; part of the PeopleSoft Application Message Technology.

The Subscription PeopleCode (Analyzer) then analyzes the quality data in the message and

generates a second Quality_Data_Update message with the results. Then the subscription

PeopleCode (Mover) processes the Quality_Data_Update message and places the analyzed

quality data into the PeopleSoft database.

You also have the option to mark the Quality_Data_Submit transaction messages with the Move

Only option. In this mode, the Analyzer doesn’t process the record sets, and the data is

immediately moved into the PeopleSoft database. This mode gives you the ability to generate

data entry sessions that can then be called up by operators for review and/or completion and,finally, submission to the Quality Server at a later time.

Subgroups that have encountered simple processing errors such as, an acceptance limit violation

will be marked as an error and will be held in a queue so as not to adversely affect control

calculations. To correct these simple problems you’ll use the data editor.

If the system really can’t process the message it will stop the message queue and all message

processing for that channel will cease until the situation is corrected.

These types of errors should be found and corrected during integration and should not be part of a

production system.



To meet demanding performance requirements the PeopleSoft Quality EIP service utilizes a

stream cache. The result of this is that any changes to the definition of a stream such as, changing

specification limits or manually assigning control limits used by the EIP requires the following

actions:

1. Stop submitting new messages to the system.

2. Wait until all messages in the Quality_Data_Submit and Quality_Data_Update queues have

all been processed (all messages are marked Done or the queue is empty).

3. Shut down the Quality EIP service.

4. Restart the service to begin reloading the stream cache with the changes.

It is important to mention that, just as you should never have two or more operators

simultaneously entering data to the same process stream, you should never have two or more

EIP processes simultaneously submitting data to the same process stream. This almost

always will result in invalid analysis and alarming.

For more information about the technical details of the Quality EIPs: Quality_Data_Submit

and Quality_Data_Update, see the PeopleSoft Enterprise Integration Point (EIP) Catalog.

Understanding Quality EIP Message Data Rules

Before you begin to configure and define your Quality EIPs it’s a good idea to understand the

data rules that are associated with the EIPs. There are four basic rules that you should be aware

of. The rules are:

• Every sample requires its own traceability entry.

• Variable and defects data types have a maximum sample size.

• Subgroup completion only applies to variables data type.

• Order and entry of subgroup values is important.

Every Sample Requires Its Own Traceability Entry

Except for defectives type characteristics (y defective out of n), every individual sample in the

measurement plan requires its own traceability entry even if all the entries are identical (the lot

number is the same for all samples in the session). This means that the number of rows of

traceability has to equal the maximum subgroup sample size of all the characteristics in the

measurement plan that defines the session. Defectives type characteristics always count as one

sample for traceability purposes regardless of the subgroup size.

In EIP terms, take the maximum of your QS_NVALUES for all the subgroups in the session andthat’s the number of rows of traceability information that is required.



Examples of Measurement Plans and What Would Be Required for the EIP

Characteristic Data Type Subgroup Size Comments

Length Variables 4

Width Variables 5 Largest subgroup

size.

Bad Units Defectives 1000 Only counts as one

row.

Bad Electrical Defectives 0 Only counts as one

row.

Defects Defects 4

Defectives data types always count as one row regardless of subgroup size.

In this example, you would need to specify 5 rows of traceability for this session dataset since the

largest subgroup size is five.

Characteristic Data Type Subgroup Size Comments

Length Variables 4

Width Variables 5 Largest subgroup

size.

Bad Units Defectives 1000 Only counts as one

row.

Bad Electrical Defectives 0 Only counts as one

row.

Defects Defects 0 Variable subgroup

size.

Defectives data types always count as one row regardless of subgroup size.

The same rule applies in this example. The number of rows of traceability for the session dataset

is still equal to the largest subgroup size but since the Defects subgroup size is variable our

dataset will reflect that. Now the number of required traceability rows is 5 except for those

datasets where the defects sample size is greater than 5 in which case the number of traceabilityrows equals the Defects sample size.

Variable and Defects Data Types Have a Maximum Sample Size

Variable and Defects have a maximum sample size of 20.

Subgroup Completion Only Applies to Variables Data Type

A subgroup completion only applies to Variables type characteristics with accept incompleteoption set to Average.



Order and Entry of Subgroup Values is Important

Subgroup values must start at the beginning and be contiguous (no holes in the values). Readings

must start at 1 and continue until there are no others. You can’t specify the second and thirdvalues without specifying the first value.

This is a valid example:

<QS_NVALUES>3</QS_NVALUES>

<QS_VALUEREADING_1>1</QS_VALUEREADING_1>



<QS_VALUEREADING_4></QS_VALUEREADING_4>

.

.

.


These are two invalid examples:





.

.

.


You can’t specify values 2 and 3 without specifying 1.







.

.

.


You can’t skip a value. In this example you can’t skip 2.

This is a valid averaging point example: is valid, however QS_VALUEREADING_3 will be

interpreted as 0 which will yield a different average:





.

.

.


You should be very careful when it comes to averaging values associated with your subgroup. In

this example, if you were calculating the average for a point calculation it would be (1+2+0) / 3 =1. QS_VALUEREADING_3 is interpreted as zero in this particular case.

If you changed the QS_NVALUES to 2 and the subgroup size was still 3, with accept incomplete

option on, the average would be (1+2)/2 = 1.5 so the point calculation would be (1+2+1.5)/3 =

1.5. As you can see, a totally different outcome can be calculated depending on how you enteryour data for the EIP.

Now that you understand the data rules for the EIPs we have also included some practical

working scenarios for you to use to get started when defining the Quality EIPs for your

configuration.

For more information about the practical working scenarios, see PeopleSoft Quality EIP

Working Data Scenarios.


1 4 - 1 0 I N T E G R A T I N G W I T H T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

PeopleSoft Quality EIP Working Data Scenarios

How you define your PeopleSoft Quality measurement plans determines how you should define

and structure the PeopleSoft Quality EIPs. The simpler your measurement plans the easier to

define subgroups using EIP’s. The more complex your measurement plans the more difficult to

define your subgroups using EIPs.

Keep EIP measurement plans simple, complex measurement plans are inherently more

difficult to integrate to, test, and validate. Measurement plans that may be appropriate for

manual data entry might be cumbersome or impractical in an EIP configuration and visa-

versa.

Due to the huge amount of space raw XML consumes in a document we’ll use the following

table/diagram combination to describe the structure of the scenarios.

Sample TraceabilityItem 1

TraceabilityItem 2

Characteristic1

Characteristic2

1

2

…

QS_EIP_SESS_GRP:

QS_EIP_SESSION_GRP,QS_EIP_DATASOURCE

QS_EIP_SESSION:

QS_EIP_SESSN_ID

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB:

STREAM_ID, SESSN_SGRP_SIZE, QS_NVALUES, QS_VALUEREADING_1, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE:

SAMPLE, LOT_ID, SERIAL_ID, ...

QS_EIP_DEFECTS:

SAMPLE, DFCT_SEQ, DFCT_L1_DEFN, DFCT_L2_DEFN, DFCT_L3_DEFN, DFCT_CNT

Example of diagram used to depict EIP data scenario

Scenario #1

A simple measurement plan with 2 variables type characteristics.

Sample Lot Number Serial Number Length Width

1 X02-00 SN-01 2.31 4.31

2 X02-00 SN-02 2.29 4.32

3 X02-00 SN-03 2.30 4.29

QS_EIP_SESS_GRP: 1,EIP-AE

QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 172, 0, 3, 2.31, 2.29, 2.30

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 112, 0, 3, 4.31, 4.32, 4.29

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

Diagram of scenario #1


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N T E G R A T I N G W I T H T H I R D - P A R T Y A P P L I C A T I O N S 1 4 - 1 1

Scenario #2

A measurement plan that contains variables type characteristics with one characteristic that will

be derived. In this scenario the Area characteristic will be derived from the Length and Width

characteristics.

Sample Lot Number SerialNumber

Length Width Area +

1 X02-00 SN-01 2.31 4.31

2 X02-00 SN-02 2.29 4.32

3 X02-00 SN-03 2.30 4.29


QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 172, 0, 3, 2.31, 2.29, 2.30

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 112, 0, 3, 4.31, 4.32, 4.29

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 115, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0


You will still have to submit a QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB record for the derived Area

characteristic. This is because the analyzer knows nothing about measurement plans, it only

knows and understands process streams. To get the analyzer to calculate the Areas for this

session we must ask it explicitly to do so.

Scenario # 3

A measurement plan that contains variables type characteristics with non-uniform subgroup

sample sizes.


1 X02-00 SN-01 2.31 4.31

2 X02-00 SN-02 2.29 4.32

3 X02-00 SN-03 2.30 4.29

4 X02-00 SN-04 4.30

5 X02-00 SN-05 4.31




QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 172, 0, 3, 2.31, 2.29, 2.30

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 112, 0, 5, 4.31, 4.32, 4.29, 4.30, 4.31

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 4, X02-00, SN-04, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 5, X02-00, SN-05, ...


Scenario #4

A measurement plan with variables type characteristics with readings for one of the

characteristics being incomplete. In this scenario, Length readings are incomplete.


1 X02-00 SN-01 2.31 4.31

2 X02-00 SN-02 2.29 4.32

3 X02-00 SN-03 2.30 4.29

4 X02-00 SN-04 - 4.30

5 X02-00 SN-05 - 4.31


QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 172, 0, 3, 2.31, 2.29, 2.30

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 112, 0, 5, 4.31, 4.32, 4.29, 4.30, 4.31

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 4, X02-00, SN-04, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 5, X02-00, SN-05, ...


Scenario #5

A simple defectives type sample where the subgroup size is fixed.

Sample Lot Number Bad Units

1 X02-00 6.00


QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 172, 0, 1, 6.00

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, ...




Scenario #6

A defectives type sample where the subgroup sample size is variable.

Sample Lot Number Defective UnitsSubgroup Size

Defective UnitsBad Units

1 X02-00 1000 2.00


QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 172, 1000, 1, 2.00

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, ...


Scenario #7

A measurement plan with defectives categorized where the subgroup sample size is fixed at 5. A

sample might have one or more defects that qualify as making the item defective. In this

scenario, there are 5 items, two of which are defective. In addition to noting the number of

defective units you can also state the reason why they are defective.

The data source makes the determination as to whether or not the collection of defects

constitutes a defective item.

Sample Lot Number SerialNumber

DefectivesDefect

DefectivesBad Units

1 X02-00 SN-01 3 Scratches, Top, Left

1 Broken, Contact Pin,

P4

2

2 X02-00 SN-02 No Defects



5 X02-00 SN-05 1 Paint Smear, Bottom,

Left




QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 211, 0, 1, 2, 0, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 4, X02-00, SN-04, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 5, X02-00, SN-05, ...

QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 1,1, Scratches, Top, Left, 3

QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 1,2, Broken, contact pin, p4, 1

QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 2,1, , , , 0



QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 5,1, Paint smear, Bottom, Left, 1

Diagram of scenario # 7

Scenario #8

A measurement plan with defects data type characteristics where the subgroup sample size is

fixed or variable.

Sample Lot Number Serial Number Physical Defects *


1 Blemishes, Bottom,

Right

2 X02-00 SN-02 1 Finish, Top, Right


1 Scratches, Top, Right

2 Scratches, Bottom,

Right


5 X02-00 SN-05 1 Paint smear, Bottom,

Left

* Physical Defects is a user defined characteristic name and not a predefined type.




QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 192, 0, 0, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 4, X02-00, SN-04, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 5, X02-00, SN-05, ...


QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 1,2, Blemishes, Bottom, Right, 1

QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 2,1, Finish, Top, Right, 1


QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 3,2, Scratches, Top, Right, 1

QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 3,3, Scratches, Bottom, Right, 2




Scenario #9

A measurement plan with 2 defects data type characteristics where the subgroup sample size is

uniform.

Sample LotNumber

SerialNumber

Physical Defects * Electrical Defects *



Right

1 Inoperative connector, pin,

3

2 X02-00 SN-02 1 Finish, Top, Right No Defects


1 Scratches, Top,

Right

2 Scratches, Bottom,

Right

No Defects

4 X02-00 SN-04 No Defects 1 Inoperative chip,

741OpAmp, 2

5 X02-00 SN-05 1 Paint Smear,

Bottom, Left

I Incorrect jumper, Jmp 2,

Pins 2-3

* Physical Defects and Electrical Defects are user defined characteristic names and not predefined types.




QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 192, 0, 0, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 4, X02-00, SN-04, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 5, X02-00, SN-05, ...









QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 193, 0, 0, ...

QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 1,1, Inoperative connector, pin, 3, 1



QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 4,1, Inoperative chip, 714OpAmp, 2, 1

QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 5,1, Incorrect jumper, Jmp 2, Pins 2-3, 1


Scenario #10

A measurement plan with variables and defects data type characteristics with a uniform subgroupsample size of 5.

Sample LotNumber

SerialNumber

Physical Defects * Length Width


1 Blemishes, Bottom, Right

2.31 4.31

2 X02-00 SN-02 1 Finish, Top, Right 2.29 4.32



2 Scratches, Bottom, Right

2.30 4.29

4 X02-00 SN-04 No Defects 2.30 4.30

5 X02-00 SN-05 1 Paint smear, Bottom, Left 2.31 4.31





QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 192, 0, 0, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 4, X02-00, SN-04, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 5, X02-00, SN-05, ...









QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 172, 0, 5, 2.31, 2.29, 2.30, 2.30, 2.31

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 112, 0, 5, 4.31, 4.32, 4.29, 4.30, 4.31


Scenario #11

A measurement plan with variables and defects data type characteristics and a non-uniform

subgroup sample size.

Sample LotNumber

SerialNumber

Physical Defects * Length Width


1 Blemishes, Bottom, Right

2.31 4.31

2 X02-00 SN-02 1 Finish, Top, Right 2.29 4.32



2 Scratches, Bottom, Right

4.29

4 X02-00 SN-04 4.30

5 X02-00 SN-05 4.31





QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 192, 0, 0, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 4, X02-00, SN-04, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 5, X02-00, SN-05, ...







QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 172, 0, 2, 2.31, 2.29

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 112, 0, 5, 4.31, 4.32, 4.29, 4.30, 4.31


Scenario #12

A measurement plan with two defects and one defectives data type characteristics where the

subgroup sample size is uniform.

Sample LotNumber

SerialNumber

Physical Defects Electrical Defects BadUnits



Right

1 Inoperative connector,

pin, 3

3

2 X02-00 SN-02 No Defects No Defects

3 X02-00 SN-03 No Defects No Defects

4 X02-00 SN-04 No Defects 1 Inoperative chip,

741OpAmp, 2

5 X02-00 SN-05 1 Paint smear, Bottom,

Left

1 Incorrect jumper, Jmp

2, Pins 2-3

* Physical Defects and Electrical Defects are user defined characteristic names and not predefined types.




QS_EIP_SESSION: 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 192, 0, 0, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 1, X02-00, SN-01, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 2, X02-00, SN-02, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 3, X02-00, SN-03, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 4, X02-00, SN-04, ...

QS_EIP_TRACE: 5, X02-00, SN-05, ...







QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 193, 0, 0, ...

QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 1,1, Inoperative connector, pin, 3, 1



QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 4,1, Inoperative chip, 714OpAmp, 2, 1

QS_EIP_DEFECTS: 5,1, Incorrect jumper, Jmp 2, Pins 2-3, 1

QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB: 211, 0, 1, 3, 0, ...


Troubleshooting

To assist you in troubleshooting the processing of the Quality EIPs (Enterprise Integration

Points), PeopleSoft has provided you with some useful SQL statements and an example of a an

Application Engine program that will read an ASCII text file and post a Quality EIP message.

The stream IDs must be changed to reflect the configuration in your system. The stream ID

sections that need to be changed are in italics.

Useful SQL

Validation SQL Statements

select

PS_QS_STREAM8.STREAM_ID,

PS_QS_STREAM8.QS_APP_CONTEXT

FROM PS_QS_STREAM8,PS_QS_STREAM_ROOT,PS_QS_APP_DEF

WHERE PS_QS_STREAM8.STREAM_ID >= 164 AND PS_QS_STREAM8.STREAM_ID <= 164

and PS_QS_STREAM8.STREAM_ROOT_ID = PS_QS_STREAM_ROOT.STREAM_ROOT_ID

and PS_QS_APP_DEF.QS_APP_CONTEXT = PS_QS_STREAM_ROOT.QS_APP_CONTEXT

ORDER BY STREAM_ID



select

PS_QS_STREAM8.STREAM_ID

FROM PS_QS_STREAM8,PS_QS_STREAM_ROOT

WHERE PS_QS_STREAM8.STREAM_ID >= 164 AND PS_QS_STREAM8.STREAM_ID <= 164

and PS_QS_STREAM8.STREAM_ROOT_ID = PS_QS_STREAM_ROOT.STREAM_ROOT_ID

ORDER BY STREAM_ID

select

STREAM_ID,

CLIM_STS_CD,

CLIM_ID,

STR_SGRP_CNT,

STR_SGRP_SEQ,

CUR_SGRP_SIZE,

CUR_SPEC_VIO_CNT,

CUR_PLOT_VALUE1,

CUR_PLOT_VALUE2,

RUN_MOMENT,

TSWIN_BUFFER1,

TSWIN_BUFFER2

FROM PS_QS_STREAM8

WHERE STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164

select

BUSINESS_UNIT,

STREAM_ID,

CLIM_ID,

CLIM_STS_CD,

CLIM_UPPER_X,



CLIM_UX_IND,

CLIM_MEAN_X,

CLIM_MX_IND,

CLIM_LOWER_X,

CLIM_LX_IND,

CLIM_UPPER_MRANGE,

CLIM_UMRANGE_IND,

CLIM_MEAN_RANGE,

CLIM_MRANGE_IND,

CLIM_LOWER_MRANGE,

CLIM_LMRANGE_IND,

CLIM_CRE_DTTM,

CLIM_CRE_BY

from PS_QS_CNTL_LIM_HIS


ORDER BY CLIM_ID

select

BUSINESS_UNIT,

SESSN_ID,

STREAM_ID,

SESSN_STREAM_SEQ,

SESSN_SGRP_SEQ,

SESSN_STRM_STS,

SESSN_SGRP_SIZE,

MFDS_DATA_TYPE_CD,

SESSN_ANLZ_READY,

CLIM_ID,

SPEC_ID,

SRSLT_P1,



SRSLT_P1_IND,

SRSLT_P2,

SRSLT_P2_IND,

CLIM_STS_CD,

SPEC_VIO_SW,

QS_ANALYZER_STATUS,

QS_ALARM_CNT,

QS_NVALUES,

QS_VALUEREADING_1,

QS_VALUEREADING_2,

QS_VALUEREADING_3,

QS_VALUEREADING_4,

QS_VALUEREADING_5,

DISPATCH_FLAG,

SESSN_SUBMIT_DTTM,

SRSLT_CRE_DTTM,

QS_ACTION_CNT,

QS_CAUSE_CNT,

QS_COMM_CNT,

OPERATOR,

QS_UAID

from PS_QS_SUBGROUP


ORDER BY SESSN_ID

select

BUSINESS_UNIT,

SESSN_ID,

STREAM_ID,

SAMPLE,



TEST_SEQ,

TEST_ID

from PS_QS_SESSN_TEST8


ORDER BY SESSN_ID

Generic SQL Statements

select

STREAM_ID,

CLIM_STS_CD,

CLIM_ID,

STR_SGRP_CNT,

STR_SGRP_SEQ,

CUR_SGRP_SIZE,

CUR_SPEC_VIO_CNT,

CUR_PLOT_VALUE1,

CUR_PLOT_VALUE2,

RUN_MOMENT,

TSWIN_BUFFER1,

TSWIN_BUFFER2

FROM PS_QS_STREAM8


select * from PS_QS_CNTL_LIM_HIS WHERE STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164

select PS_QS_SESSN_HDR8.* from PS_QS_SUBGROUP,PS_QS_SESSN_HDR8 WHERE STREAM_ID

>= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164 AND PS_QS_SESSN_HDR8.SESSN_ID =

PS_QS_SUBGROUP.SESSN_ID

select PS_QS_SESSN_TRACE8.* from PS_QS_SUBGROUP,PS_QS_SESSN_TRACE8 WHERE

STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164 AND PS_QS_SESSN_TRACE8.SESSN_ID =

PS_QS_SUBGROUP.SESSN_ID

select * from PS_QS_SUBGROUP WHERE STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164



select * from PS_QS_SESSN_DFCT8 WHERE STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164

select * from PS_QS_SESSN_TEST8 WHERE STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164

SQL to Reset Database Tables

update PS_QS_STREAM8 set

CLIM_STS_CD = "NONE",

CLIM_ID = "NONE",

STR_SGRP_CNT = 0,

STR_SGRP_SEQ = 0,

CUR_SGRP_SIZE = 0,

CUR_SPEC_VIO_CNT = 0,

CUR_PLOT_VALUE1 = 0,

CUR_PLOT_VALUE2 = 0,

RUN_MOMENT = 0,

TSWIN_BUFFER1 = "",

TSWIN_BUFFER2 = ""


delete from PS_QS_SESSN_HDR8 WHERE SESSN_ID in (select SESSN_ID from

PS_QS_SUBGROUP where STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164)

delete from PS_QS_SESSN_TRACE8 WHERE SESSN_ID in (select SESSN_ID from

PS_QS_SUBGROUP where STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164)

delete from PS_QS_SESSN_DFCT8 WHERE STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164

delete from PS_QS_CNTL_LIM_HIS WHERE STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164

delete from PS_QS_SESSN_TEST8 WHERE STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164

delete from PS_QS_SUBGROUP WHERE STREAM_ID >= 164 AND STREAM_ID <= 164

SQL to Retrieve Stream Information

select

STREAM_ID,



MFDS_ID,

CLIM_STS_CD,

STR_SGRP_CNT,

STR_SGRP_SEQ,

CLIM_ID,

CUR_SGRP_SIZE,

CUR_SPEC_VIO_CNT,

CUR_PLOT_VALUE1,

CUR_PLOT_VALUE2,

RUN_MOMENT,

TSWIN_BUFFER1,

TSWIN_BUFFER2,

SPEC_ID,

SPEC_LSL,

SPEC_LSL_IND,

SPEC_USL,

SPEC_USL_IND,

SPEC_FACTOR1,

SPEC_FACTOR1_IND,

SPEC_FACTOR2,

SPEC_FACTOR2_IND,

MFDS_COLLECT_SW,

MFDS_NAME,

MFDS_SGRP_SIZE,

MFDS_DATA_TYPE_CD,

MFDS_LAL,

MFDS_LAL_IND,

MFDS_UAL,

MFDS_UAL_IND,

MFDS_INC_CD,



MFDS_FORMULA,

CHART_ID,

PROC_ID,

CLIM_UPPER_X,

CLIM_UX_IND,

CLIM_MEAN_X,

CLIM_MX_IND,

CLIM_LOWER_X,

CLIM_LX_IND,

CLIM_UPPER_MRANGE,

CLIM_UMRANGE_IND,

CLIM_MEAN_RANGE,

CLIM_MRANGE_IND,

CLIM_LOWER_MRANGE,

CLIM_LMRANGE_IND

FROM PS_QS_API_STR83_VW


ORDER BY STREAM_ID

Application Engine Program

This is an example of an Application Engine program that will read an ASCII text file and post a

Quality EIP message. Plus, a sample input file to use with this Application Engine program is

included.

Application Engine Program

/* Read source file and publish messages into EIP message queue. */

Local File &TestDataIn, &LogFileOut;

Local string &LineIn, &LogMsg, &FilenameIn, &LogFilename;

Local number &iRowSet, &WriteStatus, &nLinesIn, &nSessionGroups, &nSessions;

Local number &nSubgroups, &nDefects, &nTraceSets, &iValue;



Local number &iSession, &iSubgroup, &iDefect, &iTrace;

/* record keys */

Local number &SessionGroupId, &SessionId, &StreamId;

Local string &DataSource;

/* record fields */

Local string &Fieldname, &Fieldvalue;

Local Message &Message;

Local Rowset &SessionGroupRs, &SessionRs, &SubgroupRs, &DefectRs, &TraceRs;

Local Row &SessionGroupRow, &SessionRow, &SubgroupRow, &DefectRow, &TraceRow;

Local Record &SessionGroupRec, &SessionRec, &SubgroupRec, &DefectRec, &TraceRec;

Local datetime &SessionCreateDttm;

/* end of declarations *****************************************************/

&nLinesIn = 0;

&nSessionGroups = 0;

&nSessions = 0;

&nSubgroups = 0;

&nDefects = 0;

&nTraceSets = 0;

&FilenameIn = "EIPTestDataIn.txt";

&LogFilename = "EIPTestDataIn.log";



&LogFileOut = GetFile(&LogFilename, "W", "A", %FilePath_Absolute);

If (&LogFileOut.IsOpen = False) Then

Return;

End-If;

&LogFileOut.WriteLine("Processing started " | %Datetime | ", [" | &FilenameIn |

"]");

&LogFileOut.WriteLine("");

&TestDataIn = GetFile(&FilenameIn, "E", "A", %FilePath_Absolute);

If (&TestDataIn.IsOpen = False) Then

&LogMsg = "Unable to open input file [" | &FilenameIn | "]";

&LogFileOut.WriteLine(&LogMsg);

&LogFileOut.Close();

Return;

End-If;

&Message = CreateMessage(Message.QUALITY_DATA_SUBMIT);

If (&Message = Null) Then

&LogMsg = "Unable to create message";



Return;

End-If;

If (&Message.IsActive = False) Then

&LogMsg = "Message is inactive";





Return;

End-If;

&SessionGroupRs = &Message.GetRowset();

While &TestDataIn.ReadLine(&LineIn)

&nLinesIn = &nLinesIn + 1;

&LogMsg = "Processing line " | &nLinesIn | ", [" | &LineIn | "]";


/* We need to do publish messages here... */

/* identify the record type */

If (Substring(&LineIn, 1, 13) = "session group") Then

/* check to make sure that we don't overrun our output message buffer */

If ((&Message.Size + 100000) > %MaxMessageSize) Then

&Message.Publish();

&Message = CreateMessage(Message.QUALITY_DATA_SUBMIT);

If (&Message = Null) Then

&LogFileOut.WriteLine("Unable to create message");


Return;

End-If;

&SessionGroupRs = &Message.GetRowset();



End-If;

&nSessionGroups = &nSessionGroups + 1;

&SessionGroupId = Value(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 15, 4)));

&DataSource = Substring(&LineIn, 22, 12);

If (&nSessionGroups > 1) Then

&SessionGroupRs.InsertRow(&nSessionGroups - 1);

End-If;

&SessionGroupRow = &SessionGroupRs.GetRow(&nSessionGroups);

&SessionGroupRec = &SessionGroupRow.GetRecord(Record.QS_EIP_SESS_GRP);

/* set keys */

&SessionGroupRec.QS_EIP_SESSION_GRP.Value = &SessionGroupId;

&SessionGroupRec.QS_EIP_DATASOURCE.Value = &DataSource;

&iSession = 0;

Else

If (Substring(&LineIn, 1, 9) = " session") Then

/* stop the last timer and start a new one */

&nSessions = &nSessions + 1;

&iSession = &iSession + 1;

&SessionRs = &SessionGroupRow.GetRowset(1);

/* original -> &SessionId = Value(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 14, 5))); */

/* using statement below to autonumber */

&SessionId = &iSession;



If (&iSession > 1) Then

&SessionRs.InsertRow(&iSession - 1);

End-If;

&SessionRow = &SessionRs.GetRow(&iSession);

&SessionRec = &SessionRow.GetRecord(Record.QS_EIP_SESSION);

/* set keys */

&SessionRec.QS_EIP_SESSION_GRP.Value = &SessionGroupId;

&SessionRec.QS_EIP_DATASOURCE.Value = &DataSource;

&SessionRec.QS_EIP_SESSN_ID.Value = &SessionId;

/* set fields */

&SessionRec.BUSINESS_UNIT.Value = LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 22, 10));

&SessionCreateDttm = %Datetime;

&SessionRec.SESSN_CRE_DTTM.Value = &SessionCreateDttm;

/* Set session status to saved = 1, move = 2 */

&SessionRec.QS_SESSION_STATUS.Value = 1;

/* set traceset to locked = 2, not locked = 1 */

&SessionRec.QS_EIP_TRACELOCK.Value = 2;

&iSubgroup = 0;

&iTrace = 0;



Else

If (Substring(&LineIn, 1, 12) = " subgroup") Then

&nSubgroups = &nSubgroups + 1;

&iSubgroup = &iSubgroup + 1;

For &iRowSet = 1 To &SessionRow.ChildCount

If (&SessionRow.GetRowset(&iRowSet).DBRecordName =

"QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB") Then

Break;

End-If;

End-For;

&SubgroupRs = &SessionRow.GetRowset(&iRowSet);

&StreamId = Value(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 14, 5)));

If (&iSubgroup > 1) Then

&SubgroupRs.InsertRow(&iSubgroup - 1);

End-If;

&SubgroupRow = &SubgroupRs.GetRow(&iSubgroup);

&SubgroupRec = &SubgroupRow.GetRecord(Record.QS_EIP_SGRP_SUB);

/* set keys */

&SubgroupRec.QS_EIP_SESSION_GRP.Value = &SessionGroupId;

&SubgroupRec.QS_EIP_DATASOURCE.Value = &DataSource;

&SubgroupRec.QS_EIP_SESSN_ID.Value = &SessionId;

&SubgroupRec.STREAM_ID.Value = &StreamId;

/* set fields */



/* set subgroup status to submitted = 2, saved = 1 */

&SubgroupRec.QS_SUBGROUP_STATUS.Value = 2;

&SubgroupRec.SESSN_CRE_DTTM.Value = &SessionCreateDttm;

&SubgroupRec.SESSN_SUBMIT_DTTM.Value = %Datetime;

&SubgroupRec.OPERATOR.Value = %OperatorId;

&SubgroupRec.SESSN_SGRP_SIZE.Value = Value(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn,

20, 8)));

&SubgroupRec.QS_NVALUES.Value = Value(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 29,

8)));

For &iValue = 1 To &SubgroupRec.QS_NVALUES.Value

&Fieldname = "FIELD.QS_VALUEREADING_" | &iValue;

&SubgroupRec.GetField(@&Fieldname).Value =

Value(RTrim(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 38 + ((&iValue - 1) * 9), 8))));

End-For;

&iDefect = 0;

Else

If (Substring(&LineIn, 1, 12) = " defect") Then

&nDefects = &nDefects + 1;

&iDefect = &iDefect + 1;

For &iRowSet = 1 To &SubgroupRow.ChildCount

If (&SubgroupRow.GetRowset(&iRowSet).DBRecordName =

"QS_EIP_DEFECTS") Then

Break;

End-If;

End-For;



&DefectRs = &SubgroupRow.GetRowset(&iRowSet);

If (&iDefect > 1) Then

&DefectRs.InsertRow(&iDefect - 1);

End-If;

&DefectRow = &DefectRs.GetRow(&iDefect);

&DefectRec = &DefectRow.GetRecord(Record.QS_EIP_DEFECTS);

/* set keys */

&DefectRec.QS_EIP_SESSION_GRP.Value = &SessionGroupId;

&DefectRec.QS_EIP_DATASOURCE.Value = &DataSource;

&DefectRec.QS_EIP_SESSN_ID.Value = &SessionId;

&DefectRec.STREAM_ID.Value = &StreamId;

&DefectRec.SAMPLE.Value = Value(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 16,

5)));

&DefectRec.DFCT_SEQ.Value = Value(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 22,

3)));

/* set fields */

&DefectRec.DFCT_L1_DEFN.Value = RTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 28,

10));


10));


10));

&DefectRec.DFCT_CNT.Value = Value(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 61,

5)));

Else

If (Substring(&LineIn, 1, 12) = " traceset") Then

&nTraceSets = &nTraceSets + 1;



&iTrace = &iTrace + 1;

For &iRowSet = 1 To &SessionRow.ChildCount

If (&SessionRow.GetRowset(&iRowSet).DBRecordName =

"QS_EIP_TRACE") Then

Break;

End-If;

End-For;

&TraceRs = &SessionRow.GetRowset(&iRowSet);

If (&iTrace > 1) Then

&TraceRs.InsertRow(&iTrace - 1);

End-If;

&TraceRow = &TraceRs.GetRow(&iTrace);

&TraceRec = &TraceRow.GetRecord(Record.QS_EIP_TRACE);

/* set keys */

&TraceRec.QS_EIP_SESSION_GRP.Value = &SessionGroupId;

&TraceRec.QS_EIP_DATASOURCE.Value = &DataSource;

&TraceRec.QS_EIP_SESSN_ID.Value = &SessionId;

&TraceRec.SAMPLE.Value = &iTrace;

/* set operator and date/time stamp trace field defaults */

&TraceRec.OPERATOR.Value = %OperatorId;

&TraceRec.STAMP_DTTM.Value = %Datetime;

Else



/* set trace fields */

If (Substring(&LineIn, 1, 11) = " field") Then

&Fieldname = "FIELD." | RTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 16, 14));

&Fieldvalue = RTrim(LTrim(Substring(&LineIn, 30, 20)));

&TraceRec.GetField(@&Fieldname).Value = &Fieldvalue;

Else

/* ignore comment lines */

If ( Not ((Substring(&LineIn, 1, 2) = "//") Or

(&LineIn = ""))) Then

&LogMsg = "Invalid line [" | &LineIn | "]";


End-If;

End-If;

End-If;

End-If;

End-If;

End-If;

End-If;

End-While;


&LogMsg = "Message size = " | &Message.Size | ", maximum message size = " |

%MaxMessageSize;


&Message.Publish();



/* cleanup */

&TestDataIn.Close();


&LogMsg = &nSessions | " sessions, " | &nSubgroups | " subgroups, " | &nDefects

| " defects, " | &nTraceSets | " tracesets.";


&LogMsg = "Processing completed " | %Datetime | ", " | &nLinesIn | " lines

processed, closing log file.";



Application Engine Sample Input Test File

This test file is presented only as an example. For this test file to be useful, you must change

the information in this example to reflect the information in your configuration.

// Test set

//

session group 2 EIP-AE

session 1 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 13 11 12

subgroup 141 3 3 24 23 23

subgroup 142 3 3 34 33 33

session 2 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 12 12 13

subgroup 141 3 3 22 22 22

subgroup 142 3 3 32 32 32

session 3 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 11 12 13



subgroup 141 3 3 21 22 23

subgroup 142 3 3 31 32 33

session 4 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 13 11 13

subgroup 141 3 3 13 11 13

subgroup 142 3 3 13 11 13

session 5 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 12 11 13

subgroup 141 3 3 12 11 13

subgroup 142 3 3 12 11 13

session 6 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 14 11 13

subgroup 141 3 3 14 11 13

subgroup 142 3 3 14 11 13

session 7 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 12 12 12

subgroup 141 3 3 22 22 22

subgroup 142 3 3 22 22 22

session 8 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 13 12 13

subgroup 141 3 3 13 12 13

subgroup 142 3 3 13 12 13

session 9 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 14 13 11

subgroup 141 3 3 14 13 11

subgroup 142 3 3 14 13 11

session 10 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 14 13 12

subgroup 141 3 3 13 11 11

subgroup 142 3 3 13 11 11



session 11 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 13 11 11

subgroup 141 3 3 12 11 12

subgroup 142 3 3 12 11 12

session 12 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 12 11 12

subgroup 141 3 3 13 11 13

subgroup 142 3 3 13 11 13

session 13 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 13 11 13

subgroup 141 3 3 12 12 13

subgroup 142 3 3 12 12 13

session 14 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 12 12 13

subgroup 141 3 3 13 12 11

subgroup 142 3 3 13 12 11

session 15 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 13 12 11

subgroup 141 3 3 11 13 13

subgroup 142 3 3 11 13 13

session 16 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 11 13 13

subgroup 141 3 3 22 22 22

subgroup 142 3 3 22 22 22

session 17 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 12 12 12

subgroup 141 3 3 13 12 11

subgroup 142 3 3 13 12 11

session 18 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 13 12 11



subgroup 141 3 3 14 11 12

subgroup 142 3 3 11 12 14

session 19 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 14 11 12

subgroup 141 3 3 11 12 14

subgroup 142 3 3 12 12 14

session 20 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 11 12 14

subgroup 141 3 3 12 12 14

subgroup 142 3 3 14 11 12

session 21 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 12 12 14

subgroup 141 3 3 13 11 11

subgroup 142 3 3 13 11 11

session 22 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 13 11 11

subgroup 141 3 3 12 11 12

subgroup 142 3 3 12 11 12

session 23 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 12 11 12

subgroup 141 3 3 12 11 11

subgroup 142 3 3 12 11 11

session 24 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 11 12 11

subgroup 141 3 3 11 14 13

subgroup 142 3 3 11 14 13

session 25 M04

subgroup 140 3 3 11 14 13

subgroup 141 3 3 13 11 12

subgroup 142 3 3 13 11 12

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S T A T I S T I C A L E Q U A T I O N S A N D M E T H O D S U S E D F O R Q U A L I T Y 1 5 - 1

C H A P T E R 1 5

Statistical Equations and Methods Usedfor Quality

The PeopleSoft Quality software is a robust online Quality Information System for your entire

organization. It includes versatile data collection and monitoring functions that are integrated

with comprehensive statistical analysis tools. These tools are a unique combination of standard

industrial statistics and methods that have been incorporated within PeopleSoft Quality toenhance productivity and encourage exploratory analysis.

Text references are provided at the end of this document. As appropriate, statistics and

descriptions have been marked with the number that correlates to the references. Table values

can be found with the associated text reference for those statistics that use table values (Z, t and

x 2).

Statistical Matrix

The Statistical Matrix is a spreadsheet view of various statistics. The statistics and view can be

customized to include any statistic PeopleSoft Quality calculates, in various formats. The

following describes all of the available statistics for continuous and discrete data.

Some statistics may be altered through the use of Non-Normal distribution assessment

techniques. PeopleSoft Quality incorporates two methods to achieve an appropriate distributionfit. Both methods use the Pearson family of distributions.

The first method provides a test of Normality, using the skewness and kurtosis of the distribution.

If the distribution is found to be normal at a 95 percent confidence, then the data is evaluated

based on the normal assumption. If the distribution isn’t found to be normal at a 95 percent

confidence, then the data is evaluated using the Best-Fit Pearson family of curves. This is the

recommended method if you are unsure of the distribution type.

The second method directly uses the Best-Fit Pearson family of curves. The routines determine

the best-fit and adjust the statistics appropriately.

The following section contains the equations used to calculate various statistics in PeopleSoft

Quality.


1 5 - 2 S T A T I S T I C A L E Q U A T I O N S A N D M E T H O D S U S E D F O R Q U A L I T Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Basic Statistics

The set of basic statistics include measures of central tendencies, measures of dispersion, and the

other descriptive statistics.

Equation Statistic Sometimes Denotedas:

Mean - arithmetic mean

(average) of a sample.See Reference 8.

Standard Deviation - root-mean-

square of a sample.See Reference 8.

Observations - total number of

values in a sample.

Summation - the total of all the

values in a sample.

Minimum - the smallest value in

the sample.

Maximum - the largest value in

the sample.

Range - the largest value minus

the smallest value in the sample.

Variance - the square of the

standard deviationSee Reference 6.

Standard Error of the Mean -

the standard deviation of the

mean. It is a measure of the

extent to which a sample mean

can be expected to vary.

See Reference 8.

Coefficient of Variation - the

standard deviation of a sample

expressed as a percentage of the

mean. It is a measure of relative

dispersion.

See Reference 12.

Lower Z-score - the number of

standard deviations the lower

specification limit (LSL) is from

the mean.

Upper Z-score - the number of

standard deviations the upper

specification limit (USL) is from

the mean.



Equation Statistic Sometimes Denotedas:

Lwr 3 sigma = deviate at

probability 0.00135

Lower 3 sigma - represents three

standard deviations from left of

the mean.

Upr 3 sigma = deviate at

probability 0.99865

Upper 3 sigma - represents three

standard deviations from right of

the mean.

For more information, see #(8), #(6), and #(12) in References.

Quartiles

PeopleSoft Quality calculates the twenty-fifth, fiftieth (also referred to as the median), and

seventy-fifth quartiles. The quartiles can be displayed as values and are used to graph the Box &Whisker plots.

To compute the quartiles, the data is first arranged in ascending order and ranked accordingly (1

to n). Then each quartile is multiplied by n+1. If the result is an integer, then the quartile is set to

the value of the calculated rank.

Equation Statistic

Median - is the center or middle of a sample.

It is the value above which there are as many

values as there are below it. It is also the 50

percentile of the sample (Quartile 50

percent).

See Reference 2.

Quartile 25% - is the point which separates

the lower 25 percent of the values from the

upper 75 percent.

See Reference 2.

Quartile 75% - is the point which separates

the upper 25 percent of the values from the

lower 75 percent.



Equation Statistic

where:

p is the percentile,

f is the fractional portion of the computed

rank,

I is the integer portion of the computed rank.

In order to resolve calculated values that are

not integer (for example, the percentage lies

between two values), the value is interpolated

by calculating the weighted average between

the two ranks.

See Reference 2.

For more information, see #(2) in References.

Skewness & Kurtosis

The calculations for Skewness (SK) and Kurtosis (KU) use the following examples:

Equation Statistic

Skewness - a measure of

the degree of asymmetry in

a sample.

Kurtosis - a measure of the

degree of peakedness in a

sample.



Process Capability

Process Capability indices are industrial-accepted calculations for comparing the process output

to the defined specification limits. For a normal distribution, the process output is defined as ± 3standard deviations from the mean. For non-normal distributions, PeopleSoft Quality determines

the Best-Fit Pearson distribution and calculates equivalent 99.73 percent deviates (at 0.00135 and

0.99865).

Equation Statistic

Process Potential - is the ratio of the

process distribution to the specification

limits. It is the potential capability if

the process was perfectly centered. This

equation requires both upper and lower

specifications.

Process Capability - is the actual

process capability. These equations

account for shifts in the process center.

The Cpk is the lower of the Cpl or Cpu

values; worst case capability. In the

case of a unilateral specification, the

Cpk will be set to the calculated Cpl or

Cpu value.

Lower Process Capability - is the

processes ability to perform at the lower

specification limit (LSL). This equation

requires a lower specifications limit.

Upper Process Capability - is the

processes ability to perform at the upper

specification limit (USL). This equation

requires an upper specifications limit.

where:

90% Confident C pk - is an adjusted

Cpk based on a 90 percent confidence.

The result is heavily affected by the

sample size. The larger the sample size,

the closer the computed value will be to

the actual Cpk.

See Reference 5.

Capability Ratio - is the percentage

that the process distribution consumes

of the specification. This equation

requires both upper and lower

specifications.



Equation Statistic

where:

is the area under the curve from the mean to

the lower specification limit.

Percent Below Specification - is the

estimated area under the curve to the

left of the lower specification limit.

This equation requires a lower

specifications limit.

where:

is the area under the curve from the mean to

the lower specification limit.

Percent Above Specification - is the

estimated area under the curve to the

right of the upper specification limit.

This equation requires an upper

specifications limit.

Total Percent out of Specification - is

the total estimated area under the curve

outside of the specification limits.


Normality Test

PeopleSoft Quality offers a test for normality based on the Skewness and Kurtosis of the

distribution. The test compares the skewness and kurtosis to the expected sampling variation of

these statistics at a 95 percent confidence interval. The computations made are as follows:

Equation Statistic

Skewness 95% confidence bound.

Kurtosis 95% confidence bound.




Pearson Best-Fit

PeopleSoft Quality uses Pearson criteria to determine the Best-Fit distribution for the sample. A

K value, which is computed using the equation shown, is used to classify the distribution as oneof the following types.

( )( )( ) ( )( )K =

SK KU + 6

KU - 3 SK KU - 3 SK

2

2 24 4 12 2+

Pearson Frequency Curves

Type Description Criteria

1 Beta K 0<

2 Uniform K = 0, KU = 0, SK 0<

3 Gamma ( )2KU = 3 SK2

4 Non Central t K > 0 and K < 1

5 Inverse Gamma K = 1

6 Inverse Beta K > 1

7 Student t K = 0, SK = 0, KU > 0

8 Normal K = 0, SK = 0, KU = 0

10 Exponential ( )22

KU = 3 SK 2.25 > SK > 1.80,


Attribute Statistics

The following statistics only apply to discrete data types, that is, count data. This type of data is

typically associated with defect tallies.

Equation Statistic SometimesDenoted as:

Sum of Defects - is the total count of all

the defects in a sample.

Defects Per Unit - is the average number

of defects per unit.



Equation Statistic SometimesDenoted as:

Defects Per Hundred - is the number of

defects per 100 units.

Defects Per Thousand - is the number of

defects per 1000 units.

Defects Per Million - is the number of

defects per 1 million units.

Distribution Analysis

The Quality Server enables you to view and interact with histograms, box plots, Pearson

distribution types, and basic statistics.

PeopleSoft Quality provides two different single sample statistical confidence tests in the Quality

Server. The first is a t-test used to test the mean of the current population versus a Target mean

supplied by you. The second is a chi-square test used to test the standard deviation of the current

population versus a Target standard deviation that you supply.

Histogram Statistics

Equation Statistic

where:

Number of Cells - is a calculated value that

determines the number of bars to be

displayed on a histogram.

Cell Width - is the size of each cell interval.

Cell Lower Limit - is the lower class limit

for each cell (i) within the histogram. The

first cell (i=1) must be calculated, and then

subsequent cell limits can be calculated,

using the second equation.

Cell Upper Limit - is the upper class limit

for each cell within the histogram.

Cell Tally - is the total number of individual

values in a cell.

Cell Percentage - is the percentage of

individual values in a cell.



Test Statistics

PeopleSoft Quality provides two different single sample statistical confidence tests: Mean Test

and Stdev Test (standard deviation test).

Equation Statistic

Mean Test - is a t-test used to test the mean

of the current sample versus a Target mean

supplied by you. Once the t value is

calculated, it is compared to the t statistic

(Table Value), which is determined by the

confidence level selected for a one-sided test.

The test assumes that the samples are

normally distributed.

See Reference 8.

Stdev Test - is a chi-square test used to test

the standard deviation of the current sample

versus a Target standard deviation supplied

by you. Once the chi-square value is

calculated, it is compared to the chi-square

statistic (Table Value), which is determined

by the confidence level selected for the test.

The standard deviation test has a limitation of

df = 100.

See Reference 6.

For more information, see #(8) and #(6) in References.

Control Charts

The control chart is designed to display standard and non-standard SPC control charts. New

control charts and control test procedures can be created in PeopleSoft Quality.

The following are control limit calculations for the default control charts provided with the

installation of PeopleSoft Quality. These charts are the industrial standard charts that are

documented in most PeopleSoft Quality references. The charts are categorized by type; that is,

variable and attribute.


1 5 - 1 0 S T A T I S T I C A L E Q U A T I O N S A N D M E T H O D S U S E D F O R Q U A L I T Y P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Variable Control Charts

Equation Statistic

where:

X /R Chart - the average and range chart is

the most commonly used chart in SPC. Each

point (k) on the X chart consists of an

average ( )X of individual ( )X measurements

within a subgroup of a constant sample size

(n). The R chart represents the range (R),

which is the maximum, individual

measurement in the subgroup, minus the

minimum.

where:

X /s Chart - the average and standard

deviation chart is a variation of

the X / R chart, typically used with subgroup

sizes of greater than seven. Each point ( )k on

the X chart consists of an average ( )X of

individual ( )X measurements within a

subgroup of a constant sample size ( )n . The

s chart represents the standard

deviation ( )s within the subgroup of

individual measurement.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S T A T I S T I C A L E Q U A T I O N S A N D M E T H O D S U S E D F O R Q U A L I T Y 1 5 - 1 1

Equation Statistic

where:

X/MR Chart - the individual and moving

range chart is typically used when

measurements can’t easily be formed into

subgroups. Measurements may be

expensive, destructive or time periods

between samples may be excessive. Each

point ( )k on the X chart consists of an

individual ( )X measurement. The MR chart

represents the difference between the

previous point and the current point (absolute

value).

Attribute Control Charts

Equation Statistic

where:

p Chart - the percent defective chart is used

to display the proportion of nonconforming

items in a group of items being inspected.

The plotted point (p) is the fraction defective

found for each sample (n). The sample size

(n) need not be constant; however, sample

sizes that vary more than 25 percent may

provide misleading results (as documented in

most SPC references).



Equation Statistic

where:

np Chart - the np chart is used to display the

nonconforming items in a group of items

being inspected. It is similar to the p chart,

but requires a constant sample size (n). The

plotted point (np) is the number of defectives

found for each sample (n).

where:

c Chart - the c chart is used to display the

number of defects found in a group of items

being inspected. It requires a constant

sample size (n). The plotted point (c) is the

number of defects found for each sample (n).

where:

u Chart - the u chart is used to display the

number of defects found in a unit. Each unit

is equal to the sample size, which may vary

from group to group. It is similar to the c

chart, but doesn’t require a constant sample

size (n). The plotted point (u) is the number

of defects per unit (sometimes denoted as

DPU).

Pareto Charts

The Pareto enables you to view a bar graph of various discrete attributes, such as defects, causes,

actions, or control test violations. The Pareto graphic is displayed with horizontal bars in a

descending order. The bars are accompanied with a cumulative percent curve (Lorenz Curve)and bar statistics to the right of the graphic.

Various options for removing bars are available to you. This can be accomplished by simply

clicking on the bars and redrawing or by using the filtering options provided under the Modify

graph menu.


P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L S T A T I S T I C A L E Q U A T I O N S A N D M E T H O D S U S E D F O R Q U A L I T Y 1 5 - 1 3

Equation Statistic

Bar Value - each bar value is equal to the

tally found for each attribute category.

Bar Percent - is the percent (%) each bar

represents for all displayed attribute

categories.

Cumulative Percent - is a line that

represents the cumulative Bar Percentages.

Bar Graphs

The Bar Graph is designed to enable you to view any statistic PeopleSoft Quality calculates by

subset in a horizontal bar layout. This provides you with the ability to quickly compare statistics

in a graphical format. Modify options enables you to view the bars in subset, descending orascending order.

Bar Value - the chosen subset and statistic determine each bar length. The mean is the default

value for each bar.

For information about applicable statistics and equations, see Statistical Matrix.

Box Plots

The Box Plot enables you to display Box & Whisker plots, Capability graphs or Min/Max plots

for multi-subset comparisons. A list of statistics is provided at the bottom of each graphic, or

individual subsets can be chosen for more detail. Various options enable you to modify the

display. These options include display of statistics, overlay ± 3 sigma region and scaling the

graphic.

For information about the statistics used to plot or display, see Statistical Matrix.

Line Graphs

The Line Graph is designed to enable you to view up to six subsets of data (by individual values)

on one display. Interaction with the graph includes point selection.



References

1. “Data Set Descriptions for Statistical Validation,” by Greg L. Rippstein, August 1996.

2. SAS Institute’s JMP version 2.0 “Reference Guide” for Macintosh.

3. Ford’s “Continuing Process Control and Process Capability Improvement” manual dated

December 1987.

4. SQC Release 7 for DOS software from VSA, Inc.

5. “Introduction to Statistical Quality Control,” by Douglas C. Montgomery, Second edition

1991.

6. “Quality Control and Industrial Statistics,” by Acheson J. Duncan, Fifth edition, 1986.

7. “SPC Implementation Guide,” by Greg L. Rippstein, First edition, 1994.

8. “Statistics: A First Course,” by John E. Freund and Richard M. Smith, Fourth edition, 1986.

9. “Measurement systems Analysis,” (seminar guide), by Greg L. Rippstein, 1995.

10. “How to Use Regression Analysis in Quality Control,” by Douglas C. Crocker, Volume 9,

ASQC 198.

11. “RS/1 Statistical Tools Reference Guide,” BBN Software Products, 1992.

12. “Statistics: A Fresh Approach,” by Sanders, Murph, and Eng, Second edition, 1980.

13. “Non Normal Data Analysis,” by Gruska, Mirkhani, and Lamberson, Multiface PublishingCompany, Dearborn Heights, MI 1973.

14. “Biometrika,” Vol. 50, The Biometrika Office, University College London, December 1968.

15. “Statistical Quality Control Handbook,” by Western Electric Co., Inc., Eleventh printing.May 1985.

16. “Hewlett-Packard Applications Programs,“ Hewlett-Packard Corporation, 1975.

P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L I N D E X 1

Index

A

access lists

maintaining 9-10

additional quality personnel viewing alarms 10-2

Alarm Access Profiles component

Alarm Access Profiles page 10-3

Alarm Detail component

Alarm Detail page 10-13

alarm review business processes

types of 10-1

Alarm Review component

Alarm Review page 10-5

Alarm Review page - Alarm Detail page 10-8

Alarm Review page - Alarm Status tab 10-8

Alarm Review page - Stream Hierarchy tab 10-7

alarm workflow process

performing 10-12

alarms

defining access profiles 10-3

reviewing by quality analysts 10-2

viewing 10-3

viewing by additional quality personnel 10-2

viewing by operators 10-1

viewing detailed alarm information 10-8

viewing from the worklist 10-13

viewing using workflow 10-12

viewing with an access profile 10-5

attribute codes

maintaining 8-7

attribute groups

defining 8-5

understanding 8-5

Attribute Groups component

Attribute Codes page 8-7

Attribute Labels page 8-6

attribute labels

defining 8-6

attribute statistics

reviewing 10-21

attribute statistics}{XEstatistical matrix equations and

methods

attribute statistics 15-7

B

bar graph display

graph section 12-22

interacting with 12-22

maintaining default settings 5-18

scale section 12-21

title section 12-21

understanding layout 12-21

using 12-20

bar graph equations and methods 15-13

bar graph options

modifying}{XEModify Bar Graph dialog box

12-22

bar graphs

overview 1-9

basic statistics

reviewing 10-18

box plots

overview 1-10

box plots display

chart section 12-35

detail section 12-37



managing subset data for 12-37

scale section 12-35

title section 12-34


using 12-33

box plots equations and methods 15-13

box plots graph options

modifying 12-38

browser options 11-29

business structure

defining 2-2

business units

defining 3-3

establishing 2-4

C

capability indices

reviewing 10-19

characteristic class types

maintaining 4-28

characteristic specifications

displaying 7-13

Characteristic Specifications component

Characteristic Specifications page 7-13

characteristics

creating formulas for 7-6

maintaining 7-1

characteristics/where applied

displaying 8-25

Characteristics/Where Applied component


I N D E X 2 P E O P L E S O F T P R O P R I E T A R Y A N D C O N F I D E N T I A L

Characteristics/Where Applied page 8-25

Characteristics/Where Applied page -

Characteristics Details tab 8-27

Characteristics/Where Applied page - Stream

Hierarchy tab 8-27

chart 1 formulas

entering 4-16

chart 2 formulas

entering 4-17

chart formulas

entering 4-19

Column Detail panel}{XEcommon columns

adding to dataset}{XEdata columns

adding to dataset 11-20

completed sessions

editing 9-8

configuration information for PeopleSoft Quality

defining 14-2

configuration item information

copying 4-18

control chart display

chart section 12-6

control limit description section 12-6

detail section 12-7




separator section 12-7

title section 12-5


using 12-4

control chart graph options

modifying 12-9

control charts

constructing 1-6

overview 1-8, 4-2

setting up 4-14

Control Charts component

Chart 1 Formulas page 4-16

Chart 2 Formulas page 4-17

Chart Formula Definition page 4-19

General page 4-14

control charts equations and methods 15-9

control limit calculations

attribute control charts 15-11

variable control charts 15-9, 15-10

control limit promotion method

example 8-24

control limits

defining promotion milestones 4-25

displaying 8-30

Control Limits component

Control Limits page 8-30

Control Limits page - Control Limit Details (1) tab

8-32

Control Limits page - Control Limit Details (2) tab

8-32

Control Limits page - Stream Hierarchy tab 8-31

control plan

selecting from an access list 9-13

selecting using hierarchy fields 9-15

control plan instructions

viewing 9-31

control plan performance

reviewing 10-14

Control Plan Performance component

Attribute Statistics page 10-21

Attribute Statistics page - Defects tab 10-22

Attribute Statistics page - Sums tab 10-22

Basic Statistics page 10-18

Capability Indices page 10-19

Capability Indices page - % Spec tab 10-20

Capability Indices page - Cp/Cpk tab 10-20

Control Plan Inquiry page 10-14

Stream Review page 10-16

control plan selection

modes when entering data 9-13

Control Plan Selections page 9-11

control plans

assigning to the access list 9-11

creating multiple control plans at once 8-19

defining 8-14

establishing 8-1

loading 8-14

maintaining 8-15

prerequisites 8-4

selecting 10-14

viewing configuration information 8-25

Control Plans component

Create QCPlans page 8-19

Load QCPlans page 8-14

Maintain QCPlans page 8-15

Maintain QCPlans page - Data Collection tab

8-17

Maintain QCPlans page - Hierarchy tab 8-16

Maintain QCPlans page - Status tab 8-18

control procedures

defining 4-25

overview 4-12

Control Procedures component

Control Procedures page 4-25

Control Procedures dialog box 12-10

control test evaluation order 4-27

control tests

creating 1-7

defining groups of 4-25

overview 4-10

Control Tests component

Control Tests page 4-24

control-based system prototypes

defining tests for 4-24

Copy Configuration Item page 4-18

Corrective Actions page}{XEalarms

recording corrective actions}{XEprocess

logging comments against 9-37



creating a quality data entry session 9-2

current configuration settings

saving 11-29

current session results

reviewing 9-32

D

data

defining in PeopleSoft Quality 2-5

Data Entry (Sample Method) page 9-25

Data Entry (Subgroup Method) page 9-21

data entry access lists

defining 9-9

Data Entry Access Lists component

Access List Assignments page 9-10

Data Entry by Access List component

Data Entry by Access List page 9-13, 9-16

Data Entry by Control Plan component

Data Entry by Control Plan page 9-15, 9-17

data entry methods

examples of 8-17

data entry pages

modes of accessing 9-1

Data Extraction component

Execute Data Extraction page 11-13

Data Extraction Definition component

General page 11-9

Session/Stream Selection page 11-10

data extractions

defining 11-8

executing 11-13

data flow

in PeopleSoft Quality 2-1

Dataset Configuration panel 11-18

datasets

creating new 11-16

loading into the quality server 11-5

modifying an existing dataset 11-16

understanding 11-6

default settings

bar graph display 5-18

box plots display 5-22

control chart display 5-16

general display 5-8

histogram display 5-12

line graph display 5-21

pareto chart 5-17

stats matrix display 5-23

defaults

defining optional PeopleSoft Inventory defaults

2-5

defining optional PeopleSoft Manufacturing

defaults 2-5

defining optional PeopleSoft Purchasing defaults

2-5

Defects page}{XEdefects

recording 9-30

distribution analysis 15-8

E

Edit Data component

Enter Field Hierarchy page 9-17

editing a completed session 9-8

EIP messages

PeopleSoft Quality 14-5

EIP processing

example of application engine program 14-19,

14-26

example of application engine sample input test file

14-37

troubleshooting 14-19

useful SQL 14-19

enterprise integration points See integrating, with

third-party applications

equation construction functions

definition 4-21

F

file download options 11-29

Formula Definition page 7-6

G

general display


general options

defining 3-2

graph and display preferences

defining 5-1

maintaining 5-8

overview 5-1

Graph and Display Preferences component

Graph and Display Preferences - Bar Graph

Display Options page 5-18

Graph and Display Preferences - Box Plots Display

Options page 5-22

Graph and Display Preferences - Control Chart


Graph and Display Preferences - Histogram


Graph and Display Preferences - Line Graph


Graph and Display Preferences - Pareto Chart


Graph and Display Preferences - Stats Matrix


Graph and Display Preferences page 5-8

Graph Display page}{XEcontrol plan

viewing graph in HTML format 9-35



H

hierarchy fields

associating with quality function 6-7

using to select a a completed session 9-17

using to select a a previously started session 9-17

histogram display

chart section 12-13



list section 12-14



title section 12-13


using 12-12

histogram graph options

modifying 12-16

histogram menu bar

executing tests from 12-17

Histogram Options dialog box 12-16

histogram statistics 15-8

histograms

overview 1-8

history requirements 4-27

I

implementing PeopleSoft Quality

preparation for 2-1

Instructions page 9-31, 10-10

integrating

with PeopleSoft Inventory 13-10

with PeopleSoft Inventory - prerequisites 13-11

with PeopleSoft Production Management 13-16

with PeopleSoft Production Management -

prerequisites 13-20

with PeopleSoft Purchasing 13-2

with PeopleSoft Purchasing - prerequisites 13-4

with third-party applications 14-1

with third-party applications - prerequisites 14-1

integrating with other PeopleSoft applications

overview 1-11, 13-1

prerequisites 13-1

integrating with third-party systems

overview 1-11

integration of PeopleSoft Inventory with PeopleSoft

Quality

overview 13-14

integration of PeopleSoft Production Management

with PeopleSoft Quality

overview 13-23

using production IDs 13-23

using production schedules 13-25

integration of PeopleSoft Purchasing with PeopleSoft

Quality

overview 13-7

integration with third-party applications

overview 14-4

system view 14-4

L

limit promotion milestones 4-26

line graph

overview 1-10

line graph display


graph section 12-26


legend section 12-27



scale section 12-26

title section 12-25


using 12-25

line graph options

modifying 12-28

line graphs equations and methods 15-13

M

Mean Test dialog box 12-17

measurement plan configuration information

viewing 7-11

Measurement Plan Review component

Measurement Plan Review page 7-11

measurement plans

defining 7-1

maintaining 7-1

reviewing 7-11

Measurement Plans component

Characteristics page 7-1

Characteristics page - Controls tab 7-4

Characteristics page - Formula tab 7-6

Characteristics page - General tab 7-3

Characteristics page - Specification Limits tab

7-5

Instructions page 7-10

Modify Box Plot dialog box 12-38

Modify Control Chart dialog box 12-9

Modify Line Graph dialog box 12-28

Modify Pareto Chart dialog box 12-31

N

normality test}{XEstatistical matrix equations and

methods

normality test 15-6



O

operator instructions

defining 7-10

operators viewing alarms 10-1

P

pareto chart

chart section 12-30



scale section 12-30

title section 12-29


using 12-28

pareto chart display


pareto chart options

modifying 12-31

pareto charts

overview 1-9

pareto charts equations and methods 15-12

Pearson criteria

best-fit}{XEstatistical matrix equations and

methods

pearson best-fit 15-7

pending sessions

recalling 9-5

PeopleSoft general options

defining 3-2

PeopleSoft Quality

overview 1-1

prerequisites to setting up 3-1

setting up 3-1

verifying installation of 14-1

PeopleSoft Quality architecture

summary 1-12

PeopleSoft Quality control plan configuration

overview 8-1

PeopleSoft Quality data flow

understanding 2-1

PeopleSoft Quality EIP messages 14-5

PeopleSoft Quality EIPs

understanding 14-5

predefined quality function

reviewing when integrating with PeopleSoft

Inventory 13-10


Production Management 13-16


Purchasing 13-3

Probable Causes page}{XEalarms

assigning probable causes 9-36

process capability indices}{XEstatistical matrix

equations and methods

process capability 15-5

process control limits

assigning 8-24

resetting 8-24

statuses 8-23

process flow

editing a completed session 9-8

entering quality data 9-2

recalling a pending session 9-5

process performance information

reviewing 10-1

process streams

maintaining 8-20

reviewing 10-16

purge process 9-39

Q

quality analyst reviewing alarms 10-2

quality control requirements

defining 1-6

quality data

collecting 9-1

entering 9-2

entering, maintaining and editing 9-12

methods of entering, maintaining, and editing

9-20

quality data collection business process

overview 9-1

Quality Definition component

Quality Bus Unit page 3-3

quality functions

defining 6-1

maintaining 6-4

overview 6-1

Quality Functions component

Hierarchy Field Selections page 6-7

Quality Functions page 6-4

Trace Field Selections page 6-8

quality methods

defining 4-1

overview 4-1

quality server

launching 11-1

understanding 11-1

using 11-1

quality server buttons 11-4

quality server charts

saving and printing 12-42

summarizing 12-1

using 12-4

quality server datasets and displays

saving 12-42

saving the display in HTML format 12-42

quality server displays



printing 12-43

using 12-1

quality server layouts

applying 11-27

creating 11-25

understanding 11-25

quality server templates

creating 11-25

quality server toolbar

understanding 11-3

quality sessions

modes for accessing when maintaining or editing

data 9-16

quartiles 15-3

R

recalling a pending session 9-5

Review page 9-32

Alarms tab 9-34

Results tab 9-33

S

Sample Detail page 10-11

sample method 9-25

sampling codes

defining 4-28

types of 4-13

Sampling Codes component

Characteristic Class Types page 4-28

Sampling Frequency Types page 4-29

sampling frequency types

maintaining 4-29

security

confidentiality in PeopleSoft applications 3-2

selector panel

understanding 11-14

using 11-14

Selector panel 11-16

Session List page 9-19

skewness & kurtosis 15-4

speadsheet display


spreadsheet

using 11-23

spreadsheet display


using 12-39

Standard Deviation Test dialog box 12-18

Start Alarm Workflow component

Start Alarm Workflow page 10-12

Start Session Purge component

Start Session Purge page 9-39

stations

maintaining 8-13

Stations component

Stations page 8-13

statistical equations and methods used for PeopleSoft

Quality 15-1

statistical matrix

overview 1-10

statistical matrix display



using 12-41

statistical matrix equations and methods 15-1

basic statistics}{XEbasic statistics 15-2

quartiles 15-3

skewness & kurtosis 15-4

statistics

associating with the Histogram, Box Plots, or Stats

Matrix 5-13

histogram 15-8

test 15-9

Statistics Selections page 5-13

stats matrix display


Stream Details page 8-20

Control Limits tab 8-22

Specification Limits tab 8-21

stream specifications

displaying 8-27

Stream Specifications component

Stream Specifications page 8-27

Stream Specifications page - Specification Limit

Details tab 8-29

Stream Specifications page - Stream Hierarchy tab

8-29

Subgroup List page 10-17

subgroup method 9-21

subset data

managing for the line graph display 12-27

Subset Detail panel}{XEsubsets

adding to dataset 11-21

Subset/Column Detail panel 11-23

system defaults

defining 2-4

T

tables

setting up 2-4

test statistics 15-9

tests

executing from the control chart menu bar 12-10

trace fields

associating with quality function 6-8

traceability sets

defining 8-10

Traceability Sets component

Traceability Sets page 8-10



V

viewing alarms 10-3

W

work area

clearing 9-39

maintaining 9-39

workflow

and PeopleSoft Quality 2-3

and viewing alarms 10-12

worklist

viewing alarms from 10-13

peoplesoft 8.00.01 quality peoplebook · peoplesoft 8.00.01 quality peoplebook january 2001...

Documents